Home

ALERT User Guide

Contents

1. Schedule On call schedule of the group selected in the screen see 6 1 On call schedule Alarms Table of alarms present in the supervised application see 6 2 Alarm table History History and statistics on the alarms and user interventions see 6 3 Alarm history Journal Journal displaying the event log see 6 4 Event log ALERT User Guide 4 9 User Interface Reports Logbook containing reports recorded by the users see 6 5 Logbook A browsing bar located above the synoptic view identifies the selected view and can be used to quickly browse through the various views It also gives the choice among various graphical representations The size of each window can be adjusted by moving the mouse cursor on the vertical or horizontal split bar between the windows cursor or displayed clicking on the left button of the mouse then dragging the cursor in the wished direction keeping the mouse button pressed Note it is possible to suppress the topographical representation of the application with the associated synoptic views to return to a display compatible with the previous versions before the version 3 5 e Either generally for all the users by unselecting the Mapping display option in the starting options see 7 1 1 Starting parameters e Or for a specific user profile by unselecting the menu entry Supervision Mapping o
2. Configuration menu On call management Supervision Message processor User profiles Communication Vocal server Options Applications Toolbar Record messages by telephone User record Consultation of the record of logged user Send a message Send a service message or files to one or several operators Calls in progress Consultation and acknowledgment of current calls Schedule Display and modification of schedules Alarms Display and acknowledgment of alarms History Display of history and statistics Event log Display of the event log journal Logbook Display of logbook and report edition Team changeover Begin End of on call period Set or reset the derogation state of on call groups Mask or unmask alarms On call Management Configure on call management operators groups teams Supervision Configure list of tags to supervise 1 Message processor Configure the message processor 4 2 User profiles Configure the user profiles Communication Configure the communication parameters 2 Vocal server Configure the vocal server 1 Options Configure the application options 1 Applications Configure the list of associated applications 2 Toolbar Customize the tool bar 1 Record messages by telephone Indicate the messages recorded by telephone are to be keep alarm messages 4 The Message processor command is only displayed when the messa
3. 8 12 3 1 DDE protocol items gt TOPICITEMLIST List of items supported under the USER topic gt CONVCOUNT Current number of DDE conversations established with the USER topic gt ADVISECOUNT Current number of advise transactions with items of the USER topic 8 12 3 2 User management items gt DRIVERLIST List of installed communication drivers gt USERCOUNT Number of defined operators gt USERLIST List of operators each operator in the list being represented by his name followed by his first name gt USERACCES Operator login request through DDE by poke of the string user name lt Tab gt access code If the name followed or not by first name and the associated code are valid the poke command is accepted If a call was pending for the operator in question it is automatically acknowledged The USER topic also includes for each operator gt a lt USER gt item that contains the record of the user designated by lt USER gt operator s name followed or not by his first name or an abbreviation of the first name See the record description below e a lt USER gt ONDUTY item allowing the on duty status of the user to be read and write 0 user off duty 1 user on duty gt a lt USER gt CALLSTATUS item for reading of the call cycle status of the user 0 on call cycle for the user 1 callin progress 2 call suspended 3 call succeeded wait for call acknowledgment 4 call failed 5 Call acknowledged 6
4. Fr Groups a A ay ninge Station Central Station aneen Ar Comment Building A FT Nock Building B On Call ftal r mm Ack All ads Group ial M Unmasked H Mechanical it On Call Management He Lisers a2 Groups Maintenance Be GONTRAN Klaus MARTIN Roger Ba NIGHT Be ALTMAN Peter Central Station Be BOURGEOIS Will Buildings Building 4 Fire REFERENCE Excell T est xls 4larms L1C1 SA ALTMAN Peter Le de oe D Be LAGARDE Hans Fire Be PAYOT Guy Be HENRY Peter 07 29 08 36 31 VALUE 1 pre iz down Start ventilation transto 1 wE a o dise ACENOWLEDGMT 07 29 08 36 BY ALTMAN Feter Djbouti COMMENT amp Supervision Tags HISTORY Groups RE On Call Management ye Users a2 Groups H schedule ad Alarms History Reports ALERT System Thursday July 29 2004 08 39 29 07 06 36 31 ACTIVATION 29 07 08 36 35 ACKNOWLEOCGMT ALTMAN Peter The alarm table displays the time stamped list of all alarms that have been detected that they are active or inactive acknowledged or not An alarm remains in the alarm table as long as it is not removed by an operator s explicit command or if the option Automatic deletion of inactive and acknowledged alarms is validated in alarm options see 7 4 Alarm options until it is simultaneously inactive and acknowledged The displayed list represents the content of the alarm table according to the station group selec
5. Sound file or message to synthesize This dropdown list designates the audio file which contains the recorded vocal message WAV format or if the typed text is not ended by WAV the text to synthesize to produce the vocal message to play on the local station If the field is empty the played message will be the vocal message defined for the activation reset or acknowledgment according to the selected tab Repeated message When this option is checked the vocal message is repeated until the alarm acknowledgment This selection is only possible for activation of events defined as alarms 5 62 Configuration Button Browse Click on this button to browse file and select the desired audio file Button Record Click on this button to record the audio file Button Jest The selected audio file or the synthesized message can be played for test by clicking on this button ALERT User Guide 5 63 Configuration 5 16 Commands The Alert software is capable of initiating commands to write external variables or outputs in reaction to an event activation or reset or an alarm acknowledgment A command can be used for example to activate a siren or a flashing light or during a call cycle to signal the call procedure failure or to command an external relief call system Each command is designated by a name and is made up of a sequence of basic writing commands of external variables by DDE or OPC or outputs through a
6. Click on this button to create a new command see below Button Edit Click on this button to modify the parameters of the command selected in the list see below Button Delete Click on this button to delete the command selected in the list 5 16 2 Command definition A command is made up of a sequence of basic writing commands of external variables by DDE or OPC or outputs through a communication driver with timer capability Command definition Ok Command 1 o Cancel MW Trace commands in event log Help Sequence External reference Excell T est xls Outputs L 101 WT Excell T est xls Outputs L 101 Insert rite Wi alt Edit Remove Associated value _ Apply The controlled variables and outputs are designated in the sequence The value written on each variable or output can be predefined in the sequence and can include the content of supervised tags A default value can also be redefined when referring to the command in the action list attached to an event This default value will be applied to every variables and outputs that are not defined in the sequence It allows the same command to be used to write various values in function of the command origin ALERT User Guide 5 65 Configuration Name This field designates the command by an explicit name This name must be unique in the command list Trace commands When this option is checked the command execu
7. MS Links with supervisor Connections Display all items Excel T est xls 4larmns LICT 1 Excel T est ls larme L1C216 Excel T est ls 4larmns LCa Excel T est xls Alarms Lit Excel Test xle 4larmns LICS Excel T est ls 4larmns LICE Excel T est xls larme LIC NetSentinel UPCServer 1 SERYER OnLine 1 Excel T est xls larme LICS gt Start connections Close connections Help ok The link list contains a list of all the items currently polled by DDE or OPC for which the connection with the DDE or OPC server has been established and a response to a first request has been received Server Name of the server application Group Name of the variable group DDE topic for DDE variables Item Name of the item Value Current value of the item This list can be customized2 gt Connections The number of established connections is indicated above of the list under the form Number of response received Number of connections established Number of connections to establish 25 This list can be entirely customized selection of columns to display order width and title of columns alignment of the title or the column content To perform this customization position the mouse cursor on the column of which one wants to modify the presentation and click on the right button of the mouse Select then the adequate command in the displayed contextual menu The new configuration is automatically saved to be restored for the ne
8. l Dial numbers Type Number amp ddress Calls Orange 0756342595 3 E0 s Vocal 0756342595 3 60 s Auto 405 3 60 z Auto Edit Delete Schedule hd At the creation time of a new record a numerical operator code from 1 to 4 digits is automatically assigned to him The length of the user code depends on the value defined in the vocal server options see 7 7 1 Vocal Server options This code is used to identify the correspondent in vocal communications It can be modified under condition to be unique in the user database The configurable user properties are Identification e Name User name 1 to 20 characters This field can only be modified by an authorized user user configuration authorized in the profile access level higher or equal 5 2 Configuration e First Name User first name optional O to 20 characters This field can only be modified by an authorized user user configuration authorized in the profile access level higher or equal e Language Usual language of the operator Messages addressed to the user will be transmitted in this language when the message does exist in the language in question If the message to transmit is not defined in the user language it will be searched in the following order gt inthe user interface language if it is defined in this language gt in US English if it is defined in this language gt inthe first available language for the message
9. tag defined as important alarm A tag defined as no important alarm L tag defined as alarm but without call local alarm E tag defined as simple event event log with or without call ia tag defined as acknowledgment command of the associated group with call K tag defined as acknowledgment command of the associated group without call y simple tag that can be referenced otherwise to display its value The second character defines how the tag is polled x permanent polling DDE or OPC y periodic request DDE or OPC o DDE request on alarm detected in the group a no polling A tag is defined as priority when its priority level is greater than or equal to the minimal level definite in alarm options A priority alarm always provokes the call of operators of the on call group that it is in period of reduced duty or not The dropdown lists Station Group and On Call allow the visualized list to be reduced to the tags belonging to the join of the selected entities Button Network This button is only validated when the network resources are available It allows a computer containing the wanted DDE server application to be selected on the network Once this computer is selected the service name is automatically updated It is then sufficient to enter in the group field the DDE share name of the couple service topic concerned and the name of the tag to super
10. 1st parameter name of user 2nd parameter 0 off duty 1 on duty optional 1 by default Example DDE command ValidUser lt Tab gt Bob lt Tab gt 0 Command line ALERT ValidUser Bob 0 8 13 12 SendConsole Object Send a message to the operators defined with the console attribute see 5 1 User Parameters 1st parameter alohanumerical message to transmit 2nd parameter message identifier optional The message identifier is used to identify the message upon acknowledgment AckConsole If this identifier is defined the message will only be transmitted during the on call period of the remote console this message being hold until that period If the identifier is not defined no 2 parameter the message is systematically transmitted whether or not the remote console is on call Example DDE command SendConsole lt Tab gt Battery fault message forced SendConsole lt Tab gt Battery fault lt Tab gt A001 message transmit if on call Command line ALERT SendConsole Battery fault message forced ALERT SendConsole Battery fault A001 message transmit if on call ALERT User Guide 8 45 Appendix 8 13 13 AckConsole Object Acknowledgment of a console message Parameters 1st parameter identifier of message to acknowledge Example DDE command AckConsole lt Tab gt A001 Command line ALERT AckConsole A001 8 13 14 RestoreLinks Object Reinitialize the DDE and OPC links
11. De 40 6 Comment Maintenance Active team EMARTIN Roger BALTMAN Peter M BOURGEOIS williams D GONTRAN Klaus BM RTIN Roger NIGHT Reduced duty Copy Program Wednesday July 28 2004 15 28 0 6 1 Operation 6 1 1 Visualization This screen displays the schedule of teams to call for a group on a period of 12 months from the previous month of the current month The selected group is the group displayed at the top right of the screen To select another group click on the arrow of the Groups control and then select the wanted group in the dropdown list This field is grayed when the group is selected in the tree of the main screen Teams to call are represented by color strips To identify the represented teams use the color legend represented by the team list of the selected group on the right of the screen One can also visualize and modify the content of a team by double clicking in the list on the team in question The visible part of the timetable corresponds to days displayed on the left of the screen for the month selected in the panel of buttons located below The selected month always corresponds to the 1st day displayed in the schedule Days of the week are represented with a white ground color Days of the weekend Saturday and Sunday are represented with a yellow ground color The holiday days are represented with a beige ground color The holiday days marked with a cross in
12. Delete Deletion of the selected operators After confirmation the operators are definitively deleted Properties Edition of the properties of the selected operator see 5 1 1 User properties ALERT User Guide 4 25 User Interface 4 6 1 9 On call groups The Groups branch displays in its associated view the list of the defined groups The groups represented with the icon amp are the groups in which there is no active team no team scheduled team changeover not performed or group in derogation state without redirection of the calls The groups represented with the overlapped symbol amp are those in which the active team is not reachable all operators off duty or with invalid dial numbers The order of the groups can be customized in the tree and in the report view associated with the Groups branch To move a group click on its icon with the mouse left button drag the icon keeping the mouse button pressed over the icon of the group AFTER which the group is wished to be moved and then release the mouse button To move a group to the first position drag its icon over the Groups icon The list of groups allows some actions to be performed on the selected groups e The call of one or several groups simultaneously meaning the call of the active teams of each of the selected groups e The locking of the calls for one or more groups meaning the forcing to the derogation state of the selected groups without redirect
13. For example a bad quality in OPC 26 A mediator module is a DLL module which takes charge of the data exchanges between the ALERT software and the supervised application 7 6 Options Server item receiving the event log This option designates an item in an external DDE or OPC server application that will receive the trace of the events logged by ALERT user login alarms acknowledgments This reference can be directly typed or browsed by clicking on the button on the right of the edit field To disable the event transmission to an external variable you just have to erase the reference of the defined variable The events logged by Alert are transmitted to the selected DDE variable under the form Event code lt Tab gt Parameters See the Event coding table on the following page Watch Dog item This option defines an item in an external DDE or OPC server application which will be then cyclically written with the value of a counter incremented at each cycle This item could be tested by the external application to check that its contents changes according to the parameterized cycle and so control that the alarm manager is still running This reference can be directly typed or browsed by clicking on the button on the right of the edit field e The Cycle parameter defines the period of the writing cycle of the designated item in seconds A null value disables the watch dog processing e The Modulo parameter defines th
14. Parameters none Example DDE command RestoreLinks Command line ALERT RestoreLinks 8 13 15 ShowWindow Object Acknowledgment of a console message Parameters 1st parameter display mode 0 Hide the Alert window 1 Display of the Alert window with normal size 2 Display of the Alert window as icon 3 Display of the Alert window as maximized full screen 4 Alert window always visible topmost window Example DDE command ShowWindow lt Tab gt 2 Command line ALERT ShowWindow 2 set the ALERT window as icon 8 46 Appendix 8 13 16 PlayText Object Synthesizes and plays a message on the local station require TTS option Parameters 1st parameter message to synthesize Example DDE command PlayText lt Tab gt Full alert Command line ALERT PlayText Full alert 8 13 17 SendDataToScript Object Transmits a string command to the Message Processor Parameters 1st parameter message to process Example DDE command SendDataToScript lt Tab gt AAAA XXX ZZZZ Command line ALERT SendDataToScript AAAA XXX ZZZZ ALERT User Guide 8 47 Appendix 8 14 Message Processor 8 14 1 General presentation The message processor is a specific mediator module of Alert Its function is to deal with messages for alarm information extraction and triggering of consequent treatments alarm set reset acknowledgment Messages are any character strings alohanumerical or binary that can be issu
15. Team changeover mandatory This option defines the default management mode of the team changeover When this option is checked the on call users off the group have to clock in and out One of the users of the new on call team has to clock in at the scheduled changeover time within a configurable deadline If the team changeover has not been performed when the deadline is reached a team changeover fault is signaled with possibility of trigging an alarm Similarly at the end of the on call period if no other team is planned one of the users of the on call team has to clock out Failing which the team will remain on call beyond the planned period Maximum delay for team changeover This option defines for the group the default value of the maximum accepted delay to clock in from the planned beginning time of the on call period When clocking in this delay is proposed by default for waiting the next team changeover The proposed time can still be modified at this time Button Advanced This button gives access to the advanced parameters of the group 5 16 Configuration Group advanced parameters Station Central Station Resolution 60 Associated command Group to call Group advised Group call failed Group acknowledged Station This drop down list selects the station to which the group is attached This information is only used to discriminate groups with same name on different sites By default the na
16. User Guide Version 3 5 rev 2 May 2005 Copyright 1994 2005 Micromedia International MICROMEDIA INTERNATIONAL 11 chemin du Vieux Ch ne ZIRST 4201 F 38942 MEYLAN Cedex amp 33 0 4 76 04 11 00 Fax 33 0 4 76 90 24 76 email micromedia micromedia int com web www micromedia int com MICROMEDIA INTERNATIONAL 11 chemin du Vieux Ch ne ZIRST 4201 F 38942 MEYLAN Cedex amp 33 0 4 76 04 11 00 Fax 33 0 4 76 90 24 76 email micromedia micromedia int com web www micromedia int com Summary SUMMARY 1 INTRODUCTION ssissssccccsssscccascesaceissecocsseacessadeccsssessecees Ve LE DESCRIP TOWNiccssscccseecccovecsceececausccsccsedssccscndsessasssessecuseeseonseus 1 1 1 2 FUNCTIONS ssccseccccccsccenscecsccatsencessscccacntsctecccsecesnteetecedsetesdseces 1 4 1 3 NEWS OF THE VERSION 3 5 REVISION 1 cccccsccccccccccsccccccceee 1 8 1 4 NEWS OF THE VERSION 3 5 REVISION 2 ccccccccccsccscccccccccceee 1 9 2 FUNCTIONNING cccccccccccsccccccsccccccccsccccccscccsscccocs 2 1 2 1 APPLICATION SUPERVISION ccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccccscccsccsces 2 1 2 2 USER MANAGEMENT ccccsccsccccccccccsscscccccccccescescccccccscsscccccccsces 2 4 2 3 GROUP AND TEAM ORGANIZATION cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccees 2 6 2 4 CALL MANAGEMENT ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccess 2 8 2 5 CONTROL OF WORKING FAILURES cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccess 2 9 2 6 REDUNDANT MODE csscsscessccec
17. e The name of the operator who has written the report in question e The edition date of the report e The topic matter of the report This topic is a label which allows sorting of the reports The topic is optional if there is no topic e An indicator of alarm report if the rapport has been edited from the alarm table or alarm history e An indicator of attached files 8 if one or several files are attached to the report e To open the files attached to a report click with the right button of the mouse on the symbol then select the wanted file in the displayed contextual menu e A button FLA if an audio message is associated with the report Press this button to listen the message Keep it pressed during the time you are listening the voice message When the logbook is displayed the following actions can be performed e Select the day to visualize by clicking on the desired day in the Date list e Select the type of reports to be displayed by performing a sort by author User dropdown list and or topic Topic dropdown list Click on the New button to create a new report see 6 6 Editing a report Click on the Edit button to edit the report selected in the list of reports see 6 6 Editing a report Only the author of a report can edit it to change or complete it on the condition that the right report edition modification of the logbook is validated in his user profile ALERT User Gui
18. team changeover lt A gt gt Team changeover failed team A to team B in lt B gt group G timeout expired 4 Group lt G gt team lt E gt lt operator gt End on call time group G team E Event coding 27 If the acknowledgement is issued from an external application without identification of operator the part operator is omitted 28 If the call is acknowledged by the called operator himself the part operator is omitted 29 If no team is defined in derogation the part gt team is omitted 30 f 1st changeover the part lt A gt is suppressed if default delay the part max delay is suppressed 7 8 Options 7 2 1 Secondary DDE Servers To access to the configuration of the secondary DDE servers select the Options command of the Configuration menu then on the displayed dialog box select the Supervision tab Then click on the Data Servers button on the top of the page Data Servers Primary servers T est ele larme NetSentinel OPCS erver 1 Secondary servers redundancy Test xle 4larmns This dialog box defines a list of secondary redundant servers for each DDE or OPC server referred to in the polling list In normal time the DDE and OPC connections are established with the primary servers In case of disconnection of a primary server the connection is automatically reestablished with the first available secondary server in the list of the secondary servers associat
19. 45 W Fas 45 Advanced Incoming call Ce Vocal Modem Data Called number 45000 l Add Remove The following parameters can be configured Max communication time This time defines the maximum duration of a communication in seconds After this time the modem is automatically disconnected If this time is set to O there is no limit for the communication time Prefix to dial Prefix to dial to have access to the public telephone network on the line connected to the controller The prefix indicates that the line is exclusively reserved for internal calls no access to the public telephone network Periodic line test Validation of the periodic test of the telephonic line This test is periodically performed in accordance with the cycle defined in the general dialing parameters Relief When this option is checked the modem will be only used in relief mode when none of the main communication ports not defined as relief can be used ports in failure 5 80 Configuration This option allows a relief calling device to be used in case of problem with the usual calling systems Controller configuration for outgoing calls When the Vocal option is checked the controller can be used to transmit vocal calls The associated Advanced button allows advanced parameters to be defined for the vocal communications When the Fax option is checked the controller can be used to transmit fax calls
20. Caution 4 station can be synchronized only if a user with the same name exists This user has to use driver of type Alert Modern or Alert Direct or Alert Socket Sunchroneation parameters W Date and time All data Modified data only All data Modified data only ced in we To be able to synchronize remote stations it is necessary first to define for every remote station a virtual operator having a call number attached to a synchronization driver Alert Modem Alert Socket Alert Direct Station The station list displays the list of users configured with a driver having synchronization capabilities and who have the same name as one of the defined stations Select in this list the station to synchronize Synchronization options The synchronization options are e Date and time The calling station set the date of the called station To be able to set the date and time the called station needs to select the Alert driver option Date and time updates enabled 6 28 Operation e Configuration synchronization If the local station is the main station the synchronized data are the data associated to the called station If the local station is a remote station the synchronized data are its own data For both case one can send and or receive all the configuration data or only the modified data since the last synchronization The synchronized data are the users the on call groups the teams the tag g
21. Ge NIGHT 11 37 33 NORMAL Ventilation tansto room 1 AB 3EL128 1072904 Initialization Log in out Alarms Acknowledgments Calls In Out Succeeded Calls Fails Informations Defaults On call Redundancy Masking Djibouti amp Supervision lE Tags T List locked x Groups FG Schedule History Journal Reports ALERT System Thursday July 29 2004 11 39 lt lt 1 K K lt l I K lt l K lt l KI K The event log contains the history of all significant actions that intervened at the level of the alarm supervision station and each of the remote stations operator login alarms calls acknowledgements This event log is recorded in files one file per day located in the TRACE subdirectory of the application directory The date corresponding to a file is coded in its name under the form TYYMMDD LOG with YY year MM month DD day 6 4 1 Visualization Every event is represented in the event log under the form of a time stamped line The events that can be recorded in the event log are defined in the table of the following page Operation INIT Application initialization EXT Application closure LOGOUT User logout MESSAGE CALL lt operator gt lt port gt lt driver gt Outgoing call for message ALARM CALL Outgoing call for alarm ADVISED Advised operator UNADVISED Unadvised operator CALL FAIL lt operator gt lt cause gt Call failure ALARM lt alarm message
22. Open selected station Acknowledgment Properties Edition of the properties of the list of tags or ee groups icon change ropertes User Interface 4 6 1 4 Tags The Tags branch displays in the associated synoptic view the whole supervised tags that are attached to the parent station It also displays in its sub tree the list of the data servers DDE and OPC referred to in the tag list The type and the status of a tag are represented by icons In the report representation the column LJ 1st column by default displays the type of the tag and the column 2nd column by default displays its status In the other views each tag is represented by an icon resulting from the juxtaposition of the icons representative of its type and its status The type of a tag is symbolized by the following icons Variable Event E Alarm nl Masked alarm gt The status of a tag is signaled by the following symbols DDE or OPC tag not polled Invalid tag server out of order unreliable value Event active High priority alarm active not acknowledged Low priority alarm active not acknowledged Alarm active acknowledged High priority alarm reset not acknowledged Low priority alarm reset not acknowledged VV 4i4IG X In the report representation the current value is displayed and updated in real time When the value is not valid link failure or data not yet read the value is represented by a question mark Note
23. The associated Advanced button allows advanced parameters to be defined for the fax communications When the Modem option is checked the controller can be used to transmit calls to destination of analog modems When the Data option is checked the controller can be used to transmit calls in data mode to destination of ISDN controllers The calling number associated with each selection is the dial number that will be transmitted as calling number to the receiver With some installations that number must be specified in order to have the call accepted Controller configuration for incoming calls When the Vocal option is checked the controller can be used to receive vocal calls When the Modem option is checked the controller can be used to receive calls from analog modems When the Data option is checked the controller can be used to receive calls in data mode from ISDN controllers The treatment to perform on reception of a call of type modem or data must be selected in the dropdown list associated with each type The proposed treatments are gt Telematic server answer to a remote terminal by using the Visual Access application terminal server gt Alert modem answer performed by the Alert modem driver for data exchange with a remote station When the message processor is active the treatments that have been defined for a serial link can also be selected Called number List of the numbers accepted by the controlle
24. This schedule defines under a graphical form the weekly assignment of the dial number to use to reach the operator The dial numbers programmed for every day of the week are represented as a line drawn with the color of the number On a same daily period several numbers can be stacked defining a sequence of numbers to call following the displayed order of the stack from top to bottom Of course the call sequence will end after the first successful call of a final number To put a number in the schedule select it in the number list then draw with the mouse on the weekly schedule the rectangle area corresponding to the wished period on one or several day ranges Note holidays are defined in the general on call schedule by clicking on the first column of the row corresponding to the wished day e Activation Select this option to activate the displayed dial number schedule This option is automatically selected as soon the schedule is modified Uncheck this option to disable the schedule e Resolution This dropdown list defines the schedule resolution in minutes minimum time slot e Max numbers This dropdown list defines the maximum size of the number sequence displayable in the schedule number of stackable lines by day row 5 8 Configuration 5 2 User profiles To define and configure usable user profiles select the User profiles command in the Configuration menu In initial configuration this command
25. V T The state of a bit is defined by the corresponding bit in the value X converted in hexadecimal Example for the bit mask 00010000 translate in hexadecimal 10h then type the value converted in decimal 16 The value X entered in edit field can be numeric positive or negative integer or float or alphanumeric A value is defined as numeric if it begins by one of the following characters 1 0123 456 7 8 9 or If the value entered is alphanumeric only the operators NOT EQUAL and EQUAL are available the other operators being accepted but treated as EQUAL HIGHER OR SAME LOWER OR SAME or NOT EQUAL all the others Examples gt Event upon change to high state non null Condition NOT EQUAL i Condition proposed by default gt Detection of crossing high threshold Condition HIGHER 117 4 The value to not to go across is 117 4 Remark It is possible to supervise a high threshold and a low threshold for the same variable by defining 2 events with the same reference An event will be associated to the high threshold crossing as above with the adequate messages The other will be associated to the low threshold crossing LOWER or INF EGAL with correspondent messages 13 The state of a bit is defined by the corresponding bit in the value X converted in hexadecimal Example for the bit mask 00010000 translate in hexadecimal 10h then type the value converted in decimal 16 ALERT Use
26. Windows control general options gt redundancy parameters general options gt selected mediator general options gt DDE trace DDE options gt external applications gt activation of voice synthesis Load message processor configuration Check this option to load the configuration of the message processor of the redundant Station parameters and scripts This option is displayed only for the restoration of a remote configuration Main path Name of the basic directory in which the configurations will be saved By default it is the basic directory of the Alert application This directory can be chosen on a computer of the network Click on the Browse button to select another basic directory ALERT User Guide 5 91 Configuration 5 22 3 New configuration The New command of the File menu reinitializes the current configuration configuration files of supervision and on call management are cleared the current environment parameters being unchanged New configuration f fx Reset of JK p om Cancel Helo Help Supervision Groups amp Teams Programmed calls Alarm history E vent log Report log a 2 Ca 2 Ca fa LR Communication ports Reset of Select the options corresponding to the subsets to reinitialize gt Supervision Erase the list of supervised tags gt Groups amp Teams Reset the on call organization users groups and teams gt Programmed calls Reinitia
27. indicating that the alarm has been acknowledged can be defined like an alarm condition This acknowledgment condition can be relative to the content of the tag itself or to the content of an associated tag This functionality allows Alert to be informed by the supervised application that the alarm has been acknowledged and the consequent treatments to be performed recording in event log abort of the call cycle In addition an option allows the acknowledgment condition to be reciprocally transmitted to the supervised application when the alarm is acknowledged from Alert locally by telephone or from a remote terminal e An masking condition option On the same way a masking condition indicating that the alarm has been masked can be defined This masking condition can be relative to the content of the tag itself or to ALERT User Guide 2 3 Functionning the content of an associated tag This functionality allows Alert to be informed by the supervised application that the alarm has been masked In addition an option allows the masking condition to be reciprocally transmitted to the supervised application when the alarm is masked from Alert Each time a tag declared as event or alarm changes of state goes to event or return to normal this change of state is time stamped and recorded in the event log with possible copy on a line printer If it is a change to event state the local operator can be warned by two audio consecuti
28. it is a database in the Microsoft Access format located in the Bases subdirectory AlarmDef mdb The configuration database includes the following tables e STATIONS list of stations e GROUPS list of functional groups Groupld Group identifier e CALLGROUPS list of on call groups CallGroupld Group identifier Stationld Identifier of the attached station 8 6 Appendix e TEAMS list of on call teams CallGroupld Identifier of the attached on call group e TAGS list of supervised tags Field name Type Description e USERPROFILES list of user profiles e USERS list of operators ALERT User Guide 8 7 Appendix e DRIVERS list of installed communication drivers DriverType Driver type vocal fax SMS CountryCode Taxi Country code 2 characters NULL is not localized e CALLNUMBERS list of call numbers EntryNumber Numeric Entry number in he user directory e CALLGROUPS_USERS table for assignment of users to on call groups e TEAMS_USERS table for assignment of users to on call teams TeamUserld Link identifier Identifier of the attached on call team Identifier of the attached user Relief indicator for operator in the team 8 8 Appendix 8 3 2 History database The history database contains all the dynamic data recorded by the software alarms calls reports By default it is a database in the Microsoft Access format located in the Bases subdirector
29. lt GROUP gt 0 there is no on call team defined at the current time 1 the current on call team is defined in reduced duty only called for important alarms 2 the current on call team is defined in normal duty called for all alarms 3 no valid user in the current on call team This item is read only gt a lt GROUP gt TEAM item that returns the name of the current team to call for the group designated by lt GROUP gt This item is read only gt a lt GROUP gt DEROGTEAM item that designates the team selected to be called when the group designated by lt GROUP gt is in derogation state This item is read only gt a lt GROUP gt DEROGATION item that specifies the current derogation status of the group designated by lt GROUP gt 0 group in normal on call state teams called according to the defined schedule 8 36 Appendix 1 group in derogation state The called team is the one that is preset as derogation team If there is not a preset team calls concerning the group are locked This item is read only gt a lt GROUP gt CALLSTATUS item that indicates the current status of the call cycle for the group designated by lt GROUP gt 0 no current call cycle for the group 1 call cycle in progress 2 call transmitted wait for call acknowledgment 3 group unwarned call failed 4 warned group calls acknowledged This item is read only gt a lt GROUP gt CALLSTATUS item that indicates the tea
30. means that there is no schedule associated with the event choice by default To define a new schedule first select if possible schedule closest to that desired Click on the button El on the right of the dropdown list then select in the displayed menu the command New After having entered the name of the new schedule draw the desired schedule in the time table then validate by clicking on the OK button ALERT User Guide 5 43 Configuration The name of the selected schedule can be modified by selecting the command Rename in the menu which is displayed when clicking on the button on the right of the dropdown list The command Remove of the same menu delete the selected schedule This deletion will affect alls the tags which share this schedule Schedule activation Check the Schedule activation checkbox to activate the configured schedule Time table To define a time area of masking or inhibition select the desired type of masking or inhibition in the list top Bring the mouse pointer on the timetable on the cell corresponding to the week day and begin time of the wanted time area press the left button of the mouse then drag the mouse pointer keeping the button pressed to the cell corresponding to the last hour of the last day of the chosen time area Finally release the button To erase a time area redo the same operation but by using the right button of the mouse 5 11 3 Properties of alarm acknowledgment This d
31. whatever is the on call status of the concerned user If it is not checked the call will be performed only during the on call periods of the user Message Text message to send during the programmed call 0 to 512 characters The number of characters is displayed above the edit field e Tag value The message can contain variable fields To incorporate in the message a tag value of the supervision list click on the button In the displayed dialog box select the wished tag then validate The numerical identifier of the tag is inserted in the edit field at the current cursor position under the form amp tag id e Option Vocal Message If the operator has to be called by telephone and if the voice synthesis option is not installed validate this option then either record the vocal message Record button or select it among the prerecorded messages Browse button e Option Associated Text File Validate this option to associate a text file with the message This file is used to transmit some further information by fax or email It can be defined as contextual and incorporate the value of tags of the supervision list Click on the Edit button to directly type the text to transmit or on the Browse button to browse and select an existing text file on the disk 5 24 Configuration 5 7 Programmed file transfers To configure the programmed files transfers select the On call management command in the Confi
32. 5 Introduction simultaneously It can be also transmitted by DDE to client applications that requested it or to a designated DDE server application e Management of a logbook containing intervention reports of the operators These reports can be either written or vocally recorded They are automatically signed and time stamped and they can be classified by topic Reports can be especially attached to one or more alarms A vocal report can also be done by telephone a written report can be entered from a remote terminal e Automatic deletion of the oldest recording files event log history vocal messages The storage duration is configurable e Management of client stations server version to operate from any network station schedule consultation configuration derogation alarms consultation acknowledgment masking history consultation statistics journal consultation logbook consultation report edition users and groups creation and modification of users groups and teams supervision edition and modification of the supervised variable list etc e Built in vocal server with welcome message and vocal guide allowing identification of the called or calling operator by DTMF keys listening to the alarm or service messages alarm acknowledgment recording of a vocal report switching to remote terminal or callback request callback forced on option Operator identification results in the automatic acknowledgment of
33. Alarms subject ALERT alarm Cancel Reports subject ALERT report 8 26 Appendix e The Enable SMTP server Option allows the activation of the SMTP server for the reception of email by Alert e The Report subject field defines the subject of the mail that will be processed as reports e All the mails received with the subject defined in the Alarm object field will set reset or acknowledge alarms in Alert see below for the syntax to use The Connection button gives access to the dialog box of configuration of the connection parameters Connection parameters Cancel Connection name Password Connection type M ail account SMTP server address smtp wanadoo fr our email address micromedia micromedia int corn POPS server address pop wanadoo f Mail user name micromedia Mail password Incoming mail ALE AT alarm ALE AT report Alarm subject W Receive incoming mail PUPS server connection pernod in mir 1 U Report subject That dialog box allows the connection parameters to the mail servers to be modified e The LAN Modem radio buttons specify the access mode to the mail server local network LAN or Dial Up networking modem e The Connection name dropdown list selects in case of a modem connection the Dial Up networking connection to use to reach the mail server In that case the user account and password that have been assigned by the Internet
34. Alert offers control functions on its environment Control of the application working and of the link with this one Alert can detect a failure of the link with the application This failure is materialized by the fault indicator of the alarm status bar LINK the Supervision led becoming red and by recording the LINK FAILURE in the event log It also set to 1 the value of the DDEFAIL item of the Alert DDE server This item can be self supervised by Alert to produce an alarm In case of link failure with a DDE or OPC server the connection can be automatically switched on a secondary DDE or OPC server Alert also can perform periodical DDE or OPC requests watchdog for one or several variable If there is no answer after the specified delay a LINK fault is generated as for a link failure Besides the alarm associated to the event is triggered Control of the working of call systems modems Alert is able to detect a working defect of a modem on a communication port and to generate consecutively a communication port failure This failure is materialized by the fault indicator of the alarm status bar MODEM the corresponding led becoming red and by recording the COM failure in the event log It also set to 1 the value of the PORTFAIL item of the Alert DDE server This item can be self supervised by Alert for producing an alarm ALERT User Guide 2 9 Functionning 2 6 Redundant mode To reinforce the security o
35. ER E AT 4 15 4 6 1 5 Data SCI W CUS siaaa a a aA sd M ner ne 4 18 4 6 1 6 AC TOUS E Pens 4 20 4 6 1 7 O call Ma agemMie Mtani a E 4 24 4 6 1 8 DEE L AN OE te Ser REE EN E AT EE E N E A EE nn 4 24 4 6 1 9 JNC UDS sac NS nn needs 4 26 HO VEO TeS En E T ences ete ited e vate eae 4 29 4 7 BROWSING BAR cccccccsccccccccccccccccccccsccccccccccccccccescescesseseF Se S CONFIGURATION sissscsscescascssscscssscicsscasscteccosiosesseves 2 1 Sk USERLIST Sienne sde dede songes ncn oieacencodsecos eseescoscses D Sall USE POROD SUIS SES Reddit dada 5 2 5122 DIN MRETASNINIUOM AS ane te nn diner 5 5 S3 Dial NUMOErSCheQUI ss nets anne 5 7 5 2 USER PROFILES wccccevscscccssccccveccccucesecesaccsecececdsescccesescnsdeseussecsO 9 5 3 ON CALL GROUPS Sins is ds NS araoe 5 1 2 5 381 OMmeCall GrOUD Properties s cs ssexssscsesosueresevoasezessasnsnesesensussseseswasestonensaavossseasensuseansaasewsaies s 5 15 5 4 ON CALL TEAMS 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 1 8 D4 Team DIODE Sieve sertescseveceietiendince E A haan EE EEE 5 19 5 95 ON CALL PROGRAM ccdessedecccsccdsesectececcsscccscceteecsdestesieccesssser O52 5 6 PROGRAMMED CALLS cccccccscccsccccsccscccccccsccsccsccscscsscsscssess D7 LS 5 7 PROGRAMMED FILE TRANSFERS ccccccsccsccsccccsccsccsccccscescesces D7 25 5 8 PROGRAMMED STATION SYNCHRONIZATIONS cccsccsccscccesces D 27 5 9 LIST OF TAGS TO SUPERVISE ccccccsccccsccccsccccscccccccscc
36. If a parameter includes spaces or tabulations it must be transformed in a quoted string 8 40 Appendix 8 13 2 CreateAlarm Object Creation of an entry in the event list Parameters 1st parameter alarm identifier 2nd parameter attached on call group 3rd parameter associated alphanumeric alarm message 4th parameter associated numerical alarm message optional 5th parameter name of audio file containing the associated vocal message optional Example DDE command CreateAlarm lt Tab gt Pressure lt Tab gt Technical lt Tab gt Boiler overpressure lt Tab gt 00835 lt Tab gt C Message Pressure wav Command line ALERT CreateAlarm Pressure Technical Boiler overpressure 00835 C Message Pressure wav 8 13 3 Setinstructions Object Attach an instruction file to an alarm Parameters 1st parameter alarm identifier 2nd parameter Nom of text file containing the instructions 3rd parameter 1 demand to delete the file upon deletion of alarm by default 0 file never deleted Example DDE command SetInstructions lt Tab gt Pressure lt Tab gt c inst pressure txt Command line ALERT SetInstructions Pressure c inst pressure txt Attach the file c inst pressure txt to the alarm Pressure ALERT User Guide 8 41 Appendix 8 13 4 SetPriority Object Modify the priority of an alarm Parameters 1st parameter alarm identifier 2nd parameter Priority level 0 to 99 Example D
37. L for left alignment R for right alignment centered by default File Test BMP in Alert directory centered on the line with originated size File Test BMP in Alert directory right aligned and resized for height of 20 mm File C Test2 BMP left aligned with originated size This bitmap file can be dynamically created by the curve mediator M_CURVE DLL to draw a curve from a set of values contained in a text file of same name and located in the same directory but with an extension txt The text file contains a line by point of the curve with the format with lt TIME gt lt SEP gt lt VALUE gt Example lt TIME gt lt SEP gt lt VALUE gt recording time of the value format HH MM separator tabulation point value 00 19 56 5 The curve format is configurable in the curve mediator 5 52 Configuration 5 12 Station properties This dialog box defines the properties of a station It is called from the tree of the main screen see 4 6 1 2 Station Station Central Station Humenc identifier Call disabled if Main station Display i Display supervision i Display on call Name Name of the station This name is limited to 40 characters and must be unique in the list of Stations Numeric identifier The numeric identifier is the code to enter at the beginning of a telephonic communication just before the ID code of the operator to identify the station to which t
38. OPC parameters colors toolbar Options to parameter the treatment of alarms and call cycles Possibility to define a specific work environment by user s category menu and toolbar displayed accessible screens authorized commands The configuration can be saved under a name for a later restoration environment parameters list of supervised variables with all their parameters organization of team and groups with the associated schedule programmed calls and synchronizations All the files are saved in a subdirectory labeled with the name of the configuration The base directory can be selected on a network station Option for the periodic saving of the configuration history files and log file Management of an interfacing module with the supervised application Mediator module allowing to optimally integrate the alert management in the application import of alarm defined in the application with all their attributes reference messages priority group etc alarm detection reciprocal acknowledgment management specific treatments etc A specific mediator message processor allows the treatment of messages that can be issued from a serial communication line or TCP IP connection from a database or a file or from an email or a GSM transmitter SMS to retrieve event information and trig alarms Management of redundant DDE and OPC servers When a data server is out the software is automatically connected on the following server
39. On Group Alarm When this option is checked the concerned tag will make the object of DDE requests every time an alarm of the same functional group will change of state activation or deactivation of alarm This option reduces the number of DDE transactions economy of resources system by regrouping alarms of the same group on one alarm OR alarms set in DDE advise The real source of the alarm is provided by reading at this moment all tags of the group having option On group alarm Event e The event condition defines the state in which the tag must be considered as an event This condition can be logical logical state represented by a name mask of a logical State of the tag or analogical Comparison with a value in equality or going beyond of high or low threshold To define an event condition in reference to a value X of reference the following operators are proposed 5 36 Configuration No event condition event will be trigged from an external application EQUAL LOWER LOWER SAME Event if value is lower than or equal to X AND Event if a bit defined as 1 3 into X is 1 into the value NOT AND Event if a bit defined as 1 into X is 0 into the value SUPVAR Event if the variable variation during a time of T seconds is higher than the value V V and T are defined by the value X V T INFVAR Event if the variable variation during a time of T seconds is lower than the value V V and T are defined by the value X
40. ProfileLevel UserType Driverld Address Crrrerid DriserMame Driver Type CountryCode Relational schema of the confiquration database Appendix AlarmLogid Tagld AlarmTime Message ResetTime ova ReportLogid Userld Topic Text ReportDate Ack Tire Userld Alarm alue Topicld Comment Text ReportText AudioFile AttachedPile AlarmReport LUserld Driverld Callumber CalicrounLogid Callaroupld BeginTime EndTime Status Relational schema of the history database ALERT User Guide Appendix 8 4 Multi language management The visual user interface of the software can be dynamically switched between 5 languages see 7 3 Display options English French German Italian and Dutch Its vocal interface can also be dynamically switched by selecting the voice of the vocal server see 8 1 Vocal server Since the version 3 4 of the software the messages and labels names of groups teams operators formats can be defined in different languages To be operational the multi language management must be validated see 7 3 Display options The messages transmitted to an operator are automatically selected in his usual language If the message does not exist in the language of the operator it is selected in an available language in the following priority order gt Inthe language of the user interface gt In US English gt Inthe first available language of t
41. The possibility of selecting a Mediator module to interface the client application and Alert increases ergonomics and possibilities of the software maximal integration to the supervised application simplified configuration of the data to supervise possibility of interfacing with any non Windows application UNIX etc A specific mediator the Message Processor allows Alert to be interfaced with any application that is capable of producing information on a serial or TCP IP link in a file or a database or by sending short messages GSM This information is processed by the message processor to extract alarms and trig consequent actions 1 DDE Dynamic Data Exchange Windows protocol of communication and data exchange between applications An application server proposes services to all client applications interested by these services 2 OPC OLE for Process Control Universal communication protocol that manages Client Server communications with industrial devices and that tends to become a standard in Industry 3 Mediator A module mediator is a DLL module that assumes information exchange between ALERT and the supervised application Its interface with ALERT being normalized it is developed specially for a type of application and is therefore in measure to process all features of this application It notably allows the importation of the variables defined in the supervised application with all their parameters alarm message pr
42. This initialization can be automatically performed by calling the function RESOLVEALERTPARAM which will update the parameters of the Alert interface following the type of translation defined for each parameter and the content of the associated variables e translation by value the parameter is the value of a variable e translation by expression a text including the value of one or several variables is recopied in the parameter e translation by function the parameter is a function of a set of 1 to 3 primary parameters The translations by function are defined in the page Translations of the configuration dialog box of the message processor Message Processor Setup Interface Lists Translations Prototype Vesta FOOD Version 3 6 0 0 ALERT parameter On call group 6 gt Fire UTL 1 Remove Bloc E Bit j On call group Maintenance Apply coed Heo ALERT User Guide 8 51
43. This number has to be modified only when the default proposed port 2495 is already used by another application on one of the redundant stations The selected TCP IP port is this that will be used for the exchanges with the client Stations Remote station supervision This group defines the parameters of the polling cycle of the remote station The network polling cycle defines the polling period of the remote station If the NetDDE interface is selected a request is performed by NetDDE for the AlertLock item of the remote station at each period expiry If the TCP IP interface is selected a TCP IP link control is performed at each period expiry If the NetDDE interface is selected the timeout on response defines maximum delay for waiting for a response to the periodic request for the AlertLock item If no answer is received to the expiry of this timeout the remote station is declared in failure If the TCP IP interface is selected this value defines the general timeout for waiting answer to each protocol request Automatic synchronization This group defines the synchronization options of redundant stations and enables or not the synchronization of alarms acknowledgments and configuration between the 2 stations Synchronization at launching when this option is checked the configuration of the remote station declared in redundancy is automatically retrieved when the application is launched Synchronization on t
44. When this option is checked it is impossible to connect from a remote terminal or to acknowledge alarms by telephone during an incoming call It is obligatorily necessary to be called following an alarm or a callback request by key 6 to be able to use the terminal server or the acknowledgment command by telephone e Acknowledgment of alarms by telephone When this option is checked the operator can listen to alarms one by one key 7 and acknowledge the last listened alarm by pressing the key 8 e Answering machine management key This option validates the automatic recording of messages on a vocal answering machine answering machine or GSM mail service When this option is checked the software will interpret the receipt of the DTMF code of the key before all other code like a request to abort the identification procedure In this case alarm messages are transmitted at the end of the defined timeout then the line is disconnected The following call number is then directly called If the timeout value is null messages are not transmitted and the following number is called immediately This function can be used to automatically detect that the call reached an answering machine To do that one only has to insert the DTMF code of the key at the end of the announcement message of the answering machine by pressing the key e Maximum communication time without action This value defines the maximum duration of a te
45. and only the data of this station will be accessible configuration data for on call management and supervision on call schedule alarm table alarm history and event log ALERT User Guide 7 13 Options 7 4 Alarm options To configure the alarm management options select the Options command of the Configuration menu then on the displayed dialog box select the Alarms tab Options General Supervision Display Redundancy Acknowledgment Automatic alarm acknowledgment on alarm reset Automatic alarm acknowledgment on group warmed Anonymous acknowledgments dedicated to local user Timeout before restarting the call cycle when an alarm is not acknowledged 0 999 minutes i eu Priority Reverse priority order 0 higher priority Alarm Table W Automatic deletion of inactive and acknowledged alarms Local Alarm Play group tone Play vocal message Default format of alarm messages Alarm Reset Ack Format aM Possible values amp M ER LES bP AG BS amp ALAU ab Default Ack and Reset call Call on alarm reset Call on alarm acknoledgement ced in we Acknowledgment This group defines the options associated with alarm acknowledgment e Automatic alarm acknowledgment an alarm reset This option enables the automatic acknowledgment of an alarm by solving the problem which produced the alarm This option can be redefined at the level of each alarm e Automatic alarm acknowledgment on gr
46. at ALERT closure Option Reactivate on closure This option provokes the automatic reactivation of the associated application when this last is stopped with reinitialization of the connections with this application at the end of the initial timeout defined in the supervision options Option Maximize window This option indicates that the selected application must be launched in full screen Option Minimize window icon This option indicates that the selected application must be launched as icon Option A ways visible This option indicates that the selected application must be placed above all non topmost windows application stays always visible This option is validated or invalidated for the application in question as soon as the Activate button is clicked whether this application is already active or not Button Activate Click on this button to activate the application selected in the list with the configured options If the application in question was already active its window is set to foreground If the application window was minimized it is restored to its original size and position 5 21 Printing configuration The Print command of the File allows printing of the configuration tables A dialog box is displayed to select the tables to print Printer NAG C7010 PCL Se actif IP_192 168 0 13 S lection OF f All User file ance Groups and teams List of tags to supervise Clic
47. authorized command 5 10 Configuration e Button Default Click on this button to reinitialize the selected profile with the default configuration associated with its access level e Modification of the profile name To modify the name of the selected profile directly type its new name in the Class Name field then validate by clicking on the OK button e Creation of a new profile To create a new profile select the profile to be derived enter a new name then click on the Add button e Deletion of a profile To delete a profile select the profile in question then click on the Delete button ALERT User Guide 5 11 Configuration 5 3 On call groups To define and configure the on call groups and teams select the On call management command in the Configuration menu or click on the button EF This dialog box also can be called from the contextual menu associated with the On call Management in branch the tree of the main screen see 4 6 1 9 On call groups On the displayed dialog box select the Groups tab On Call Management Frogrammed Calls Programmed Transfers Lleers User List ABIDJAN STATION ALERT ALTMAN Peter BOURGEOIS Willams DJIBOUTI STATION GONTRAN Klaus HENRY Peter GUARD ROOM LAG4RDE Hans HAUPTMANN Albert HENFAY Peter LAGARDE Hans MARTIN Roger MEYER Jean PAYOT Guy ALUPPER Bernard LE ne Eemere Ines Team changeover management default Ap
48. be called to modify an external reference by selecting the command Definition in the contextual menu attached to the tag views Type Type of the server containing the tag to supervise e DDE tag issued from a DDE server application External Tag Type C External Other Computer Server Topic Test xls 4larrns ltem LIC1 Cancel Help e OPC s tag issued from an OPC server application External Tag Type C DDE OPC External Other Computer El C emer N etSentinel OPCS erver 1 El Topic tem SERVER OnLine UF Cancel Help e External tag issued from a communication driver logical or analogical I O e Other other tag updated by an external application or by a specific mediator 5 32 Configuration Computer Name of the computer where is located the server which contains the tag If the server is located on the local station this field must be empty Enter the name of the computer or its IP address or click on the button E on the right of the field to select a computer of the network This field is only displayed when the type of the server is DDE or OPC It is not modifiable if the dialog box is called from a lt data server name gt view of the main screen Driver Selection of the acquisition driver Only the installed communication drivers which have capabilities of input acquisition Advantech are proposed in the list This field is only displ
49. be interpreted as the beginning first field or the end second field of the on call period of the operator who has transmitted the short message Message processor Select here the treatment to perform on the messages received by the GSM modem The treatments that can be selected in the list are those that have been defined in the message processor with the type Short Messages SMS This selection is only enabled when the option reception of SMS messages has been validated at the software installation Operator When the GSM modem is properly initialized this field indicates the name of the operator which is selected by the device Signal Indicator of the level of the signal received from the selected GSM operator This level can vary between 0 and 31 Min value Minimum threshold of the signal reception level When the reception level is lower or same than this threshold the modem is declared in line failure idem no dial tone on a telephone line Init string Initialization string sent to the GSM modem at initialization time ALERT User Guide 5 79 Configuration 5 17 4 Configuration of ISDN controller CAPI This dialog box defines the working parameters of the selected ISDN controller ISDN link properties f x ISOM controllern 1 ox Max communication time Cancel 0 sec ch E ea Prefix to dial Relief Outgoing call Calling number Advanced MW Vocal Modern Data
50. button on the destination Button New team Click on this button to create a new team A dialog box is displayed to define the properties of the new team see 5 4 1 Team properties Button Modify Click on this button to edit the parameters of the team A dialog box is displayed to edit and modify the properties of the team see 5 4 1 Team properties Button Delete team Click on this button to delete the current team A message asking for confirmation is displayed before deleting the team 5 4 1 Team properties This dialog box defines the properties of an on call team It can be called by clicking on the New Team button or on the Modify button of the configuration dialog box of the on call teams see above It also can be called from the main screen by selecting the Properties or Add a team entry of the contextual menu associated with the displayed list list of teams of a group or with the branch selected in the tree branch lt group name gt or lt team name gt See 4 6 1 10 Teams One also can have access to this dialog box from the schedule screen by double clicking on the desired team in the team list Team parameters Team Mame First operator name NIGHT Cancel Colo P Choose Help Call cycle Default C Call one user for each alarm with turnover Call all active users of the team with f Call relief if not one of users is advised C Call relief for eac
51. calls that has been addressed to him The vocal messages alarms welcome can be recorded in local if the P C is provided with a sound card and a microphone or by telephone The language and voice used by the vocal server can be selected Automatic detection of an answering machine with possibility to record a message and to switch automatically to the following number Capability of call forwarding automatic call of an operator followed by the call forwarding to a telephone station in order to establish a direct voice communication e Voice synthesis option Text To Speech This option avoids recording of alarm messages automatic synthesis from the formatted alphanumeric alarm messages and enhances the capabilities of the vocal server configurable welcome message customized welcome of operators announcement of the alarm number timestamp of alarms integration of dynamic and contextual information in the vocal alarm messages An option allows presynthesis of messages to optimize the response time when a lot of alarms are triggered The synthesized messages are saved and restored between each launching e Management of client stations with the server option to operate from any network Station schedule consultation configuration derogation alarms consultation acknowledgment masking history consultation statistics journal consultation logbook consultation report edition users and groups creation and modification
52. can be done through a declared team changeover When a team executes a team changeover it immediately starts its on call period On option the team changeover can be mandatory In this mode each change of on call team must be explicitly declared In case of no changeover in a given time from the scheduled hour an alarm can be trigged For a given group it is possible to designate a relief group This last will be called on alarm only if there is no active team in the schedule for the corresponding period or in case of failure of the call cycle of the main group This possibility allows the definition of a secondary on call process for the group independent of the main on call process of the group It is possible to cross the relief groups a group can be designated as relief group of its own relief group When calling a group it is possible to transmit commands to supervised application or any other external application to signal the starting the success the failure or the acknowledgment of the group call ALERT User Guide 2 7 Functionning 2 4 Call management When a call is triggered to a group following an alarm a call request is registered in the list of groups to call with the cause of call If the group was already under call following a previous alarm the new cause of call is added For each group added to the list of groups to call the on duty team is searched If for a group no team is on duty the search is resu
53. close all current connections stop all polling 6 17 Line printer The event log can be sent in real time onto a printer To select and configure this printer click on the Line printer command from the File menu Line printer event log Printer OK C Default printer actuellement RICOH Aficio 270 PCL 6 Cancel C Specific printer RICOH Aficio 270 PCL 6 Options R seau Orientation Paper 7 Ce Portrait Size Ad 210 x 297 mm C Landscape AOUTCE Choix automatique Select the desired printer from this dialog box or choose the Not used option if no line printer is being used The line printer can be connected to a local port or the port of another PC connected ona network This must be a line type printer dot matrix and not a page type printer laser Click on the Options button to configure the printer 6 38 Options 7 OPTIONS 7 1 General options To access the configuration of the general options select the Options command of the Configuration menu This dialog box also can be called from the contextual menu associated with the root of the tree in the main screen Options Alarm Calls Redundancy Supervision Display Starting Tithe Bar __ Stating General Supervision Stations f Alert stations f Virtual stations Database esport i Database export activation Data links Remote control Used Fort l Waiting cal 1240 sec MW Priority to ala
54. commands by clicking on the arrow of the dropdown list This action can be use for example to abort on event reset or alarm acknowledgment a temporized command that was activated on alarm detection 5 60 Configuration 5 15 6 Execute application Action definition Acton Execute Application Cancel Help Open application or document Notepad CMM Alert nstract tat Browse The Execute application action launches the application designated in the Open application or document dropdown list Open application or document This dropdown list designates the application to execute or the document to open Type in this field a command line which designates an application with its possible parameters or a document The application or document must be typed with their full path The command lines that have been already defined are registered and can be directly selected by clicking on the arrow of the dropdown list Button browse The application or the document can be searched and selected by clicking on this button Button Jest The defined command line can be executed for test by clicking on this button 5 15 7 Play Tone Action definition Action Play Tone Cancel Help Sound file CMM alert alarm way Browse The Play Tone action plays the sound file attached to the called group or designated in the Sound file dropdown list ALERT User Guide 5 61 Configuration Note The option Play group tone de
55. defined in the general call options see 7 5 Call options For the vocal calls this option is always validated and is not modifiable grayed option e Timeout for call acknowledgment Time delay waited for call acknowledgment when the called operator has been reached but without certainty SMS beeper pager This delay can be between 0 and 99 minutes the value 0 canceling any delay the call then always is considered as acknowledged If the Default option is checked the value selected indicated in grayed in the field is that which was defined in the general call options see 7 5 Call options This parameter is not significant if the automatic call acknowledgment option is selected grayed fields 5 1 3 Dial number schedule On the user dialog box click on the Schedule button to display the defined schedule of call numbers po Sa es Dial numbers Type Nurmber4ddress Calls Ack 0756342595 3 ED a Orange 0756342595 JEEN 3 60 3 Auto Add E dit Delete Schedule 2 Dial number schedule use the right button of the mouse to erase an areal MW Activation Resolution 60 Max numbers 3 ange PTE imple are PS 23 Monday TT TTT TT TT LT Peepepepensneneneeete ITIL SET Wednesday TT TT ss toe ST TTC Saturday TTT TTT C sunds OT Holiday cree EER eee iL eee NANN eee LT LT CETTE TETE TEE ETT ALERT User Guide 5 7 Configuration
56. defined vocal message neither alarm message nor group message Click on the Listen button to listen to the selected default alarm message Click on the Browse button to browse files for a sound file containing a prerecorded default alarm message When a sound file is selected its content is copied in the place of the current message Click on the Record button to record a new default alarm message or edit the current message Other Messages All the messages used by the vocal server can be defined First select the message in the dropdown list to define the corresponding vocal message Click on the Listen button to listen to the selected message Click on the Browse button to browse files for a sound file containing a prerecorded message When a sound file is selected its content is copied in the place of the current selected message Click on the Record button to record a new message or edit the current selected message Alarm Group Messages The vocal message associated with a tag group is used to designate the group in the vocal alarm messages This message is played before the vocal message associated with the tag in alarm If there is not vocal message associated with the tag only the group message is played First select a group in the dropdown list to define the vocal message which will be associated with Click on the Delete button to delete the vocal message associated with the group selected in the list C
57. e Class Class assigned to the operator A class defines operator s profile by assigning to all operators of the same class a specific work space customized menu and toolbar displayable screens authorized commands see 5 2 User profiles The class of the first defined operator ALERT by default cannot be modified This operator must always belong to the basic system class e Virtual user A virtual operator represents a communication media that can be affected to different operators pager or cellular telephone used by several operators fax etc When a virtual operator is called in vocal mode any real operator belonging to one of the on call groups of the called virtual operator can identify himself in place of the virtual operator In the same way when the virtual operator is a message receiver SMS the real operator having received the message can call back by telephone to acknowledge the call This functionality allows the identification of the real operator that acknowledged the call sent to an anonymous pager or telephone e D User ID code 1 to 4 digits used to identify the correspondent during a voice communication This code is automatically assigned at the time of the user creation It can be changed later by the user himself or another having the required rights under condition to be unique in the user database if the new code already exists it is denied e Code Secret access code password of the
58. ended The duty is ended before the programmed time except in mandatory team changeover mode 6 1 3 Definition of holiday days The left column of the table allows the public holidays of the current year to be defined 6 2 Operation To define a day of the displayed schedule table like holiday click once in the first column of the wanted day The day is refreshed with a beige ground color This day is defined like holiday for the current year It will be automatically redefined like normal day for the following year A second click in this column on the same line displays a cross X It means that the day is defined like holiday independent of the year December 25 for example This day will remain registered like holiday for the following years A new click in this column suppresses the definition of holiday for the day in question white or yellow ground color Note the public holidays defined in the schedule table of a group apply to all groups 6 1 4 Copy of the on call program To reinitialize the schedule table from the weekly on call program which is defined for the selected group click on the Copy Program button The copy is performed from the current day and hour for the next eleven months The Copy Program button is validated only when a program is defined for the selected group 6 1 5 Modification of the schedule To position an on call team on the timetable a Select a team in the list of teams of the group
59. for each main operator not reached in order to guarantee the intervention of a constant number of operators A schedule is defined for each group This one is defined over a year from the previous month of the current month A team can be programmed by time sections of 15 minutes minimum A time period can be qualified as a period of reduced duty indicating that during this time only the important alarms will be immediately treated A group schedule can be configured very easily with the mouse by positioning teams on the schedule table by drag and drop operation The schedule of a group also can be automatically configured from its weekly program This program defines the assignment of the teams for each day of the week and for the public holidays by time section of 15 minutes A team can be programmed in reduce duty or not This program is applied automatically for every new month It can be manually forced from the current day and the current hour and for the eleven next months When a program has been applied in the schedule table it is still possible to modify it manually A group can be set in derogation state In this state calls concerning this group are redirected to a team of the group designated as a derogation team If there is no designated team calls are abandoned or suspended according to option The derogation of a group can be temporized until a limit time or the next change of on call team The change of the on call team
60. for the bit mask 00010000 translate in hexadecimal 10h then type the value converted in decimal 16 The reference value X can be numeric positive or negative integer or float or alphanumeric A value is defined as numeric if it begins by one of the following characters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 or If the reference value is alohanumeric only the operators NOT EQUAL and EQUAL are available the other operators being accepted but treated as EQUAL HIGHER OR SAME LOWER OR SAME or NOT EQUAL all the others The tested variable is that defined by the selection Reference of acknowledgment item This item can be different or identical to the item referenced to define the event Example of utilization of the simultaneous transmission in the same variable of an alarm condition and an acknowledgment condition Condition AND i Acknowledgment condition NOT AND 2 This example corresponds to the following table O No alarm 1 Acknowledged alarm 2 Alarm reset but not acknowledged 3 Alarm not acknowledged Send acknowledgments This option enables when checked the transmission to the supervised application of the acknowledgments performed through ALERT locally by telephone or from a remote terminal This transmission corresponds to a DDE or OPC write command of the value 14 The state of a bit is defined by the corresponding bit in the value X converted in hexadecimal Example for the bi
61. group select it in this list then using the mouse trace on the weekly schedule the rectangular area corresponding to the wished on call period over one or more days The corresponding rectangle is filled with the color of the team ALERT User Guide 5 21 Configuration Option Reduced duty When this option is checked the periods traced on schedule are qualified as on call period in reduced duty call only for priority alarms These periods are traced on the low part of the day rows Resolution Resolution of the displayed schedule in minutes minimum time slots Schedule On call program of the group This schedule defines in graphic form the weekly assignment of the teams of the selected group The teams programmed for each day of the week are represented by lines of the color of the team on the high part of the day rows for the teams in normal duty unconditional call on the low part of the day tows for the teams in reduced duty call only for priority alarms To assign a team to the on call program of the group select it in the team list then using the mouse trace on the weekly schedule the rectangular area corresponding to the wished on call period over one or more days Note the public holidays are defined in the general on call schedule by clicking in the schedule on the first column of the line corresponding to the desired day Configuration 5 6 Programmed Calls To configure the programmed calls sele
62. icons format 16x16 pixels Report view Selection of a synoptic view as an item list on several columns For tag group views mE Tags Displays the list of variables which belong to aan the selected group and to the groups of its Groups sub tree Groups Displays the list of groups contained in the Large icons selected group at the 1st level For on call group views HE Users Displays the list of users attached to the w Users group Teams Teams Displays the list of the teams of the group Large icons ALERT User Guide 4 33 User Interface 4 34 Configuration 5 CONFIGURATION 5 1 User list To define the list of operators who will be called to intervene on the Alert system locally or at a distance select the On call management command in the Configuration menu or click on the button E then on the displayed tabbed dialog box click on the Users tab The dialog box of operator configuration also can be called from the contextual menu associated with the Users branch in the tree of the main screen see 4 6 1 8 Users On Call Management Frogrammed Calls Programmed Transfers Synchro Stations Prograrn BOURGEOIS Wiliams DJIBOUTI STATION GONTAAN Klaus GUARD ROOM HA amp UPT MAN Albert HENRY Peter LAGARDE Hans MAR TIM Roger MEYER Jean PAYOT Guy ALUPPER Berard User Count ced in toe This dialog box displays the list of operators and the total
63. if the response mode is defined as Terminal server in the modem parameters It can also be activated at the time of a vocal communication on incoming or outgoing call by pressing the key of the telephonic keypad see 8 1 Vocal server Visual Access interacts with Alert to offer the following services e Call acknowledgment automatically after identification and authentication of the operator on the welcome page e Consultation of alarms and instructions associated with acknowledgment and mask unmask of alarms e Consultation of the event log e Consultation of service messages sent to the operator e Consultation of the file of the calling operator with possible modification of call numbers and selection of the active and relief numbers e Consultation of the operator s schedule from the current week until the last week of the 11th month e Recording of a write report to the logbook e Edition of the on call schedule only by an operator belonging to a class of level 2 Visual Access also allows a direct interaction with the supervised application through a configurable tree of screens e Menu screens to browse through the tree e Synoptic screens to visualize and control some variables of the application 8 4 Appendix e Screens to display text files Visual Access offers at last the possibility of downloading files to collect history for example and uploading files updating of software modu
64. in the list of the redundant servers of the failed server Management of a redundant mode In this mode the software must be installed on 2 Stations interconnected by a network Only one station is active at one time and transmits calls The two stations mutually supervise themselves In case of failure of the active station the secondary station takes automatically the control without no loss of information alarms in progress acknowledgments The working and the configuration of the two stations can be automatically synchronized alarms acknowledgments schedules messages With the Alert driver possibility of central management of remote stations equipped with the Alert software from one or several Alert central stations transmission of alarms to the central stations including event resets and alarm acknowledgments cyclical or periodical transmission of files and synchronization of on call schedules Built in management of an external remote control application pcAnyWhere or Carbon Copy Automatic launch of the remote control application on telephonic request of an authorized operator via the Vocal Server with release of the used communication port ALERT User Guide 1 7 Introduction port sharing and automatic recovery of the port at the end of the remote control session Option for automatic and real time exportation to an external database of the alarm and call history and report log with all the associated co
65. list then click on the Remove button To modify a programmed file transfer Select it in the programmed file transfer list modify the wanted parameters then click on the Add button Remark if the call type or the period of a periodic call is changed a new programmed file transfer is created 5 26 Configuration 5 8 Programmed station synchronizations To configure the programmed station synchronizations select the On call management command from the Configuration menu or click on the button EF On the tabbed dialog box displayed select the Stations synchro tab On Call Management Ed Users Groups Frogrammed Calls Programmed Transfers CJIBOUTI 4 Day 02 00 Stations all Remove Program 3 Cyclic Call Call cycle f 4 Periodic Call E very Day at 02 00 i Date and time All data w W Send Modified data only All data Modified data only W Receive To be able to synchronize remote stations it is necessary first to define for every remote Station a virtual operator having a call number attached to a synchronization driver Alert Modem Alert Socket Alert Direct The list on the left top of the dialog box displays the programmed synchronizations for the station selected in the Stations dropdown list If the selection is all this list displays all the programmed synchronizations In this case it is not possible to create a new programmed synchronization Add butto
66. mediator and other tags New option Explicit call acknowledgment allowing a call to be explicitly accepted or refused When a call is refused it is automatically reiterated to a relief operator New Text To Speech interface allowing the new generation Text To Speech engines to be integrated SAPI5 New communication drivers to call users throw an IP network VoIP driver SIP compatible and usage of instant messaging MSN driver ALERT User Guide 1 9 Functionning 2 FUNCTIONNING 2 1 Application supervision Alert manages a list of tags to supervise each entry of this list containing all necessary information for acquisition of the current state of the associated tag and for the treatments to perform when the tag goes into a specific state Tags declared in this list can be DDE or OPC items in that case Alert takes in charge the polling of their current state Either they can be considered as simple reference in that case they should be updated by explicit commands of an external application or through the suitable mediator module A tag can be handled as A simple variable the acquisition of its current value will be the only treatment in order to supply associated alarm with contextual information An event that will be recorded in the event log when the tag goes into a state declared as an event state and will optionally trigger a message transmission to the concerned operators An alarm considered as a particu
67. nana T 6 3 6 1 6 Duplication Of schedule area nes 6 3 6 1 7 Cancellation of the performed operations 6 4 6 1 8 Painting THESCHECUIC ns nina ann a 6 4 6 1 9 Calling the On Call teams a 6 4 0 2 ALARM TABLE sesccencscccssscccscccsescccesscecauceressccstseceacceseseccsesesenes O9 6 2 1 Selection of displayed alarms nn 6 7 622 Alarm aEkNOWIeQgMENt n nid nn Ai 6 8 6 2 3 REMOVING an alarm from the table nn 6 8 6 2 4 Editing a comment about an alarm nn 6 8 6 2 5 Editing a report about an alarm nn 6 8 62O PIANO ESS nine it ie 6 9 O27 EX DONATION RS da ae nn da a de an et tee 6 9 6 3 ALARM HISTORY wasssccvecsescccscxesccvecseseccseresccencsuscscsesesenveasesss 0 LO 63 1 CHOOSING period to analy Ze esse ne nn 6 11 6 3 2 ChOOSING scope of ANALYSIS nr 6 11 6 3 3 History and statistics presentation 6 12 GOA GODA STATISTICS radeon 6 13 6 3 5 Editing a comment about an alarm nn 6 14 6 3 6 Editing a report about AN alarm nn 6 14 OSA PNN ace oaci es caceecac ce is caccscy E rash acne asec ee es 6 15 6 38 EXDOrATLIONE SR RMS A Ne in 6 15 64 EVENT LOG wscsncssivccscccececscccscncsecescevectescedscncscedsecessecsesessevses O LO oal VIS OAI AA OS en Gr ons 6 16 OAL PINUNO PR Re RL SO SE D E 6 18 O43 EXPONO n a a E A en ea eae 6 18 6 5 LOGBOOK seiscsecicivecstssceccerccsecesscecccsesesiecestesenssevesaeeeseessscine 0O 6 6 EDITING A REPORT sccccccsssscccccssccccccsscccsccsccccscsscccsssssccesesss 6 20 6 7 CONSULTATI
68. of users groups and teams supervision edition and modification of the supervised tag list etc e Terminal server associated usable for the incoming calls and via the vocal server for the outgoing calls from a PC with a terminal emulation Utilization of separated ports incoming call only or common to the terminal server and Alert Acknowledgment of received calls consultation of the alarm table with all associated information instructions or contextual information with possibility of acknowledgment mask unmask of alarms event log consultation consultation of the operator schedule and possibility for a sufficient level operator to modify the schedule of every group consultation and modification of operator call numbers consultation of service 1 6 Introduction messages sent to the operator registration of a written report file reading with possibility of transmission download or upload of files remote supervision of the supervised application through synoptic screens and menus Integrated management of external applications manual launching from the menu automatic launching at the initialization automatic closure automatic restart on closure Management of an external watch dog variable allowing the automatic detection of an abnormal functioning of the Alert software Options to preset the application behavior and customize it title bar type of window locking of Windows tasks archive duration DDE and
69. of acknowledging operator if not acknowledged alarm Field 7 Alarm priority Field 8 Value of the variable associated with the alarm Field 9 Name of file containing the instructions Empty field if no instructions Field 10 Name of functional group of the alarm In writing this item allows the acknowledgment of an alarm by specifying in the data field the name of the operator who acknowledges the alarm 8 38 Appendix 8 13 Command interface DDE or Command line 8 13 1 Presentation Some functions can be commanded by writing a command string in the COMMAND item of the SYSTEM topic or transmitting the same string through an EXECUTE transaction or through the ALERT command line The DDE commands can be sent from a remote station connected by network NETDDE The available commands are ALERT SZCREATEALARM CreateAlarm Creation of an alarm Attach an instruction file ALERT_SZSETINSTRUCTIONS Setinstructions ALERT_SZSETPRIORITY ALERT_SZSETALARM SetPriority SetAlarm ALERT_SZMASKALARM ALERT_SZACKCALL AckAlarm MaskAlarm AckCall ALERT_SZCALLGROUP CallGroup Group call ALERT_SZCALLUSER CallUser Call for service message ALERT_SZVALIDUSER ValidUser Validate invalidate an operator __ ALERT_SZSENDCONSOLE SendConsole send a message to the remote ALERT_SZACKCONSOLE ALERT_SZRESTORELINKS ALERT_SHOWWINDOW ALERT_PLAYTEXT ALERT AckCons
70. of the browsing bar To assign users to a group various methods can be used e Directly create a new operator in the group by selection of the Add a user command in the contextual menu associated with the Users view A dialog box allows the parameters of the user to be configured see 5 1 1 User properties e Use the Paste command of the contextual menu to insert in the group a list of operators who were prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the user list another group or a team The copied operators are just assigned to the group They are not removed from the user list or from the origin group or team e Perform a drag and drop operation the operators are first selected in the view associated with the Users branch or any group or team branch then dragged with the mouse over the icon of the target group The operators dragged and dropped are just assigned to the group They are not removed from the user list If they are issued from another group or team they are automatically detached from it except if the CTRL key is keeping pressed at the dropping time cursor displayed to signal a copy operation When the option Create a team for each user added to a group is validated in the dialog box of group configuration see 5 3 On call groups a team is automatically created each time an operator is added to a group giving it the name of the added operator It is also possible to directly create a
71. of the telephonic line Validation of the treatment of the DTR signal of the V24 junction as a hang up modem command This test is periodically performed in accordance with the cycle defined in the general dialing parameters This test is performed by using the Hayes command ATD It should be noted that this command is not available with all modems Default button This button restore the initial standard parameters ALERT User Guide 5 75 Configuration 5 17 3 2 Configuration of vocal modem parameters This dialog box defines the specific properties of the voice modem used Modem parameters in vocal mode Olitec Speed lom 32 Transmission format Unsigned PLM obits 8000hz Cancel Help Silence detection voice receive Default Silence Detection Pernod 100 ms 20 D Mere din Silence Sensitivity Tuner i transmission Low f Medium High W reception W command mode Other parameters Ringback goes away timer 100 ms 50 Deadman Timer sec 30 Rmgback never appeared timer 100 ms i OU Voice Gain Transmit 0 255 i 20 Reintialization in vocal mode Baud 115200 Flow contrat of None f Hardware Begin Yorce Communication oe O on off End oce Communication ns The following parameters can be configured Modem This list selects the type of vocal modem being used The proposed modems are those that are designed in the file modem lst Transmission format Selection of the transmission forma
72. or issuing from the other station An alarm declared as no redundant triggers the call independently of the alert state active or inactive of the station Functionning The updating of the configuration of the two computers can be automatically synchronized schedule tables supervision list redundant variables messages and alarm and call parameters This synchronization can be configured To insure an optimal resumption when switching from a station the other alarms acknowledgments and call cycles can also be synchronized It is also possible to perform a reduced redundancy by installing only the Alert software on the secondary computer This last will have for function to trigger an alarm call if the main computer goes in defect The main station also can supervise the secondary station of the same way To trigger a call in case of defect of the main station station out of order or incapable to call it is enough to supervise the REDUNDANCYFAIL item of the DDE server of Alert by declaring an alarm on this item with the event condition different of 0 The redundancy can be reinforced by the declaration of redundant data servers For each data server used DDE or OPC it is possible to define one or more redundant servers In case of failure of a data server the software automatically restores the connections with the next data server in the list of redundant servers of the failed server ALERT User Guide 2 11 Functionn
73. palling i SEC Timeout to restart polling 90 ZEC Timeout on request response 15 SC Polling cycle Penodic request 1 sec Initial DOE Request on Advise 2 Request before Advise iw Server ten receiving the event log watch Dog item Cycle sec 1 T Counter modulo 1 DOD Format aC amp C counter value amp T tab Button Data Servers This button gives access to the list of the DDE and OPC servers that are referred to in the polling list It allows a list of secondary redundant servers to be defined for each referred server see 7 2 1 Secondary DDE Servers Button A ias This button gives access to the definition of alias names for the DDE server and topic names The alias names allow a same name to be used to refer to different servers or topics in redundant configurations see 7 2 1 Secondary DDE Servers Button OPC Setup This button gives access to the configuration of the Client and Server OPC interface ALERT User Guide 7 5 Options Mediator This group allows the selection of the mediator26 module which will be in charge of the interface with the supervised application Select in the drop down list the name of the Mediator module By default there is no mediator selected choice To add a mediator to the list one only have to copy the DDL file of the mediator in the directory of the Alert application the file name being required to have the format M_XXXX
74. prototype e the interface type used by the prototype serial link file data base short message It will be next possible to define variables that will be referenced by the script to parameter its working initial parameters or to store the value of the fields extracted from the received messages Some variables can be defined as list variables The list variables allow both the definition of a set of accepted value for a message field and the conversion of a value to another value for example conversion of a message id to explicit message or association of a machine id to an area number A list variable is defined in connection with an other variable Its value depends on the value of the associated variable The associations between the value of a list variable and the values of its associated variable are defined in the page Lists of the configuration dialog box of the message processor Message Processor Setup Interface Translations Prototype Vesta FOOD Version 3 6 0 0 Venable Type coed Heo 8 50 Appendix The value of a list variable is set by calling the function SETFROMLIST in the script This function will get from the list the value that corresponds with the actual value of the associated variable The creation and set reset of alarms is performed in the script by the mean of methods of the Alert object defined in the script These methods use parameters that have to be initialized by the script
75. requests These requests are transmitted to all the events to watch first at the establishment of the connection then periodically for the events defined with the periodic request option If this timeout is null requests are done in synchronous mode blockage while waiting answer The Polling cycle Periodic Request value defines the polling period to read the events set with the periodic request option At the end of this period all the events defined with this option are submitted to an explicit DDE or OPC request to control that the supervised application is still resoonding The Initial DDE Request on Advise option forces at the connection time an initial request for the DDE type tags declared in polling to recover their current value This option must be validated if the DDE server of the supervised application does not provide an initial value in return of advise command the server transmits the value only to the next change It must be invalidated if the DDE server of the supervised application returns incoherent values on an explicit request after starting ADVISE transaction while the tag value has not been acquired by the server When the option Initial DDE request is validated the Request before Advise option specifies that the DDE request must be performed before the DDE advise When the Link failure on invalid tag value option is activated a link failure is set on tags with invalid values despite a successful link
76. tag and 5 11 Tag Tf On properties l Properties 38 Configuration Import Importation of the supervision list from the OPC mediator If a mediator is selected in the supervision options see 7 2 Supervision options a submenu proposes the selection of the mediator in question M_XXXXXX or the OPC mediator OPC Paste Creation of a new tag using a DDE reference that was prior copied in the clipboard LINK format from a DDE server application see 5 11 Tag properties Properties Edition of the properties of the tag list icon change Configuration Configuration of the supervision list see 5 9 List of tags to supervise To select a set of contiguous tags keep the SHIFT key pressed during the selection To select disjoined sets of tags keep the CTRL key pressed during the selection 4 16 User Interface Associated view menu amp Tags 8 A a Comment a Report A Alarm masked b Add a tag a Copy Delete Definition Properties Copy Paste Delete Properties Acknowledgement Acknowledgment of selected alarms Comment Add acomment about the selected alarms Report Edit a report about the selected alarms Consultation of the report when a report already exists for only one of the selected alarms 2 Alarm masked Masking Unmasking of selected alarm tags see 6 15 1 Masking Unmasking alarms Add a tag Creation o
77. tag reference The tag value or its alarm status will be only affected by an explicit command from an external application a mediator or a communication driver Supervision list This list contains all the supervised tags 1st column codification of the tag type and supervision mode used see below Code column numerical code for identification of the tag in the numerical messages This code is generated automatically at creation time and can be modified later Reference column reference DDE OPC or other of the tag Station column name of the station attached to the tag Alarm Group column name of the functional group to which belongs the tag On call group column name of the on call group in charge of the tag 2 A DDE share name allows to designate with a same name the server application and a rubric of this application It is used by NETDDE to establish DDE links on the network It can be used also to automatically launch the server application if it is not active This share name can be defined by the server application automatically or by configuration In this case consult the documentation of the server application If the server application doesn t manage itself his share name the share name can be defined by using the tool DDESHARE EXE of Windows 5 30 Configuration Message column alphanumeric message attached to the tag formatted The first character of the first column specifies the definite tag type P
78. team in a group by using the Add a team command from the contextual menu associated with the group The synoptic view which presents the list of the group users displays the duty and relief status of the users in the group e The duty status of the operators is signaled by the overlapped symbol amp for the off duty operators The duty status of one or more operators can be switched by using the Off duty command of the contextual menu e The relief status of the operators in the group is signaled by the overlapped symbol 2 on the icon of the relief operators The relief status of one or more operators can be switched by using the Relief user command of the contextual menu One or more operators can be set off duty and substituted by using the Substituted by command in the contextual menu to designate a substitute in the group for the selected users The list of the numbers to call for each operator is displayed in the in the report view of the operators of the group This view can be used as starting base for the assignment of the operators to the other defined groups or teams of the group by drag and drop or copy paste operations The order of the operators in the group can be modified To move an operator click with the mouse left button on its icon or on its line in the list drag it keeping the mouse button pressed over the operator line AFTER which the dragged operator is wished to be moved then release the mouse bu
79. the column on the left are fixed holiday days independent of the year Months are separated by a red line The schedule table can be scrolled from the 1st day of the month preceding the current month to the last day of the 10th month following the current month by using the scroll bar on the right of the table day by day by clicking on the up or down arrows week by week by clicking above or below the scroll bar button or by block by dragging this button By clicking on a month button one directly reaches the schedule for the month in question from the 1st day of the selected month 6 1 2 Active team The field Active team displays the name of the team which is actually on duty team called in case of alarm concerning the group This team can be the scheduled team a forced team group in derogation or a team having processed to a team changeover in advance If this field is marked No team there is no active team for the group Following the status of the team changeover a further indication can be displayed below this field gt Changeover done The scheduled team has changed over team in advance gt Changeover waited n Waiting for team changeover the team is late or duty ended in mandatory team changeover mode The value that can be displayed in brackets n indicates the remaining time in minutes before timeout expired gt Changeover timeout The timeout for waiting the team changeover is expired gt Duty
80. the delay remaining before closure of the session If after this delay the session is not closed by the user himself Alert automatically closes the session to retrieve the port and trig the required call During a remote control session it is possible to close Alert from the remote PC then to launch it again before closing the remote control session after uploading a new version for example At the end of the session Alert automatically closes the remote control software then it retrieves its communication port as the same manner as it has not been closed 8 16 Appendix 8 6 Alert as service Alert can be run as a Windows service Although this option offers new functionalities its setup must be done carefully Service installation To activate this functionality check the box Application running as Windows service in the Alert starting parameters See 7 1 1 Starting parameters Choose the executing user As Alert can be run without Windows login you need to set the Alert executing user To do this use the Dcomcnfg tool Windows Start menu command Run enter Dcomcnfg then validate In the displayed window open the DCOM applications list Example with Windows XP Component Services SEs File Action View Window Help E Eq 2 Console Root amp Component Services C1 Computers al My Computer i Accstore Class Alert COM Applications J DCOM Config Automat
81. the drop down list by clicking on the corresponding line of the Users column This list contains the list of the operators of the corresponding group except for the users already selected to be substituted The following particular choices will be noted e The choice indicates that the status and the user substitute are not affected for this group After validation the selected users will remain in their initial status regarding this group e The choice Off duty indicates that the selected users must all be put off duty without substitute regarding this group e The choice Active indicates that the selected users must all be put on duty regarding this group ALERT User Guide 6 23 Operation 6 9 Sending a message To transmit a message to one or more operators select the command Send a message ga in the Operation menu or simply click on the button Al This dialog box also can be called from the tree of the main screen or the associated views by selecting the Call command in the contextual menus attached to the On Call Managemen tf sub tree see 4 6 1 7 In this case the operators to call or pre selected in function of the current selection in the concerned list Call sending Send a message File Transfer Stations Addressees User List Addressee s Send gt gt LITMAN Peter BOURGEOIS Willams DJIBOUTI GONTRAN Klas I Add gt gt g Message kin Tag Value El ou must contr
82. the end of this time If the alarm is reset before the end of the specified timeout then it is automatically acknowledged and no call is triggered 5 56 Configuration This option allows the filtering of events that are not important when they are temporary short power fail on an installation protected by a UPS for example A Call on event activation If the tag is defined as alarm the alarm detection triggers the call of users of the designated group for transmission of the information associated with the alarm numeric alphanumeric or vocal message text file The call will be reiterated so long that the group will not be considered as warned messages transmitted and call acknowledged If the variable is not defined as alarm simple event the detection of the event triggers the call of the main users not relief users of the active team of the designated group for transmission of the information associated with the event numeric alohanumeric or vocal message text file under the form of a service message no call of relief users if failed no call acknowledgment If the variable is defined as acknowledgment the event triggers a call of the users concerned by the acknowledgment of the associated basic alarm group with transmission of the associated formatted message independently of the designated on call group Example format message Acknowledgment of amp G alarms by amp M message Peter HENRY associated grou
83. the list 7 2 2 Definition of alias names To access to the configuration of the supervision options of the application select the Options command of the Configuration menu then on the displayed dialog box select the Supervision tab Then click on the Alias button on the top of the page DDE alias names can be used to replace the server or topic names in a DDE reference name This allows the same name to be used to reference different servers or topics in redundant configurations Alias List E11E3 Server Alias List WHA amp ESTROB S241 MIE gt SWAaLTISEBS WHA amp ES TRORGSTVIEM gt SWAe amp LTISKBS SAMAESTAROBTTAWIEW gt WWALTISRBSE Cancel SAME STROB2TAVIEW gt SSEaLTISR BALE 0 Help Topic Alas List Add Edit Delete Server Alias List This list contains the alias names defined for the DDE servers under the form lt alias name gt gt lt DDE server gt list of topics attached to the server Topic Alias List This list contains the alias names defined for the DDE topics under the form lt alias name gt gt lt DDE topic gt Button Add Click on this button to create a new server or topic alias see below Button dit Click on this button to edit the properties of the alias selected in the server alias list or the topic alias list see below Button Delete Click on this button to delete the alias selected in the server alias list or the topic alias list 7 10 Opt
84. the parameters of the selected port physical COM port ISDN port or modem See 5 17 2 Configuration of a modem TAPI 5 17 3 Configuration of a physical port COM or 5 17 4 Configuration of ISDN controller CAPI Button Remove Click on the Remove button to delete the port selected in the list Button Initialize Click on the Initialize button to reinitialize the port selected in the list The current status of the port is updated in real time in the list Button Monitor Click on the Monitor button to display the line monitor screen for controlling data exchanged on the port selected in the list See 7 9 Communication log Communication log option This option validates the recording of transmitted and received data on the communication port See 7 9 Communication log 5 17 1 Selection of a communication port The Communication ports dialog box allows the selection of a communication port to add it to the application Communication Ports Modems TAP AK Conexant D480 MOC Yo 9 Modem Motorola Phone Cancel Motorola Serial GPRS PSE 57 bk bps AMM ANIS Internet PPP via ANIS Help AMM ANIS AAS PPP via ANIS Physical Ports COM Display only available COM ports ISON Ports CAPIPORT Controller 1 2 E channels 5 68 Configuration Modems TAPI This list contains the list of modems that have been installed on the PC and that are available To add a modem to this list u
85. the representation of the displayed value depends on the defined event condition for the tag of type event or alarm If the value defined for the comparison is numerical 1st character numeric the displayed value will be numerical Particularly if the value is received as an alphanumeric string the displayed value will be the result of the numeric conversion of the received string The tags of type alarm can be directly acknowledged or masked from this view with the capability of multi selection for the acknowledgment or masking of groups of alarms Comments can be typed about the present alarms or when masking alarms These comments are displayed in the report representation of the view The Tags view can be used for the configuration of the list of tags to supervise New tags can be easily added e By selecting the Add a Tag command in the contextual menu of the branch or view A first dialog box is displayed to enter the tag reference or to browse it in an external application see 5 10 Selection of an external tag When the reference is defined a new dialog box allows the parameters of the tag to supervise to be configured see ALERT User Guide 4 15 User Interface 5 11 Tag properties The default parameters of the created tag type event condition action list are those of the tag which was selected in the view e By selecting the Paste command in the contextual menu of the branch or view to create a
86. tree according to the a Gh selection Supervision On Ca Acknowledgement Open Acknowledgment of all alarms of the Acknowledgment selected station RO Properties Edition of the properties of the supervision sub tree icon change ALERT User Guide 4 13 User Interface 4 6 1 3 Supervision The Supervision branch displays in its sub tree the whole information relative to the supervision of the parent station from 2 main branches a Tags branch which contains the whole list of the supervised tags and a Groups branch which displays a topographical functional description of the organization of the supervised tags Tree menu Acknowledgment Acknowledgement Acknowledgment of all alarms of the selected station an Polling Stop Restore the DDE OPC connections Import of the station EE Import Importation of the supervision list from Dai the OPC mediator If a mediator is selected in the supervision options see 7 2 Supervision options a submenu proposes the selection of the mediator in question M_XXXXXX or the OPC mediator OPC Properties Edition of the properties of the supervision sub tree icon change Configuration Configuration of the supervision list see 5 9 List of tags to supervise Associated view menu Supervision Open Opens the list of tags or of groups ro according to the selection in the tree Dr Acknowledgement pa Groups Acknowledgment of all alarms of the
87. with one of the mouse buttons The color of team selected for the mouse button in question appears in one of the 3 representative windows of mouse buttons located under the list of teams b If one wishes to define a reduced duty period for the selected team check the Reduced duty option During reduced duty periods the team is only called for the alarms having a priority level higher than or equal to the minimal level defined in alarm options see 7 4 Alarm options c Bring the mouse pointer on the timetable on the cell corresponding at the 1st hour of the 1st day of wanted time area then press the button corresponding to the team in question Drag the mouse pointer keeping the button pressed to the cell corresponding to the last hour of the last day of the chosen time area So release the button The defined time area becomes colored with the color of the selected team If AW the Reduced duty option was selected each hourly pavement contains an x Note 1 it is not possible to modify the schedule for a past period if the defined time area overlaps an area belonging to the past just the part corresponding to the future from the current hour will be taken into account Note 2 if the time area to define is not rectangular you should proceed in many times for each of the rectangular part of the area To erase a time area of the timetable redo the same operation but with a button having no selection select
88. y LAGARDE Hans Ar PAYOT Guy amp HENRY Peter H T Dyibout t ee FRG Schedule BO Albums fE History Et Jounal F7 ALERT Syste Fonda bly 4 A0 11 01 This screen includes e A configurable title bar allowing the alert station to be named e Amenu bar containing all the commands of the application e A tool bar offering a quick access to the commands e Analarm status bar allowing the visualization of the general working state e A general status bar at the bottom of the screen The central part of the display constitutes the main screen made up of threes parts e On the left part a topographical representation of the application under the form of a tree of the stations with sub trees for description of the supervision and on call management attached to each station e On the top right part a synoptic view of the entity selected in the tree station list of supervised tags functional group user list on call group team e On the bottom right part a tabbed application window on call schedule alarm table alarm history event log logbook ALERT User Guide 4 3 User Interface 4 3 Menus The main menu gives access to the main available function of the software Some commands of the main menu are accessible more quickly from the buttons of the toolbar see 4 4 Toolbar In addition on the tree of the main screen and its associated view contextual menus give a direct access to commands dedicated t
89. C CAGO UDa E E N 8 44 Bs TOC aS ETa na NAAT E anne 8 44 8 TFT VAUS E a A aan node Ain 8 45 81 lA SONG CONSOlE sasn a a R E A 8 45 S TITS ACK ONS OC reann PR A Ode 8 46 O1 A RESTOTELINRS aaar T 8 46 8 137 a SMOW WW INGOW a nn ns nailer pale ieee Gea eae 8 46 PUY TON oscar n esses seacecccoa saci essavaa anaes te caedesv ast nt T E 8 47 8 13 17 SendData lo SET in Ne a ro lean aie 8 47 8 14 MESSAGE PROCESSOR ccccccccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccscsscsscssceses O FO vi Summary 0141 Gene ral pr sentation semaine 8 48 O2 CONTIQUATION Es ananas 8 49 ALERTALERT User Guide User Guide vil Introduction 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Description Alert is a software package of alarm and on call management that functions under the Windows environment Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP and exploits features of the client server architecture of this environment Alert gives a way to all Windows application to trigger calls and send messages to operators using various media s telephone embedded vocal server beeps pagers fax printer email etc Alert can be used by all Windows applications that support the DDE or OPC communication protocol It can be used also through its programming interface API or Active X in order to command its main functionalities by simple call of functions and can be solicited through its command line to activate reset or acknowledge alarms or to order execution of other commands
90. CITT transfer mode 3 1 kHz audio circuit mode 64kbits s G 711 protocol Fax communications Advanced ISDN setup fax Protocal OF p m __ Cancel Help analog fax e ISDN Fax default profile CIP code 17 coding CCITT transfer mode 3 1 kHz audio circuit mode 64kbits s G 711 protocol high layer compatibility CCITT with identification of type Group 2 3 facsimile e Analog fax CIP code 4 coding CCITT transfer mode 3 1 kHz audio circuit mode 64kbits s G 711 protocol DTMF detection e Duration minimal duration of a DTMF tone default 100 ms e Gap minimal time between 2 DTMF tones default 40 ms 5 82 Configuration 5 18 Dialing parameters To configure the dialing parameters select the Communication command in the Configuration menu or click on the button E On the displayed dialog box select the Dialing tab Communication Forts Drivers Dialing Plan Max length of an internal dialnumber Character to suppress the dialing pretix Character to force the dialing prefis International prefix Automatic selection of internal external line Options Max time to walt for answer sec 120 Test cycle for port opening sec 300 Telephonic line test cycle sec 300 Failed modem test cycle sec io ced in we The configurable dialing parameters are Max length on internal dial number When a dial prefix is defined for a communication port this p
91. DDE type tag Before that operation the pasted tag has to be copied from a DDE server application LINK format A dialog box allows the parameters of the tag to supervise to be configured see 5 11 Tag properties This view also can be used as starting base for assignment of tags to the defined Supervision groups e By drag and drop operation tags to assign to a group are selected in the view then dragged with the mouse over the tree branch that corresponds to the wanted group This operation does not remove the selected tags from the tag list even if the CTRL key is pressed when releasing the mouse button cursor always displayed during the dragging operation e By copy paste operation tags to assign to a group are selected in the view then copied in the clipboard using a XML format Copy command of the contextual menu These tags can after be pasted in various groups The order of the tags in the list can be modified To move a tag click on its line with the mouse left button drag it keeping the mouse button pressed over the tag line AFTER which the dragged tag is wished to be moved then release the mouse button Tree menu fy Supervision Acknowledgement QUES Acknowledgment of all alarms of the GE SEE selected station i bras Polling Stop Restore the DDE OPC connections Add a tag of the station Import Add a tag Creation of a new tag see 5 10 Selection ofan external
92. DE command SetPriority lt Tab gt Pressure lt Tab gt 3 Command line ALERT SetPriority Pressure 3 set the priority level of alarm Pressure to 3 8 13 5 SetAlarm Object Activate deactivate an alarm Parameters 1st parameter alarm identifier 2nd parameter 1 to activate 0 to deactivate optional 1 by default 3rd parameter alarm value optional Example DDE command SetAlarm lt Tab gt Pressure lt Tab gt 1 Command line ALERT SetAlarm Pressure 1 activate Pressure alarm and start a call to the Technical group following the configuration set by CreateAlarm 8 42 Appendix 8 13 6 AckAlarm Object Acknowledgment of an alarm Suspend pending calls for this alarm Parameters 1st parameter alarm identifier 2nd parameter name of user who acknowledges the alarm optional Example DDE command AckAlarm lt Tab gt Pressure Command line ALERT AckAlarm Pressure 8 13 7 MaskAlarm Object Masks or unmasks an alarm Parameters 1st parameter alarm identifier 2nd parameter 1 to mask 0 to unmask optional 1 by default 3rd parameter name of user who masks the alarm optional Example DDE command MaskAlarm lt Tab gt Pressure Command line ALERT MaskAlarm Pressure 8 13 8 AckCall Object Acknowledgment of a call Parameters 1st parameter name of called user 2nd parameter name of user who acknowledges the call optional 3rd parameter 1 to require disconnection 0
93. Help incomming call only Setup Prefix to dial E Max communication time sec a Relief The following parameters can be configured On incoming call This drop down list selects the treatment to perform on reception of an incoming call gt Noresponse no answer to the call gt Voice response voice answer utilization of the voice driver validated only when the modem driver accepts voice commands gt Telematic server answer to a remote terminal by using the Visual Access application terminal server When the message processor is active the treatments that have been defined for a serial link can also be selected Option Incoming call only When this option is checked the modem is exclusively reserved for incoming calls and cannot be used for outgoing calls Prefix to dial Prefix to dial to have access to the public telephone network on the line connected to the controller The prefix indicates that the line is exclusively reserved for internal calls no access to the public telephone network Max communication time This time defines the maximum duration of a communication in seconds After this time the modem is automatically disconnected If this time is set to O there is no limit for the communication time Voice modem When this option is checked the modem can be used for vocal communications This option depends on the installed driver at the level of the Windows Control Pan
94. No team if necessary 6 1 6 Duplication of schedule area To duplicate groups of days of the schedule table weeks fortnight a Select first the area to copy To do that click in the day column of the table on the 1st wished day and drag the mouse cursor until the last day of the wanted selection ALERT User Guide 6 3 Operation keeping the button pressed The selection is displayed in reverse video The Copy button on bottom right of the screen is validated b Click on the Copy button The Paste button becomes valid c Select in the day column of the table the 1st day of the recipient area by clicking over The selected day is displayed in reverse video d Click on the Paste button The previously copied selection is reproduced The operations c and d can then be reproduced again the copied selection being always valid Note it is not possible to modify the schedule for a past period if the selected period overlaps an area belonging to the past just the part corresponding to the future from the current hour will be modified 6 1 7 Cancellation of the performed operations to undo the operations performed on the schedule table team assignment or deletion duplication program copy Each time this button is clicked the preceding operation is canceled It is possible to undo up to the 10 last performed operations This button is validated only if there is at least one operation to undo Click on th
95. ON OF OPERATOR S PROPERTIES ccccsccsccsceseeses 6 22 6 8 DEFINITION OF SUBSTITUTES ccccocsssscccsssscccccssscccccsssceesssss 6 23 6 9 SENDING A MESSAGE ccccccccssssccccsssscccccssccccccsscccscsscccssesces O 24 6 10 FILE TRANSFER ccassecssvesessssaccacsseecsessesezessssevesesssesasssceseacessse O 26 6 11 STATION SYNCHRONIZATION cccccocsssscccccsssccccccsscccessssccesssss 0 28 6 12 LIST OF CALLS IN PROGRESS sccccccssssccccccsscccccssscccscssccesssses 6 29 6 13 TEAM CHANGEOVER ccccssssccccsssccccccsscccccssccccscssccesssssccesssss O SO Summary 6 14 SCHEDULE DEROGATION CALL LOCKING ccccccccsccscesceceees 0 32 6 1 5 MASKED ALARM S wiccave ccc cacceececeutececeedeeceuccuceccccecceuseccesecsccess 6 34 61531 AMaSKING 7 UNMIAS KING GLANS nn nn nina 6 36 6 16 CONTROL OF DDE AND OPC LINKS cccccccccsccscccccccscesceses 0 37 6 17 LINE PRINTER scsssiccscscssccscccsssecseccescsessesesssecsedescteacssecdeseesesse 0 30 7 1 GENERAL OPTIONS 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 1 Zaur Starting parameters ER nd anse cn Da anaE aai 7 4 7 2 SUPERVISION OPTIONS cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccs D Zad Secondary DDE SEVE Saori n r EE EE T 7 9 722 Definitonofalas Name S sesaper ae nn Dingue 7 10 7 2 2 1 AlAS A IAITIONES RS A a AN nr eus 7 11 7 3 DISPLAY OPTIONS ssesccsccccsscteccccveseccssciesevecsesssecaseevescesecsscde 2 T2 7 4 ALARM OPTIONS cesses ceccsscciesc
96. On call forced derogation to the forced team see 6 14 Team changeover Delete Rename Properties End on call Delete Rename 4 28 Schedule derogation Call locking Team changeover Start of on call time clock in The name of the operator performing the team changeover is asked for confirmation see 6 13 Team changeover This command is only proposed for the teams that are scheduled on the next period End of the on call period only for active team The name of the operator declaring the end of the on call time clock out is asked for confirmation see 6 13 Team changeover Deletion of the selected teams After confirmation the selected teams are definitively deleted The operators assigned to the deleted teams are not deleted Change the name of the team User Interface Properties Edition of the properties of the team see 5 4 1 Team properties User view menu choice ele w Users Teams E Maintenance 5 Call Call of the selected operators see 6 9 Users Sending a message CONTRAN Klaus Off duty Switch the selected operators to Off Call duty On duty amp Substituted by Switch the selected operators to Off Of duty nu i i A duty with designation of a substitute for Substituted by _ a a the group see 6 8 Definition of Relief user P substitutes Add a user Relief user Switch the selected operators t
97. Options command of the Configuration menu then on the displayed dialog box select the Redundancy tab Options General Supervision Alarms Calls Actyation MW Active with the station IPC2 EI W Main Station MW Automatic Switch ia Interface NeDDE TCP IP port 2495 Trace Remote station supervision Network polling cycle 10 sec Timeout on response 5 ZEC Automatic synchronization Synchronization at launching Synchronization on most recent configuration Alarm synchronization Acknowledgment synchronization Call synchronization Schedule synchronization On call management synchronization Users Groups Teams Supervision svachronization escept no redundant alarms Programmed call synchronization Parameter synchronization 4larm Call Vocal Server Report synchronization lt lt 1 41 41 4 4 4 Manual synchronization icon synchronization cared in toe Activation This group defines the functioning of the application in redundant mode e The Active with the station option validates when checked the redundant mode with the station defined in the adjacent field name of a computer on the network functioning in redundancy with the local station This name can be directly entered in the field or selected among the active computers of the network by clicking on the adjacent button If the TCP IP interface is selected an IP address can be directly typed to designate th
98. Station OK K Cancel Hep User call Help W Call on alarm reset i Call on alarm acknoledgement Console 5 4 Configuration e Station Selection of the station to which the operator is normally attached This information is used only as discriminator to offer the possibility of the same operators name and first name on different sites By default the name of the local station is proposed e User call gt Call on alarm reset f the call on event reset is validated the user will be called for all resets of events for which the call on reset was validated gt Call on alarm acknowledgment If the call on alarm acknowledgment is validated the user will be called for all acknowledgments of alarms for which the call on acknowledgment was validated e Console This option when checked defines the operator is designated as console operator The operators designated as console receive the messages transmitted by client applications via the DDE command SendConsole or the API function AlertSendConsole 5 1 2 Dial number definition Number Address r Cancel Number Address 0756342595 Help Attennpt number if call fails W Default Timeout before new attempt seconds We Default User call validated if successful call 7 wi e Number type Selection of the media to use to call the user The list of proposed media in the dropdown list depends on the installed drivers To ad
99. TD Defaults Answer connection ATA Response Ring number to wait iz i Hang up by OTA Caller ID none Periodic line test The following parameters can be configured Init string String transmitted to the modem when the interface is initialized or reinitialized switch of vocal mode to terminal mode Dial gt Prefix sent before the call number gt Suffix sent after the call number Hang up gt Prefix attention sequence to signal a modem command during a communication gt Suffix disconnection command Originate connection Connection command sent to the modem during a manual call Answer connection Connection command sent to the modem during a manual answer Ring number to wait Number of rings waited before answering to an incoming call The type of answer depends on the selection On incoming call done in the dialog box of port configuration Caller ID This selection allows a protocol to be validated for identifying the caller dial number during incoming calls The following protocols can be selected gt Formatted ID analog voice modem with caller identification gt Unformatted ID analog voice modem with caller identification 5 74 Configuration gt Register S190 ISDN modem caller id stored in the modem register 190 Hang up by DTR Validation of the treatment of the DTR signal of the V24 junction as a hang up modem command Periodic line test Validation of the periodic test
100. The list displays the communication ports used by the application This list can reference physical COM ports COM1 COM2 ISDN ports CAPIPORT1 or modems that have been installed before through the Windows Control Panel TCP IP ports SOCKET1 also can be automatically created by the communication drivers To add a physical port an ISDN port or a modem to the list click on the Add button The status displayed for each port is updated in real time It can be gt Not used The port is not used by application gt Out of order The port is used but doesn t function correctly gt Initialization The modem is initializing gt Modem ready The modem is ready for incoming or outgoing calls gt Ring The modem processes an incoming call gt Callin progress The modem processes an outgoing call gt Connected The connection is established in data mode gt Disconnect The connection is breaking gt Fax transmission The modem is transmitting a fax gt Voice communication The connection is established in voice mode The possible actions on this dialog box are the following ALERT User Guide 5 67 Configuration Button Add Click on the Add button to create a new communication port and add it to the list This port can be a physical COM port an ISDN port or a TAPI modem See 5 17 1 Selection of a communication port Button Properties Click on the Properties button to configure
101. User Guide 6 31 Operation Maximum delay for next team changeover This option defines the maximum authorized time to perform the next team changeover The default option selects the default value of the group see 5 3 1 On call group properties At the end of the on call period of every selected group if no team changeover has been performed this time is counted When the defined time is expired without team changeover the ChangeoverStatus variable of the concerned group changes to the state 3 Timeout for team changeover expired This variable which can be consulted by DDE or API can be used to trig an alarm 6 14 Schedule derogation Call locking If necessary during an intervention on site for example it is possible to temporarily depart from the on call schedule of a group by forcing this group in derogation state When a group is in derogation state its on call schedule is ignored and all the alarm calls for the group either are redirected to a team which was predefined at the derogation time or they are discarded or suspended 3 calls locked if no team has been designated for the call redirection To lock the calls for a given group select the Calls locked command in the contextual menu displayed when clicking with the mouse right button on the icon of the group in the on call management tree see 4 6 1 9 On call groups The icon of the locked group signals that the group cannot be called E T
102. When the Priority to alarms option is checked all call requested during a remote control session and that will need the port used by the remote control software will cause a warning message to be displayed to inform the operator that the remote control session will be aborted in the delay that has been defined in the adjacent field 7 2 Options e The Time before hang up edit field defines the time waited before aborting the remote control session when Alert needs the port used by the remote control application to make a call This delay is taken in account only when the option priority to alarms is checked Archive duration This group defines the duration of storage of recorded data Any data recorded before the specified archival duration for the concerned data category is automatically destroyed at the start up of the Alert application and at every change of day The archived data are e Alarm History daily files of type HYYMMDD LOG located in the HISTO subdirectory 100 days by default e Event Log daily files of type TYYMMDD LOG located in the TRACE subdirectory 100 days by default e Logbook daily files of type RYYMMDD LOG located in the REPORT subdirectory as well as the associated audio files of the MYYXXXXX WAV type 100 days by default e Transmitted vocal messages audio files of type MCXXXX WAV in the MESSAGE subdirectory 7 days by default Automatic configuration backup This group d
103. XX DLL with XXXXXX a string identifying the mediator The Setup button gives access to a dialog box to configure the selected mediator It is grayed if there is no mediator selected or if the selected mediator does not propose a setup service The Initialize button commands the reinitialization of the mediator module It is grayed if there is no mediator selected The Message processor activation option activates when checked a mediator for message processing message processor If the message processor is not installed this option is grayed When the message processor is active it can be configured by the command Message processor in the Configuration menu Polling parameters The Timeout before start polling value defines the timeout between start up of the application with launching of external applications and the establishment of the connections with the supervised applications This timeout allows the completed initialization of external applications to be awaited before soliciting them The Timeout to restart polling value defines the timeout initialized when the connection with an external application is broken before trying to automatically restore it This timeout will be retriggered until the reestablishment of the connections If this value is null there is no automatic reestablishment of the connections The Timeout on request response value defines the maximum delay for waiting for a response to explicit DDE or OPC
104. a to be used beep telephone pager fax email and by the operator s address in reference to the selected media dial number user identifier in paging system email address A call number belonging to the call number list can be designated as an active number It is the first number that will be used A second number can be designated as relief number This second number will only be used if the call to the active number did not succeed after a configurable number of attempts ALERT User Guide 2 5 Functionning The numbers are called sequentially in the order of the list the call cycle being ended with the first successful call of a final number A final number is a number which requires a call acknowledgment automatic or not In case a call failure the call is reiterated a number of times configurable globally or at the level of a specific number after a time also configurable After the configured number of unsuccessful attempts the call is resumed with the following number of the list A call acknowledgment can be required globally or at the level of a specific number If the call acknowledgment is not automatic a timeout for waiting the call acknowledgment can be defined with a number of reiterations of the call if no call acknowledgement is performed in the defined time The list of the numbers to call at a given time can be automatically established from a weekly program of the call numbers This program defines th
105. a type of application This mediator takes in charge all the problems concerning the interface between Alert and the supervised application import of variables defined as alarm with all their attributes messages priority group detection of the activation and the deactivation of alarms management of reciprocal acknowledgment specific treatments etc 1 2 Introduction Alert can be perfectly integrated in a network environment By using the NETDDE protocol DDE by network or OPC via DCOM interface the application can be distributed on several stations Alert can support all types of media in order to communicate numerical alphanumeric or vocal information to an operator The adaptation to an unsupported media requires only the addition of the suitable DLL module driver Alert integrates a vocal server which allows alarm transmission and acknowledgment by using a very common media the telephone The vocal alarm messages can be recorded either locally or by telephone or in option they can be automatically synthesized from the associated alphanumeric messages With its server version Alert can manage Alert Client stations These client stations provide an efficient interface to deal with the software from any network station schedules alarms histories journal etc Associated to the Visual Access software terminal and WAP server Alert proposes a remote terminal interface that offers many services to a remote operato
106. al server opened to all public 32 By default option explicit call acknowledgment not checked the call acknowledgment which indicates that the operator was properly warned is implicit automatic acknowledgment from the operator identification When the option explicit call acknowledgment is checked see 7 7 1 Vocal Server options the call has to be explicitly acknowledged either by pressing the key 3 that indicates a call acceptance or by pressing the key 9 that indicates the call is refused and a reiteration of the call to a relief operator is required If none of these actions was performed during the communication the call in not acknowledged and therefore will be reiterated to the operator ALERT User Guide 8 1 Appendix When all messages have been transmitted a vocal guide can be transmitted automatically to inform the operator on the possible actions The automatic transmission of this vocal guide is optional The operator has then access to the commands defined in the table of the following page Recording of a message or a report by telephone The built in vocal server allows vocal messages and oral reports to be recorded by telephone In normal operating phase the recording procedure produces oral reports that can be consulted from the logbook and that are automatically deleted at the end of a configurable time To record the vocal messages by telephone alarms welcome guide it is previ
107. am for the selected operators The list of the numbers to call for each operator is displayed in the in the report view of the operators of the team This view can be used as starting base for the assignment of the operators to the other teams of the group or other groups by drag and drop or copy paste operations The order of the operators in the team can be modified To move an operator click with the mouse left button on its icon or on its line in the list drag it keeping the mouse button pressed over the user line AFTER which the dragged operators is wished to be moved then release the mouse button Associated view menu Bs GOHTRAH Klaus 2 Users GONIRANKaus O a A Call Off duty Substituted by Relief user Add a user Copy Delete Properties Copy Paste ALERT Call Off duty Substituted by Relief user Add a user Call of the selected operators see 6 9 Sending a message Switch the selected operators to Off duty On duty Switch the selected operators to Off duty with designation of a substitute for the parent group of the team see 6 8 Definition of substitutes Switch the selected operators to the Relief Active status in the team Creation of a new operator assigned to the team see 5 1 1 User properties The created operator is automatically added to the parent group Copy the properties of the se
108. ame in the list then drag it to the exit icon by keeping the mouse button pressed release the button on the destination Button New Click on this button to create a new group A dialog box is displayed for the configuration of the properties of the new group see 5 3 1 On call group properties Button Modify Click on this button to open the property dialog box of the selected group see 5 3 1 On call group properties Button Delete This button allows the current group to be deleted A message asking for confirmation is displayed when this choice is performed Button Jeams This button gives access to the configuration of the teams of the group see 5 4 On call teams Team changeover management e Team changeover mandatory This option defines the default management mode of the team changeover It predefines the team changeover mode for each new created group It does not modify the team changeover mode for the existing groups except when clicking on the Apply button When this option is checked the on call users have to clock in and out see 6 13 Team changeover One of the users of the new on call team has to clock in at the scheduled changeover time within a configurable deadline If the team changeover has not been performed when the deadline is reached a team changeover fault is signaled with possibility of trigging an alarm Similarly at the end of the on call period if no
109. ame of the user who creates it This information date time and author can be modified 6 20 Operation Only the author of a report can then re edit it for modification on the condition that the right report edition modification of the logbook is validated for his user profile The buttons and are only displayed for reports attached to an alarm and when several reports are attached to the same alarm They allow the reports attached to a same alarm to be browsed One can attach the report at its creation or at a following re edition to a topic this last becoming a search criteria for consultation of the logbook The label of the topic can be selected from the list of existing topics or directly entered into the edit field the new name is automatically added to the list Report The written report is edited under the form of a note The passage to the next line is automatic It can be forced manually by pressing the Enter key A vocal message can be associated with a report By clicking on the Browse button one can browse files for a sound file containing a pre recorded audio message By clicking on the Record button one directly records the audio message The file name is automatically created under the form Myymmxxx WAV yy representing the year mm the number of the month and xxx being a numerical code from 000 to 999 Click on the Listen button to listen to the audio message Attached file
110. arm or service message The One call by message option proposes choice between triggering a beep call for each message to transmit option checked or triggering only a beep call for all the messages to transmit the transmitted code being the code of the alarm which have the higher priority option not checked The temporizing before sending address parameter allows waiting the called service being ready to receive the recipient s address end of transmission of the welcome message for example 8 20 Appendix The end address DTMF code is to configure only for servers that ask for a delimiter code at the end of address sequence The temporizing before sending message parameter allows waiting after the transmission of the address the called service being ready to receive the message to transmit The message header field allows the transmission of a constant string at the head of all messages identification of the station for example This string must only contain characters 0 to 9 A to D or The end message DTMF code is to configure only for servers that ask for a delimiter code at the end of message sequence The temporizing for validation parameter allows waiting after the transmission of the message the called service being ready to receive the validation code for message acceptance if necessary The validation DTMF code is to configure only for servers that ask for confirmation to send the message Using the Bee
111. arm parameters by using the following syntax amp M This field will be replaced by the alphanumeric message defined for the tag amp R This field will be replaced by the tag reference DDE reference or other amp O This field will be replaced by the tag object identifier OID amp C This field will be replaced by the numeric code defined for the tag amp S This field will be replaced by the name of the station attached to the tag amp P This field will be replaced by the value of the priority of the tag ALERT User Guide 7 15 Options amp G amp A amp V amp V amp L amp U amp D This field will be replaced by the name of the basic alarm group associated with the tag This field will be replaced by the name of the call group associated with the tag This field will be replaced by the value of the tag at the alarm time This field will be replaced by the current value of the tag This field will be replaced by the name of the station attached to the tag if the Station is not the local station This field will be replaced by the name of the user who acknowledges the alarm This field will be replaced by the date and time of the alarm with the format MM DD YY HH MM SS If no default format is defined the equivalent format will be amp M to display the alarm message if this last is defined or amp R to display the tag reference if the alarm message is not defined Default Ack and Reset call This group d
112. arms activations acknowledgments returns to normal state In that case the call options on event reset and alarm acknowledgment have to be validated for the operators in question 2 3 Group and team organization Several on call groups can be defined each one corresponding to a group of users having the same localization or competence fire security A group is characterized by e An identifier name for the group e An operator list attached to the group e A specific audio signal local alarm Operators belonging to a group must have been previously declared in the user file An operator can simultaneously belong to several groups 2 6 Functionning In a group it is possible to create teams A team is a set of operators who can be called to intervene simultaneously or by rotation following option at the group level and at the team level when an alarm concerning the group is detected By default a team is created for every operator belonging to the group A team is defined by e The name of the team by default it is the name of the first operator e Acolor allowing the team to be visually identified in schedule table e The list of operators making up the team In a team some operators can be declared as relief operators By default these operators are called only when the main operators cannot be reached The call order of relief operators is the list order On option it is possible to call one relief operator
113. arted as service its user graphic interface is not visible You can only use the AlertClient interface to connect to Alert As Alertclient does not offer a full configuration interface you can setup on call management and supervision but neither the communication ports nor the vocal server nor general options you should do your Alert configuration before starting it as a service 8 18 Appendix 8 7 Command driver This driver built in with the basic Alert software allows writing commands to an external application or outputs to be initiated during a call cycle to signal for example the call procedure failure or to request for a relief external call system The list of available commands can be configured either by accessing to the Command driver setup see 5 19 Communication drivers or directly when invoking the Command driver in a user or group property sheet by clicking on the button on the right of the corresponding Number or Command field The displayed dialog box shows the list of the defined commands see 5 16 1 Command list 8 8 Beep driver This driver is a generic driver which is used to call a beeper receiver system that is only capable of alerting an operator by emitting a beep or a vibration with optional display of a numeric message What is characteristic of this type of paging system is the possibility to use a simple telephonic keyboard to beep an operator and to transmit him a nume
114. as been acknowledged the name of the operator who has proceeded to the operation appears on the line of the alarm in question with the date and the hour of the acknowledgement When an alarm is selected in the list the descriptive alarm record is displayed in the detail window located under the list This record contains 3 parts Descriptive and current state of the alarm under the form Alarm message formatted STATION Name of the station attached to the alarm GROUP Functional group of the alarm REFERENCE Reference of the alarm variable CONDITION Event condition PRIORITY Alarm priority ON CALL Name of the on call group associated with the alarm ACTIVATION Alarm time VALUE Value of the variable at alarm time RESET Date of alarm reset ACKNOWLEDGMT Date of alarm acknowledgment BY Name of operator who has acknowledged the alarm COMMENT Comment text about the alarm INSTRUCTIONS Content of the instruction file if it is defined with the contextual information acquired at the alarm time HISTORY Time stamped list of actions performed to process the alarm warned operators call failures acknowledgment alarm reset A size bar allows the respective heights of the alarm table and detail window to be modified by clicking over with the left button of the mouse and dragging the mouse cursor in the wanted direction keeping the button pressed When the mouse button is released the bar is automatically loca
115. ase directory is the directory where is installed the Alert application It can be changed by cliquing on the Browse button in the open and save dialog boxes That directory can be choused on a network PC 5 22 2 Restoring a configuration The Open command of the File menu restores a configuration fx C Actual Configuration uk __ OK s Cancel __Hep Help f Saved Configuration Ca 7 Selection Parameters Gemenos Supervision Frogrammed calls Telematic Server Alarm history Event log Report log y y y 2 y a lone Load environment parameters coms Main path Browse CMMI Alert Configuration to restore One can restore The actual configuration to reinitialize for example the list of the supervised tags when the configuration file of the supervision taglist xml has been modified by an external application The remote configuration only in redundant mode to reinitialize the configuration from the redundant station Select the option Synchronization on the most recent configuration to only retrieve the data that are more recent on the redundant station In the opposite case the whole of the selected parameters will be copied from the redundant station A saved configuration by selecting the configuration to restore in the list below It is possible to restore a saved configuration from a directory different from the Alert directory by changing the ba
116. ask select the alarm in the list by clicking on the corresponding line then click on the Edit button see 6 15 1 Masking Unmasking alarms below This button is validated only when an alarm is selected in the list Printing To print the list of masked alarms click on the Print button The width of each column can be visually adjusted by positioning the mouse cursor on the concerned size bar of the title line then clicking and dragging the bar to get the wanted size This list can also be sorted according to the increasing or decreasing order of each of its columns To do this click on the title of the wanted column an arrow will indicate the increasing sense of the sorting Click again on the title of the column to reverse the sort order reversed arrow To perform a fast research for a value in the list select the research column by clicking on its title then scroll the list with the scroll bar a bubble displays the content of the selected column for the 1st line of the list corresponding to the scroll bar position ALERT User Guide 6 35 Operation The printer which will be used is the printer selected by the Print setup command of the File menu If no setup has been performed it is the default printer To define the printing format of the list click with the right button of the mouse in the list of alarms then select the Printing command in the displayed contextual menu Exportation The list of masked a
117. at you wish to add then click on the OK button The following options allow the list of proposed drivers to be reduced e Country When the all entry is selected all the unused installed drivers are displayed in the list When a specific country is selected only the drivers concerning that country and those that do not depend on a country are displayed e With GSM modem When this option is selected the drivers that use a GSM modem are included in the list The Command driver is a generic driver which allows commands to be transmitted to an external application during a call cycle See 8 7 Command driver Consult the corresponding rubrics for the drivers Email 8 10 Beep 8 8 Fax 8 9 and Alert 8 11 For the other drivers SMS public paging systems in site paging systems teleprinter etc consult the on line help associated with the driver for more information 5 86 Configuration 5 20 External applications The Applications command of the Configuration menu allows to define the list of external applications associated with Alert These applications can be launched directly from the Operation menu of Alert or automatically at initialization They can be applications to supervise or complementary applications Application List Delete TET Cancel Help W Menu Test NeSentnel Command Line CMM TNetS entinelnetsentinel exe Initial Directory CAMMI N tS entinel Argument
118. ata server properties This dialog box defines the properties of a data server It is called from the tree of the main screen see 4 6 1 5 Data servers Data server Link failure if tag value is not walid es C No Ce Default Cancel cor Help Link failure if tag value is not valid When the option is activated a link failure is set on tags with invalid values despite a successful link For example a bad quality in OPC If default is selected the option is set by the Alert global option Icon Representation of the data server in the supervision tree Click on the Modify button to select another representation small and large icon 5 14 Tag group properties This dialog box defines the properties of a functional group It can be called either from the Groups branch of the supervision tree of the main screen or from any other defined group branch see 4 6 1 6 Tag groups or from the property dialog box of a tag see 5 11 Tag properties Configuration Group Parameters F Eg Group Marne Building ance Station Central Station Hep Display a TA Modify Associated Vocal Message SS Group Name This name identifies the group It must be unique among the groups of same level groups having the same parent Station This field displays the name of the station to which it is attached Display Graphical representation o
119. ayed when the type of the server is External Server Designation Selection of the DDE or OPC server DDE Server Enter the name of the DDE server or select it in the dropdown list Only the active DDE servers are proposed in the list if they properly answer to the requests for DDE server enumeration or those which have been prior registered for NETDDE sharing OPC Server Enter the name of the OPC server or click on the button a on the right of the filed to select one of the OPC server registered on the computer designated in the field Computer This field is only displayed when the type of the server is DDE or OPC It is not modifiable if the dialog box is called from a lt data server name gt view of the main screen Topic Designation Selection of the DDE topic or external module DDE Server Enter the name of the DDE topic or select it in the dropdown list if the DDE server designated in the field Server proposes a list of topics Driver Select in the dropdown list one of the subsets card module proposed by the driver designated in the field Driver This field is only displayed when the type of the server is DDE or External It is not modifiable if the dialog box is called from a lt data server name gt view of the main screen Item Designation Selection of the tag DDE Server Enter the name of the DDE tag or select it in the dropdown list if the DDE server designated in the field Server proposes a list of tags for t
120. bdirectory under the form of a text file whose name is affected automatically with the INSTxxx TXT format xxxx being a numeric code between 0000 and 9999 See 5 11 6 Edition of instruction file Click on the Browse button to browse files for an existing text file on the disk Actions For each change of state of the event event activation event reset alarm acknowledgment a list of actions can be defined The possible actions are gt Call group call the group designated in the 2nd column with option of inhibition 1 or delay indicated in the 3rd column gt Call user call the user 2 designated in the 2nd column with option of forcing the called number indicated in the 3rd column gt Execute script execute the message processor script 3 designated in the 2nd column gt Execute command execute the command designated in the 2nd column with option of forcing the written value indicated in the 3rd column gt Stop command stop the execution of the command designated in the 2nd column gt Execute application launch the application designated in the 2nd column gt Play tone play the sound file attached to the called group or designated in the 2nd column gt Play vocal message play the vocal message attached to the alarm or designated in the 2nd column wave file or text to synthesize 1 The action Call group attaches the tag to the designated group and consecutively a
121. be specified in the email subject When the Command driver is selected the address field designates the command to transmit This command can be directly selected by clicking on the button on the right of the address edit field When the Alert Socket media is selected this field contains the IP address of the remote station followed by a comma and the number of the used IP port example 192 168 0 15 20 e Attempt number if call fails Maximum number of call attempts to the number when the call failed no answer busy This number can be between 1 and 9 If the Default option is checked the value selected indicated in grayed in the field is that which was defined at the level of the communication driver when this last proposes a value or at the level of the general call options see 7 5 Call options The time waited to try a new call depends on the type of failure In case of no answer or busy failure this time is that indicated by the parameter below timeout before new attempt It is reduced to 1 second if the modem does not detect the dial tone e Timeout before new attempt Time delay waited after a call failure no answer or busy to try a new attempt in seconds If the Default option is checked the value selected indicated in grayed in the field is that which was defined in the general call options see 7 5 Call options e User call validated on successful call This option
122. call not acknowledged failed gt a lt USER gt SCHEDULE N item that contains the on call schedule of the operator designated by lt USER gt for the N th week starting from the current week N 0 to 51 By default N is set to 0 schedule for the current week Appendix gt a lt USER gt MESSAGE N item that contains the N th message by default N 0 in the mailbox of operator designated by lt USER gt gt a lt USER gt REPORT item that contains the report transmitted by operator designated by lt USER gt The user record item contains a line of 17 fields separated by tabulation characters TAB and ended by a carriage return CR Field 2 User name Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Field 6 Field 7 Field 8 Field 9 Field 10 Field 11 Field 12 Field 13 Validation of 3rd call number 0 1 Field 14 Index of active number 0 none 1 2 or 3 Field 15 Index of relief number 0 none 1 2 or 3 Field 16 0 operator off duty 1 operator on duty Field 17 Name of substitute operator when field 16 0 In writing poke the whole file is transmitted but only fields 5 to 17 are taken into account The schedule item is represented for reading by a line of 7 identical fields separated by tabulations and ended by a carriage return CR Each field contains the on call schedule for one day of the week the 14t field representing the schedule for Monday Each field of the schedule has the following format DD MM XXXXXxX
123. call or Group all alarms of the table are acknowledged 6 2 3 Removing an alarm from the table Select in the list an inactive and acknowledged alarm and click on the Delete button This button is not validated grayed button when there is no selected alarm or when the selected alarm is not acknowledged 6 2 4 Editing a comment about an alarm Note this function is only available when the database export option is validated by the software license Select an alarm in the list then click on the Comment button In the displayed dialog box type the text of the wanted comment When a comment is attached to an alarm it can be read in the descriptive record of the selected alarm It can also be read and possibly modified by clicking on the Comment button The alarm comment can be read later from the alarm history even after the alarm has been removed from the alarm table When a comment exists for an alarm it is indicated by an asterisk displayed in the C column This column is not visible by default It can be added by clicking in the list with the right button of the mouse then selecting the Display command The comment can also be directly displayed in the Comment column not visible by default 6 2 5 Editing a report about an alarm Note this function is only available when the database export option is validated by the software license Select an alarm in the list or select an alarm subset by using the selecti
124. cceccsccscvccstesssscecessesesssscsccasccsses 2 14 TD CRUE OPTIONS is ssccsscisccsssssscsens ssssssseeccesessessscstsestec on T 17 7 6 REDUNDANCY OPTIONG cccccccsccscccccccsccsccsccccsccscssccscccsscess 20 7 7 VOCAL SERVER CONFIGURATION ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 7 23 Lr VOCASEIVEF ODHOMNS RER No bonne 7 23 TIED NOGA SEIVER Message antoine 7 26 Z MOUS SNS IS Rene nee needs 7 28 LILA OSag OT th VOCAl See nn NS nids 7 30 7 8 TOOLBAR CUSTOMIZATION ccccccsccccsccccscccccccsccccsccscsccsceces 7 3 1 7 9 COMMUNICATION LOG ccccsccsccccsccscccccccsccsccsccccscssccscccsecs 7 3 2 8 1 WOCAL SERVER 2 35 ancien OF 8 2 TERMINAL WAP SERVER ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscccccces D 4 8 3 EXTERNAL DATABASE EXPORTATION ccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccccs O O 8 3 1 Contiguration database nissan nabinantamiodanniniarenaaans 8 6 832 PISTON CALA DAS E 8 9 633 Database SCIGINIGS ES A 8 12 8 4 MULTI LANGUAGE MANAGEMENT cccccccccscccccccsccccsccccsccsees S 14 8 5 REMOTE CONTROL esesesccecccscococococosocesecsecseccececocosososesesesese S 16 8 0 ALERTAS SERVICE scesscsciccssccescecensssccecscdesecsccndcecsscnssedscssevess 7 17 ALERTALERT User Guide User Guide V Summary 8 7 COMMAND DRIVER cccccccccccccccccsccccccccccccccscccccccsssscccccscssses S 19 S 8 BEEP DRIVER scssciccocosssctucssssvccasdecisveswicccsencecssecdsscecvistecsscsnO 1 o 8 9 PAX DRIVER scsssccisccccccscs
125. ccsccssees D 29 5 10 SELECTION OF AN EXTERNAL TAG ccccccsccsccccsccsccsccccccsscssees D 3 2 Delt TAG PROPERTIES ccccssesscsscscsccwccssvesanenssceceastnesanswencesseseseseusse DO 4 LIL FONMATOrA IA NV AIM noi 5 42 ITZ Even s cAedule euin nd sonnette 5 43 5 11 3 Properties of alarm acknowledgment u nn 5 44 5 11 4 Properties of alarm Maski resini 5 47 5 11 5 Deminor messadge TOfMAL nn nn NS sNaNnNnn as 5 49 5 1 1 6 Edition OF Instruction fil Essien eea i a eiit 5 51 Summary 5 12 STATION PROPERTIES ssscccsscsadssccssaccsaccvndcsssssacessssenscsscsvacesss 9 92 5 13 DATA SERVER PROPERTIES ccccccccccsccsccccccccccsccsccccccsscssccscecs D 54 5 14 TAG GROUP PROPERTIES ccccccccscsccsccccsccccscccccccscccsscccssccsees D D 4 5 15 DEFINITION OF ACTIONS cccccccccsccsccscccccccsccscccccccscssccsescsses D7 DO Dele Call grOU Preire nen nant tuanu unanime 5 56 515 2 Message OS eters meres atic re ie aura naaa 5 58 5 153 EXECUTES CO nn nina ins caidas en ae 5 59 SA3 A Exe c t COMM IAN NCH nement 5 59 Die SOP COMMANO e E 5 60 56O Execute appa O Necs in E AE Ml taie 5 61 S PV TON E E R 5 61 S58 Play VOCal Message rinrin a in santa 5 62 5 16 COMMANDS esesesesecececococococococococcsesecesececesecesocococscseseseseses D O4 DLG COMMANA MISC oa A T 5 64 S162 Command definition nan a 5 65 5 17 COMMUNICATION PORTS cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces D 0 5 17 1 Selection of a communication port eesessesessessessessesee
126. ceiving the call acknowledgment in brackets in minutes or Auto if the call is automatically acknowledged or if call acknowledgment is not required no final number The numbers are called sequentially following the order defined in the list ignoring the unchecked numbers The following number will be called only in case of unsuccessful call of the current number after the defined number of tries or immediately after if the current number is not a final number stared Id in the Ack column The call sequence ends when a final number is successfully called To add a dial number to the list click on the Add button see 5 1 2 Dial number definition To modify a dial number select it in the list then click on the Edit button see 5 1 2 Dial number definition To delete a dial number select it in the list then click on the Delete button Use the buttons 4 and xl on the right of the list to modify the order of the numbers in the list Button Schedule Click on this button to display or mask the dial number schedule of the operator When the schedule is active a green led is displayed on the button Button Messages Click on this button to consult the messages destined to the user It is only validated when the list of messages is not empty Button Advanced Click on this button to have access to the advanced parameters of the user User advanced configuration f Eg
127. cessary to press the key 3 Note To erase the silence at the end of a message just assign the message to the wanted variable or to the welcome or guide message then click on the Record button of the corresponding file group In the recording dialog box click on the button J to listen to the message At the end of the message stop monitoring at the beginning of the silence time button M then click on the button Cut gt gt to cut the end of the message Listen again to the message then validate by OK if the result agrees If the operation degraded the message cancel the operation by clicking on Cancel then retry again 8 2 Appendix KEY FUNCTION Listen to the 1033 first no acknowledged or active alarms that concern the operator in the decreasing order of priorities and reverse chronological order the acknowledged active alarms at the end Record a message or a vocal report Listen to recorded message or vocal report gt When the message recording is active save the recorded message MTXXXX WAV in the MESSAGE subdirectory gt When the option explicit call acknowledgment is checked see 7 7 1 Vocal Server options the call is accepted call acknowledgment 4 Listen to the service message that concerns the operator mailbox Delete the messages in the operator s mailbox Callback request only valid for incoming call The demand is acknowledged by a message then the call is t
128. chedule Help C Alarm table e r Alarm history i Mapping display Event log Logbook Service iM Application running as Windows service Starting page The displayed page at the start time of the software can be defined by selecting one of the options of this group When the none option is selected the starting screen does not display any window Mapping display This option validates the new user interface of the version 3 5 That interface displays a mapping view of the application with Explorer looks on 3 windows The old interface can be restored by unchecking this option Service Select this option to declare the software as Windows service When this option is checked the software is automatically registered as a Windows service It will be then automatically launched as service at the next system restarts and will be operational even if there is no open session To unregister the software as Windows service you have just to uncheck this option See 8 6 Alert as service 7 4 Options 7 2 Supervision options To configure the supervision options select the Options command of the Configuration menu then on the displayed dialog box select the Supervision tab Options Alarms Calls Redundancy General Supervision Display Data Servers Alias OPC setup Mediator Mediator module used Y W Message processor activation Polling parameters Timeout before start
129. communication driver with timer capability The controlled variables and outputs are designated in the sequence The value written on each variable or output can be predefined in the sequence and can include the content of supervised tags A default value can also be redefined when referring to the command in the action list attached to an event This default value will be applied to every variables and outputs that are not defined in the sequence It allows the same command to be used to write various values in function of the command Origin The commands can be defined when configuring an action of type Execute command see 5 15 4 Execute command an on call group see 5 3 1 On call group properties or a user call number of type Command see 5 1 2 Dial number definition It also can be defined when configuring the Command driver see 8 7 Command driver 5 16 1 Command list Command configuration Command List Test K Command 2 sane Help Add Edit Delete External reference Excell Test xle Uutputs L7101 WALT Excell Test xle Uutputs L101 Command List Display the list of defined commands 5 64 Configuration Command description Sequence of writing commands to external variables or outputs which corresponds to the command selected in the command list Button Jest Click on this button to execute for test the command selected in the list Button Add
130. ct the On call management command in the Configuration menu or click on the button E On the displayed dialog box select the Programmed calls tab On Call Management f Ed Groups Prograrn Programmed Transfers Synchro Stations Users 2 ALTMAN Peter ALT MAN Peter ar ALTMAN Peter 04 00 4 ALTMAN Peter Monday 08 00 Remove Apply Program f 1 Call at begin of on call period FE 4 Call at end of on call period f 3 Cyclic Call Call cycle Le 4 Periodic Call Every at Message 23 tln Tag Value El Begin of on call period Vocal message Associated Text File The list on the top of the page displays the programmed calls for the user selected in the Users dropdown list If the selection is all the list displays the programmed calls for all the users In this case it is not possible to create a new programmed call Add button grayed A programmed call is defined by a line containing gt the call type 1 for a call at beginning of on call period 2 for a call at end of on call period 3 for cyclic call 4 for periodic call gt the name of the user to call possibly followed by the identifier in the dial number directory of the user of the specific number to call under the form lt ld gt gt the period of the cyclic call or the day and time of the periodic call To add a new programmed call 1 Select the concerned operator i
131. d a media to the list open the dialog box of communication configuration select the Driver tab then click on the Add button see 5 19 Communication drivers e Number Address Depending on the selected media telephone dial number beeper call voice call Alert modem or address pager email Alert socket A telephone dial number can contain from 1 to 24 alphanumeric characters modem codes for pause or tone waiting accepted ALERT User Guide 5 5 Configuration An internal number and an external number can be defined in the same field with the character between the both numbers e g 93 0476041093 At the time of the call the number to dial will be automatically selected according to the used telephone line internal or external For a pager address its length and allowed characters depend on the selected media Consult the on line help specific to each installed drivers for more information When the Email media is selected this field contains the email address of the receiver If the final receiver is a pager or a mobile phone SMS sent by email the email address will have to be preceded by one of the following strings gt if the information that designates the end receiver is contained in the email address gt lt mobile number gt if the end receiver has to be designated in the email subject with lt mobile number gt designating the mobile address or pager address such as it has to
132. d causes the modem to hang up the telephone line if no data has passed during the period Voice Gain Transmit Gain to apply during the transmission of a voice message The value 255 corresponds to the maximum gain This parameter is only valid for some voice modems Baud Baud rate used with the modem during voice communications Flow control Flow control used on the modem connection gt None flow control is not used gt Hardware flow control by RTS CTS gt Xon Xoff flow control by characters DC1 11h et DC3 13h Begin Voice Communication String of characters transmitted to the modem before the establishment of a voice communication End Voice Communication String of characters transmitted to the modem at end of voice communication Default button Click on this button to reinitialize the default values for the selected voice modem ALERT User Guide 5 77 Configuration 5 17 3 3 Configuration of GSM PCS modem parameters This dialog box defines the specific properties of the GSM modem used as well as its operating mode GSM PCS Modem parameters PIN Number 8 SMS format __Cancal C Auo PODU Test Help Parameters i Incoming call identification iM Processing of received messages cycle sec 5 Call acknowledgment Ack Team changeover End Message processor Network information Signal perator TT TT TT yyy Min value 0 31 5 Commands Init string The followi
133. d doesn t call on alarm gt Redundant LED indicates the status of the link with the redundant station displayed only when the redundant mode is selected gray yellow green e red gt COMx LED s modem gray e dark gray green e red yellow e orange 4 8 connection with the redundant station is not established connection Is in progress connection is established and is working normally connection is failed indicate the current status of Communication port or connected port is not used port is being initialized port is available for calls port failure cannot be open or out of order an incoming or outgoing call is in progress data connection established pager printer remote terminal User Interface e purple vocal connection established e dark yellow port is being disconnected A general status bar At the bottom of the screen including 3 windows and a message zone gt 1st window name of the locally logged operator with name of its class in brackets gt 2nd window name of the station selected at login time or in the display options gt 3rd window current date and hour gt right part zone to display help or service messages 4 6 Main screen The main screen displays a browser like synoptic view of the supervised installation and on call management It allows a continuous and optimal control of the application and proposes a lot of tools for operation and analyze This
134. de 6 19 Operation Click on the Delete button to delete a report selected from the list of reports When a report is deleted the associated audio report if it exists is also deleted Click on the Print button to print the logbook corresponding to the date and to the selection author topic done The printer which will be used is the printer selected by the Print setup command in the File menu If no setup has been performed it is the default printer 6 6 Editing a report To edit a report select the display of the logbook then click on the New button to create a new report or Edit to modify or complete an existing report after having selected it from the list of reports Report Edition Header OF Date at __K Cancel From Topic Motor Help Report have observed an abnormal overheating on the main motor service must be performed before the end of week Sound File Attached files Remove Open If the database export option is validated by the software license a report can be attached to one or more alarms An alarm report can be edited creation consultation modification from the alarm table see 6 2 5 from the alarm history see 6 3 6 or from any view of the main screen displaying tags in alarm by using the associated contextual menu Report command Header When creating a new report this last is automatically time stamped and signed with the n
135. defined in the edit field To choose the file click on the Browse button The model file is created in RTF format and contains references to variables that will be dynamically replaced during the mail transmission These references are amp TO amp Report receiver amp SUBJECT amp Report subject amp STATION amp Emitting station name amp DATE amp Current date at the fax transmission amp TIME amp Current time in format HH MM SS amp PAGES amp Number of page in the report These references can be used several times The font and position of the values will be those of their references Other references can be used in the file body amp BODY amp Begin ofthe structure to repeat for each alarm amp ALDATE amp Date ofthe alarm amp ALTIME amp Time of the alarm in format HH MM SS amp ALMESS amp Alarm message amp ALINSTRUC amp Instruction file that will be inserted in the fax amp ENDBODY amp End of the structure to repeat for each alarm Inside the body the references can be repeated as often as wished e The option Put the instruction file as an attachment gives the possibility of attachment of the instruction file to the message rather than inserting its content in the message body The SMPTP server button gives access to the parameter box of the SMPTP server of Alert to directly receive the messages without having to use a mail account SMTP server W Enable SMTP server Sinn TRE se E D aves ste E E E E
136. dgment of the call of the group Management of on call teams a team corresponding to a list of operators who will be called either simultaneously or by rotation according to option with possibility of declaring relief operators to call in case of call failure Management of a schedule table by group each table defining the team schedule for a group over one year The time periods can be defined with a resolution of one hour a half of hour or a quarter of hour It is possible to define reduce duty periods time during which only important alarms trigger the call of operators Weekly programs can also be defined with holiday management for the automatic affectation of teams in the schedule Possibility of schedule derogation with option to redirect calls to a specific team Management of team changeover possible clock in and out with option of mandatory team changeover for the strict control of the on call teams Definition of tags to supervise type of tag either simple variable event alarm or acknowledgment reference station localization functional group polling mode DDE or OPC tags For event or alarm tags transitory type or no alarm condition numerical or alohanumeric state or threshold detection absolute value or variation weekly schedule for validation numerical alphanumeric and vocal messages list of actions to perform For alarm tags priority possibility to declare a masking alarm text file containing ins
137. e assignment of the call numbers for each day of the week and the public holidays by time sections of 15 minutes The program can be put in service automatic change of the list of call numbers at each new period or out of service manual operation Under automatic operation it is possible to derogate temporarily from the current configuration by modifying it manually This configuration will remain valid until the next period Every operator owns his mail box that stores the last 10 service messages that have been transmitted to him The operator can consult and erase them either locally or at a distance by telephone audio messages or from a remote terminal An operator can be declared as console operator This attribute allows a list of operators to be defined these operators being able to receive specific messages via the DDE command SendConsole or the API function AlertsendConsole The messages transmitted by this way will be only sent if the operator is on call If the operator is not on call the messages will be stored and transmitted at the beginning of his on call period unless they have been acknowledged meanwhile DDE command AckConsole or function AlertAckConsole In the case of a multi stations management the operators can be attached to a specific station or to all the stations Operators with the same name can be defined on different Stations Some operators can be destined to receive a full traceability of the al
138. e button a to come back on the cancellation done It is validated only if at least one undo operation has been performed 6 1 8 Printing the schedule To print the monthly schedule table of the selected group choose the desired month and click on the button amp at the bottom right of the windows The printer which will be used is the printer selected by the Print setup command of the File menu If no setup has been performed it is the default printer 6 1 9 Calling the on call team Click on the button to directly call the operators of the team which is currently on duty and to transmit them a service message This action displays the call dialog box see 6 9 Sending a message with a list of addressees preset with the operators of the current team 6 4 Operation 6 2 Alarm table To display the alarm table select the Alarms command in the Operation menu or just click on the button CE On the main screen to access to the alarm table select the Alarms tab on the bottom of the screen General Supervision E af File Operation Configuration ALARM AK MODEM Supervision Alert COMTS COM3 CAPIPORTI g General ces Er co Excell Test xlslAlarms 8 a Pg EF a aa TE On cal Gr Cal status Bii Supervision h ay Tags M Start ventilation transfo 1 5 Fire 0 Call ended Excell Test xls Alarr Start Force condenser TGBT 1 F ihre i NetSentinel OPCSer Start ventilation transfo 2 0 Fire
139. e displayed for an operator having the selected profile Validate or invalidate a menu by clicking on the corresponding checkbox To select the authorized command s for a particular menu click on the line of the menu in question commands of the menu selected are presented in the Menu entries list Remarks The File menu cannot be disabled Login Logout command is mandatory The Configuration menu cannot be suppress for the basic class of level 2 System by default e Menu entries Selection of authorized commands in the menu selected into the Main Menu list Validate or invalidate a menu by clicking on the corresponding checkbox Remarks The Login and Logout commands of the File menu are not displayed in the measure where they cannot be disabled The User profiles command of the Configuration menu cannot be disabled for the basic class of level 2 System e Screens This list displays the different screens that can be customized To select the authorized commands in a particular screen click on the line of the screen in question the possible commands for this screen are presented in the Authorized functions list e Authorized functions This list defines the display options and the authorized functions on the screen selected in the Screens list To Validate or invalidate a function click on the corresponding checkbox This list is disabled for the definition of the profile without user no
140. e event state provokes the acknowledgment of all alarms belonging to the basic functional group associated with the tag If there is no functional group associated with the tag the field Message must contain the name of a valid operator in order to be able to search for the oldest alarm group transmitted to this operator and acknowledge alarms of this group with the name of the operator in question If a Call group action is defined a call is triggered to the operators concerned by the acknowledgment of the associated alarm group with transmission of the formatted message of the tag Example message format Acknowledgment of amp G alarms by amp M message Peter HENRY associated group Boiler room message transmitted Acknowledgment of Boiler room alarms by Peter HENRY ALERT User Guide 5 35 Configuration A tag can belong to several groups The basic functional group selected in this field present some additional functionalities gt Possibility of integrating the name of the basic group in the alarm message by inserting the string amp G in the associated message format see 5 11 5 Definition of message format gt Possibility of playing the audio message of the basic group before the audio alarm message or in substitution if the alarm message is empty gt Possibility of performing only one call for all alarms of the group when this option is enabled on the level of the call driver gt Possibilit
141. e files are attached files Changes of name and path are ignored ALERT User Guide 5 25 Configuration For a transfer performed by a synchronization driver Alert Modem Alert Socket Alert Direct the files will be copied in the download directory of the target station This directory is defined on the target station in the parameters of the corresponding synchronization driver To create a new programmed file transfer 1 Select the concerned operator in the dropdown list 2 Select the call type cyclic call or periodic call 3 In case of a cyclic call define the call cycle In case of a periodic call select the day of the call a specific week day or every days in the dropdown list Every then define the call time for the selected day 4 Define the transfer direction Send the files are sent to the remote station upload Receive the files are received from the remote station download 5 Select the files to send by clicking on the Add Files button This action displays a dialog box to browse and select the files to add to the file list To remove files from the list select them in the file list the click on the Remove Files button 6 Finally click on the Add button located below the user list For a given operator only one cyclic file transfer can be defined But it is possible to define several periodic file transfers for the same operator To delete a programmed file transfer Select it in the programmed file transfer
142. e maximal value of the transmitted counter When this value is reached the counter is reset to zero e The Format parameter defines the value which will be written in the designated watch dog item By default the write format contains only the counter value coded under the form amp C The format string can include any other numerical or alphanumeric string and also tab characters that must be coded under the form amp T To disable the watch dog processing you just have to erase the reference of the defined watch dog item or to set the write cycle to zero ALERT User Guide 7 7 Options Code Parameters Meaning O Oo fe Application initialization toe Applicationclosure S A lt operator gt lt port gt lt driver gt Outgoing call for message lt operator gt lt port gt lt driver gt Outgoing call for alarm 6 lt operator gt sf Advisedooperator _ _ S 8 lt operator gt lt cause gt Call failure o 9 lt alarmmessage gt Alarm o 16 lt on call group gt Group call failed woo e System date modified S E S Alert management deactivation in redundant mode E Alert management reactivation in redundant mode End of remote session Operator set on duty lt operator gt lt operator gt Call denied negative call acknowledgment 2 Group lt G gt team changeover lt A gt gt Team changeover team A to team B in group G lt B gt lt operator gt max delay lt n gt minutes Group lt G gt
143. e redundant PC e The Main Station option defines the operating mode of the 2 redundant stations The main station is the station that will be active when the 2 stations will normally function So that the redundant mode functions correctly it is necessary to define one of the 2 7 20 Options Stations like main station checked option and the other station like secondary station option not checked When the Automatic Switch option is checked default option the switching between the 2 stations is automatic when the active station goes to failure Uncheck this option if you wish to control this switching from the external application When the Distributed calls option is checked the calls are distributed between the 2 Stations If the main station does not have any available port for the type of call to perform it automatically delegates the call to the other station When this operating mode is chosen switching between the stations is not necessary Automatic Switch option not checked The Interface radio buttons select the interface to use to manage the redundancy between the 2 stations control and synchronization NetDDE or TCP IP When the TCP IP network protocol is installed on the 2 redundant PC s it will be preferable to use this interface that is more efficient than NetDDE When the TCP IP interface is selected it is possible to modify the number of the port used for the TCP IP exchanges between the redundant stations
144. e supervised application which contains the masking information in reading and if the option Transmits masking is validated the control of masking actions in writing By default the reference of the event tag is proposed 5 48 Configuration 5 11 5 Definition of message format This dialog box called during the configuration of an event see above defines a character string which will be used to format the alarm message or reset or acknowledgement message of a specific tag If the format string is empty default value the used format will be the default format defined in the alarm options see 7 4 Alarm options Format of alarm message fx Tag Reference Excell T est xls 4larns L101 Format ela kM Syntax khi Alarm Message ta Alarm Group A o ag Reference amp Alarm Priority amp L Alarm Code U Ack User ut Station Mare D Alarm Date and Time amp L Remote Station Name bY Alarm Tag Value ta On call Group fn Alarm Value of Tag Bl t0 OID bY Current Tag Value kin Current Value of Tag BuildingsBuilding 4 Start ventilation transto 1 Item reference This field displays the reference of the tag of which one wishes to define the message format Message format The message format defines a composite message that will be created at the time of the alarm or reset or acknowledgment This format can be selected in the dropdown list among the already defined formats or directly entered
145. e the call succeeded but no call acknowledgment intervened in the specified time after the configured number of reiterations In this case according to option the call cycle of the team can be either abandoned or reiterated after a configurable temporization A team is considered as warned when according to the chosen option either at least one operator of the team has been warned or when the required number of warned operators has been reached However if the alarm is not acknowledged in a defined delay the call of the team or the following in the schedule can be reiterated If the timeout defined to acknowledge an alarm is null the group is automatically removed from list of groups to call as soon as the on duty team has been warned Otherwise the group remains in the list of groups to call so long that all alarms concerning this group have not been acknowledged At the time of the acknowledgment of an alarm if this alarm is the last cause of call of a team all calls concerning this team are abandoned 2 8 Functionning 2 5 Control of working failures In order to be reliable an alert management system must be able to treat events in all circumstances To guarantee a high level of security it must control that the supervised application works correctly that the link with this one is available and that it will be able to trigger the necessary calls when an alarm will be detected To insure the security of the whole system
146. e welcome message is recorded file greeting wav e Voice Synthesis the welcome message is synthesized from the text defined in the Voice synthesis page Click on the Listen button to listen to the selected welcome message Click on the Browse button to browse files for a sound file containing a prerecorded welcome message When a sound file is selected its content is copied in the place of the current welcome message Click on the Record button to record a new welcome message or edit the current welcome message 7 26 Options Vocal Guide The vocal guide explains the usage of the vocal server It can be automatically played after the alarm and service messages if the option Automatic play of vocal guide after messages is validated or on explicit demand of the user key The option Automatic play of vocal guide after messages validates the automatic play of the vocal guide after the initial transmission of the alarm and service messages Click on the Listen button to listen to the selected vocal guide Click on the Browse button to browse files for a sound file containing a prerecorded vocal guide When a sound file is selected its content is copied in the place of the current vocal guide Click on the Record button to record a new vocal guide or edit the current vocal guide Default Alarm Message The default alarm message is played during telephone communications to signal alarms that do not have any
147. each of its columns To do this click on the title of the wanted column an arrow will indicate the increasing sense of the sorting Click again on the title of the column to reverse the sort order reversed arrow To perform a fast research for a value in the list select the research column by clicking on its title then scroll the list with the scroll bar a bubble displays the content of the selected column for the 1st line of the list corresponding to the scroll bar position 6 12 Operation Acknowledged Date and time of the alarm acknowledgment Comment Comment about the alarm Alarm statistics The list presents statistics for the tags declared as alarm and corresponding to the done selection In the displayed statistics only are counted alarms that have been seen by Alert coming back to normal state Every alarm tag is represented by a line on 7 columns Station Station attached to the alarm Group Tag group of the alarm Alarm Formatted message defined for the alarm P Priority level of the alarm Fail number Number of time that the alarm triggered during the selected period Only are taken in account alarms that came back in normal state Total time Addition of time during which the variable was active during the selected period in seconds Mean time Average time on the selected period of the time during which the variable remained to the state of alarm in seconds This list can be customized and sorted The
148. eam The name of the operator declaring the end of the on call time clock out is asked for confirmation see 6 13 Team changeover Add a user Creation of a new operator assigned to the team see 5 1 1 User properties The created operator is automatically added to the parent group Paste Assignment to the team of the operators prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the user list a group or another team 4 30 User Interface Delete Rename Properties Deletion of the selected teams After confirmation the teams are definitively deleted The operators of the teams are not deleted Change the name of the team Edition of the team properties see 5 4 1 Team properties The synoptic view of the team displays the duty and relief status of the operators in the team e The duty status of the operators is signaled by the overlapped symbol amp for the off duty operators The duty status of one or more operators can be switched by using the Off duty command of the contextual menu e The relief status of the operators in the team is signaled by the overlapped symbol 2 on the icon of the relief operators The relief status of one or more operators can be switched by using the Relief user command of the contextual menu One or more operators can be set off duty and substituted by using the Substituted by command in the contextual menu to designate a substitute in the parent group of the te
149. ection of an external tag When the reference is defined a new dialog box allows the parameters of the tag to supervise to be configured see 5 11 Tag properties The default parameters of the created tag type event condition action list are those of the tag which was selected in the view This view also can be used as starting base for assignment of tags to the defined supervision groups e By drag and drop operation tags to assign to a group are selected in the view then dragged with the mouse over the tree branch that corresponds to the wanted group This operation does not remove the selected tags from the tag list even if the CTRL key is pressed when releasing the mouse button cursor always displayed during the dragging operation e By copy paste operation tags to assign to a group are selected in the view then copied in the clipboard using a XML format Copy command of the contextual menu These tags can after be pasted in various groups The order of the tags in the list can be modified To move a tag click on its line with the mouse left button drag it keeping the mouse button pressed over the tag line AFTER which the dragged tag is wished to be moved then release the mouse button The polling of a data server can easily be suspended and reactivated by using the Polling command in the contextual menu of the corresponding branch The icon of each data server can be customi
150. ed there is no group designated as relief for the actual group Alarm tone e Sound File When this option is checked every alarm detected concerning the group will be signaled on the local station by an alarm sound ALERT User Guide 5 15 Configuration Button Browse Click on this button to browse files for a sound file containing an alarm sound to assign to the group Button Listen Click on this button to listen to the alarm sound selected for the group Call cycle This group defines the default options for the management of the teams of the group Selection of the team management mode gt Call one user for each alarm different for every alarm operator turnover gt Call all active users of the team call broadcasting with management of relief operators according to options below Definition of the call conditions for relief operators only for call broadcasting gt Call relief if not one of user is advised a relief operator is called when none of the main operators of the team has been successfully reached assures that at less one operator is warned gt Call relief for each unadvised user a relief operator is called every time a team s operator cannot be reached assures that a constant number of operators are warned Button Default This button reinitializes the management options for the teams of the group from the default options defined in the general call options Team changeover management
151. ed by the selection Reference of masking item This item can be different or identical to the item referenced to define the event Transmits masking actions to the server This option enables when checked the transmission to the supervised application of the masking actions performed through ALERT locally by telephone or from a remote terminal This transmission corresponds to a DDE or OPC write command of the value defined as masking condition That supposes that the supervised application is able to interpret the write of value in the item in question like a masking command gt If the definite value is not numeric the mask activation is required for masking conditions EQUAL HIGHER SAME LOWER SAME by transmission of the associated string and for the other conditions by transmission of an empty string gt If the definite value is numeric the following treatment will be made in function of the masking condition e EQUAL HIGHER SAME or LOWER SAME Transmission of the associated value e NOT EQUAL or HIGHER Transmission of the value 1 e LOWER Transmission of the value 1 e AND Transmission of the result of LOGICAL OR between the current value of the variable and the mask defined by the associated value e NOT AND Transmission of the result of LOGICAL AND between the current value of the variable and the inverse of mask defined by the associated value Reference of masking item This group defines the item of th
152. ed dialog box select the Display tab Options E2 x Alarms Calls Redundancy General Supervision Language Anglais tats Unis Multilanguage messages and labels Windows Control i Sustem menu box i Window sizing Lock ALT and CTAL ESC keps Schedule Resolution Hour C 1 2 Hour 1 44 Hour Colors Alarm log Active acknowledged Active not acknowledged Default Event log Displayed station configuration filter Station all Language e Selection of the language of the user interface menus dialogs messages help etc The defined language will be taken into account from validation by clicking the OK button e Validation of the multi language management of messages and labels When the multi language management is validated the messages and labels can be defined in several languages in order to be transmitted in the language of the called user See 8 4 Multi language management 7 12 Options Windows Control The System menu box option validates the display of the system menu box on the left of the title bar of the main window This option will have effect only after restarting the application The Window sizing option validates the display of the sizing controls of the main window buttons to minimize and maximize windows sizing frame If this option is not selected the window is full screen and can be neither adjusted nor moved This option will have only after
153. ed from different sources 1 Serial link Messages are issued from an external system through a serial link printer output of an external system for example Messages can be either asynchronously received or required by the message processor polling sequence Acknowledgment can be transmitted 2 TCP IP Messages are issued from an external system through a TCP IP network in connected mode TCP or as datagram UDP Messages can be either asynchronously received or required by the message processor polling sequence Acknowledgment can be transmitted 3 Alarm Messages are transmitted in the content of a string variable declared as event in Alert DDE or OPC tag or tag written by a mediator 4 Short Messages SMS Messages are received from remote GSM modems under the form of short messages SMS Short messages can also be sent back for acknowledgment 5 API Command line Messages are transmitted through the function lt AlertSendDataToScript gt of the Alert API or the command lt SendDataToScript gt addressed to Alert see 8 13 17 6 Other Messages are cyclically extracted from a file a data base or a mail box email The message processor is able to simultaneously process messages from different origin Each treatment is described by a prototype which include a set of parameters that are saved in an initialization file file lt prototype gt ini associated with a script file lt prototype gt prg T
154. ed in the MESSAGE sub directory Click on the Listen button to listen to the selected audio message Remark If the voice synthesis from the text option is available the vocal message can be directly synthesized from the alphanumeric message entered To request for the synthesis of the alphanumeric message check the Vocal message option To test the voice synthesis of the alphanumeric message entered click on the Listen button When checked the Beeper call enabled option validates the call of operators configured with a beeper number A text file can also be associated with the message This file is used to transmit some further information by fax or email It can be defined as contextual and incorporate the value of variables of the supervision list Click on the Edit button to directly type the text to transmit This text is recorded in a text file in the MESSAGE sub directory with a name under the format MCxxxx TXT Xxxx being a numerical code between 0000 and 9999 Click on the Browse button to search and select an existing text file ALERT User Guide 6 25 Operation Validation Transmission By clicking on the OK button one leaves the dialog box with recording of the message in the mailbox of each of the operators selected as addressee By clicking on the Send gt gt button one leaves the dialog box with starting the immediate transmission of the message to the operators selected as addre
155. ed with Primary servers This list displays the list of the DDE and OPC servers which are referred to in the polling list whether they are on the local station or any network station The Topic column is used only for DDE servers The last column displays the number of secondary servers associated with Secondary servers This list displays the list of secondary DDE and OPC servers associated with the server selected in the list Primary channels These servers will be requested in case of failure of the associated primary server in accordance with the order defined in the list Buton Add Click on this button to add a new secondary server in the list of secondary servers associated with the server selected in the list of primary servers The displayed dialog box allows the selection of a computer a network station a server and a topic Button Edit Click on this button to modify the definition of the secondary server selected in the list of secondary servers The displayed dialog box allows the modification of the computer the network station the server and the topic ALERT User Guide 7 9 Options Button Delete Click on this button to remove the selected secondary server from the list of secondary servers Buttons 4 and x Use these buttons to respectively move up and down the secondary server selected in the list of secondary servers The secondary servers are used in accordance with the order defined in
156. eference is defined a new dialog box allows the parameters of the tag to be configured see 5 11 Tag properties The default parameters of the created tag type event condition action list are those of the tag which was selected in the view e Use the Paste command in the contextual menu to create in the group a new DDE tag Before that operation the pasted tag has to be copied from a DDE server application LINK format A dialog box allows the parameters of the tag to be configured see 5 11 Tag properties e Use the same Paste command in the contextual menu to insert in the group a list of tags that were prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the tag view a data server or another group The copied tags are just assigned to the group They are not removed from the tag list or from the origin group e Perform a drag and drop operation the tags are first selected in the view associated with the Zags branch a data server branch or any other group branch then dragged with the mouse over the icon of the target group The tags dragged and dropped are just assigned to the group They are not removed from the tag list If they are issued from another group they are automatically detached from this group except if the CTRL key is keeping pressed at the dropping time cursor displayed to signal a copy operation The synoptic view associated with a group displays either the list of its child
157. efines a periodic backup of the configuration in a designated directory To program a backup select a period date and time and a backup directory Default is backup in application directory WEB Server This group allows the activation and the configuration of the WEB server module that is necessary to use the JALERT client interface Login Logout e The option Enable commands out of login allows some operations to be authorized without having to be logged on the application call or alarm acknowledgment alarm masking unmasking edition of an alarm comment or report call transmission When this option is validated every commands that require the designation of the accountable user for the performed action acknowledgment masking provoke the display of a dialog box to get the name of the user and his password The command is only accepted if the profile of the designated user authorizes it e The parameter Automatic logout timeout defines the time after which the application will be automatically logged out if there was no user action in the middle time mouse or keyboard action The value 0 corresponds to an infinite time no automatic logout ALERT User Guide 7 3 Options 7 1 1 Starting parameters The Starting parameters dialog box defines the working mode of the software at launching time starting page user interface Starting parameters f Eg Starting page Uk ia Cancel Help O S
158. efines the default call options on event reset and alarm acknowledgment These options can be redefined at the level of each tag e Call option on alarm reset If this option is checked the reset of alarms for those the call option on event reset has not been specifically redefined will trigger a call to the attached group e Call on alarm acknowledgment If this option is checked the acknowledgment of alarms for those the call option on alarm acknowledgment has not been specifically redefined will trigger a call to the attached group In the both case only operators having the corresponding call option will be called 7 16 Options 7 5 Call options To configure the call management options select the Options command of the Configuration menu then on the displayed dialog box select the Calls tab Call trigging This group defines the options attached to the call trigging conditions Options General Supervision Display Alarms Redundancy Call tigging Discard call if no team to call when alarm is activated Mw Mew call if unacknowledged alarm is reactivated i Reactivation of call cycle if new alarm Abort call cycle on derogation W Trace if call failed caused by off duty user Delay before tigging call seconds 0 During a reduced duty period trig the call if the alarm priority i at least Timeout before restarting new cycle after fail minutes 5 Team Management by default Call one use
159. el Relief When this option is checked the modem will be only used in relief mode when none of the main communication ports not defined as relief can be used ports in failure 5 70 Configuration This option allows a relief calling device to be used in case of problem with the usual calling systems Button Setup Click on this button to configure the general parameters of the modem 5 17 3 Configuration of a physical port COM This dialog box defines the working parameters of the selected communication port when it is connected to a modem or to an external system Port defined as modem connection COM3 Port parameters Link Type AENEAN NT Baud Rate 115200 Bits Shops Ce 7 fe 8 ee Parity Ce even none C odd Flow Control None C Hardware C Kon koff Incoming call management Vocal response incomming call only KES Cancel Help Pretiz to dial az if Voice Modern kW Fas Moder GSMYPCS Modem W Carrier detect DCD Modem parameters 0 Relief Mas communication time sec Port defined as direct connection with an external system COM1 Port parameters Link Type Baud Rate 9600 Bits Shops Ce 7 fe Parity Ce even none C odd Flow Control f None C Hardware Kon kaff ALERT User Guide Cancel Help Connect detect DSA Communication Driver Ascom 5 71 Configuration The follo
160. election of internal external line When this option is checked the port to use to transmit a call will be select according to the internal external type of the dial number in accordance with the defined dialling rulers max length of internal number forcing or suppression of prefix If the number to call is an internal number only the lines defined as internal dial prefix defined for the associated communication port will be used If the number to call is an external number all the lines can be used except those that have been specified as exclusively internal dial prefix Max time to wait to answer Maximal time to wait for answer after dialing After this time without answer the call is considered as failed no answer Test cycle for port opening When this value is non null the ports that cannot be open by the software used by another application remote control application for example are periodically checked following the defined cycle Telephone line test cycle When this value is non null the modems for which the line test has been validated are periodically checked for line test following the defined cycle Failed modem test cycle When this value is non null the modems considered as in fail state are periodically checked following the defined cycle 5 84 Configuration 5 19 Communication drivers To configure the communication drivers select the Communication command in the Configuration menu
161. else optional 0 by default Example DDE command AckCall lt Tab gt Bob Command line ALERT AckCall Bob ALERT User Guide 8 43 Appendix 8 13 9 CallGroup Object Creation of a temporary alarm alarm activation and calling the associated group This alarm will be deleted after acknowledgment Parameters 1st parameter destination of on call group 2nd parameter alarm identifier 3rd parameter associated alphanumeric alarm message 4th parameter associated numerical alarm message optional 5th parameter name of audio file containing the associated vocal message optional Example DDE command CallGroup lt Tab gt Technical lt Tab gt Pressure lt Tab gt Boiler overheating lt Tab gt 00835 lt Tab gt C Message Pressure wav Command line ALERT CallGroup Technical Pressure Boiler overheating 00835 C Message Pressure wav 8 13 10 CallUser Object Calla user for transmission of a message Parameters 1st parameter name of user 2nd parameter alohanumerical message to transmit 3rd parameter numerical message to transmit optional 4th parameter name of SOUND file containing the associated vocal message optional 5th parameter name of associated TEXT file optional Example DDE command CallUser lt Tab gt Bob lt Tab gt Call Alert station Command line ALERT CallUser Bob Call Alert station 8 44 Appendix 8 13 11 ValidUser Object Set an user on duty or off duty Parameters
162. eneral Supervision File Operation Configuration 2 Supervision Alert COMI amp COM3 CAPIPORT1 BA General Supervision A Ta Excell T est_xlsJAlarms 8 E mi td eee ee _ _2 Label Value On call Gr Call status Comment supervision KIEA 448 Tags a Start ventilation transfo 1 5 Fire Excel Test xls JAlarm Start Force condenser TGBT 1 NetSentineLOPCServe 3 Groups re vu A nes Te eo Pam os A EVENT LOG uilding Le Bande re _ Faramele x Building B T 13 53 CALL FAIL COMT Tedi Eo Functions 17 13 53 DISCONNECT COM Sa 11 14 18 CALL ACK Peter ALTMAN 7 ALERT F Power Central Station du Mechanical 11 14 21 ALARM ACE Ventilation transto room 1 AB 3EL128 7 ALERT it On Call Management 111427 MESSAGE CALL Peter ALTMAN 91 COMT Yocal Date Wa Users 11 14 42 CONNECT COM 07 26 04 amp Groups 11 14 46 CALL ACK Peter ALTMAN OF fer 04 E Maintenance 11 15 02 DISCONNECT COM Be GONTRAN Klaus 17 15 04 TEAM CHANGEOVER Group Maintenance team changeover gt MARTIN A MARTIN Roger 11 36 51 ALARM Ventilation transfo room 1 ABSEL128 Sp NIGHT 11 36 51 INFO Group Maintenance selected e ALTMAN Peter 11 36 51 INFO Team Roger MARTIN selected _ 8p BOURGEOIS Willian 11 36 51 ALARM CALL Roger MARTIN 91 COM1 Vocal ae Fire 11 37 06 CONNECT COM x Eea 11 3711 CALL ACK Roger MARTIN p PAYOT Guy 11 37 19 ALARM ACK Ventilation transto room 1 AB3EL128 Roger MARTI 11 37 29 DISCONNECT COM HENRY Peter D a
163. ent invalidation alarm masking or call inhibition Event schedule tag Excel Test xls Alarms L1C4 Event masked OK D arm masked E Call disabled Cancel Help Schedule pE W Schedule activation hejes es pophjisnasheizshisezae Crona T a DIT Tuesday 111111177711 p Wednesda pmm Truss ITN TTT LTT errs Prides TTT p TT TL BSaturdsy TTT p 111 1U IT TI NN NININE P sunday TTT Holiday Use the right button of the mouse to erase an areal Event masked During the Event masked time areas the event or alarm is completely ignored no trace in the event log Remark An event trigged during a masking period will not be detected at the end of the masking period even it is yet active at this time A new activation of the event out of the masking period will be necessary to provoke the consequent treatments Alarm masked During the Alarm masked time areas the alarm is automatically masked The treatment performed on the alarm activation is the same as for the masked alarms trace event in the event log masking in the alarm table actions disabled Call disabled During the Call disabled time areas the event or alarm is normally processed but the call actions group or user are disabled Schedule The schedule of an event can be selected in the dropdown list among schedules which were beforehand defined for other events The choice none
164. ers to be used Possibility of calling several numbers for the same operator e g transmission of SMS confirmation by phone call automatic adaptation 1 8 Introduction of the numbers to dial when internal and external telephone line are simultaneously used e Improvement of the graphical interface optimization of display customization of the lists sorting on columns new columns call following e New contextual on line help The archiving of the configuration data and the data exchanges performed during the synchronizations between the redundant stations and the server and client stations were completely modified The archived and exchanged data are now structured in accordance with standard XML This choice reinforces the interoperability of the software and offers a standardized access to all the configuration data of the application 1 4 News of the version 3 5 revision 2 The revision 2 of the version 3 5 of the software proposes the following new functionalities Option to run as Windows service When this option is validated the software is automatically registered as Windows service It is then automatically launched at the system initialization and is operational even if no user session is open See 8 6 Alert as service ActiveX interface giving access to all the functions of the programming interface API of Alert Extension of the data server concept to all the tags other than DDE and OPC tags
165. ervention reports When an operator has to identify himself he can enter his name his name and his first name or his name followed by the first letters of his first name The language of the operator specifies the language to use to transmit him the messages If a message to transmit is not defined in the user language it will be searched in the following priority order 2 4 Functionning gt inthe language of the user interface if it is defined in this language gt in US English if it is defined in this language gt inthe first available language for the message A real operator corresponds to a physical operator that can intervene locally or at a distance on the installation A virtual operator corresponds to a communication media used by several operators shared pager or cellular phone telephone set in a common local etc When a virtual operator is called in vocal any real operator who belongs to the same on call group can identify himself instead of the virtual operator On the same way when the virtual operator is a pager the real operator having received the message can call back in order to acknowledge the call This functionality allows the identification of who really took in charge the call transmitted The operator code ID 1 to 4 digits allows the operator to identify himself during telephonic communications by using the telephonic keyboard DTMF codes The access code allows the operator to authenticate himse
166. eturn to the normal state This option is checked by default e Reactivation of call cycle if new alarm When this option is checked the apparition of a new alarm reinitialize the call cycle of the concerned group This option ensures that all new alarm will be signaled to operators even if they have been already called This option is checked by default e Abort call cycle on derogation When this option is checked the derogation command for a group immediately aborts the current call cycle of the group By default this option is not checked e Trace if call failed caused by off duty user This option validates or not the trace in the event log of the call fails that are consecutive to the call of an off duty operator When the on call management is controlled from the supervised application by the modification of the on duty status of operators it is preferable to uncheck this option to avoid useless information in the event log e Delay before trigging call This parameter defines the waited timeout in seconds before trigging a call when an alarm is detected This timeout allows the alarm to be immediately treated by a local operator before starting of the call cycle By default this time is O no delay to trigger the call e During a reduced duty period trig the call if the alarm priority is at least This value defines the minimum level of alarm priority to start a call during a reduced duty period When an alarm has a priority
167. evcssisrccwesescsccececaccvatsseisccsessseosieesants O72 2 8 10 EMAIL DRIVER vicissnssscsescscccoscesesscctesccaceesdesescecesccsscescecsecseses O74 8 11 ALERT DRIVER sssvcscescccevescsacssccovssssccsssedececsseecsssetcssctetesesseses O 9 8 12 DDE SERVER INTERFACE scccsccsccccsccsccscccccccsccsccsccscscsscssees 8 3 1 8 12 l General Presem atO raia a a 8 31 8 122 SYSTEM tOPIC snin a tun te etd dia nana 8 32 86 12 21 DDEDrOtOcOlIT ME SRE SR NN du a n2 ne 8 32 8 1222 ADbIICATIONCONtTOLIT MS Sn nu 8 32 8123 MISE LONG nn tnt nettoie 8 34 012 3 1 DDE DrOtOEOlLITeMS RL a tennis 8 34 8 12 3 2 Usermahageme nt items sisi net ans 8 34 STZA CROP AO DICO Mn tn ie 8 36 BZA DDEDrOtOCOLIT MS RER AN MA a 8 36 8 12 4 2 Group management LEMS sisisiecic ccciarnnentinnindddenicaniacauausees 8 36 8 123 ALARM EO DIC SSSR nn deal iii nn tienne 8 37 8 12 5i1 DDE PDrOtOCOlIT MS RSR a 8 37 8 12 5 2 Alarm management items nn 8 37 8 13 COMMAND INTERFACE DDE OR COMMAND LINE ssssssssees 8 39 Sel Sol Pr S NLATIONE RSR a canaseaanssasdensasetasnaedeaeamanceuaeeeas 8 39 8T kT DDE COMMA Class SAUNA a i 8 40 8 13 1 2 Command by command line esssscsssscsccesecesesesssesesscssssssasesecacasesecesens 8 40 8 132 Create MAPS nn nn onda aeolian 8 41 0 13 3 S UASTUICTIONSS SR de A 8 41 8134 S PTIONM ER oreo mn nest 8 42 8139 SALIN iian TEE EEE E une ME nana aunts 8 42 8136 ACRA AA esaa tue E 8 43 DA MISKA aa a rR N E O N OA 8 43 DO ACR a E nn 8 43 FES A
168. f the Operation menu for the concerned profile s 4 6 1 Topographical representation The displayed tree architecture is as shown on the next page User Interface Root x blue if DDE OPC connections stopped red if at least one alarm not acknowledged on all the stations blue if alarms acknowledged and active on all the stations i Station X blue if polling stopped on the station X red if calls disabled on the station red if at least one alarm not acknowledged on the station blue if alarms acknowledged and active on the station Supervision X blue if polling stopped on the station red if at least one alarm not acknowledged on the station blue if alarms acknowledged and active on the station Tags X blue if polling stopped on the station red if at least one alarm not acknowledged on the station blue if o acknowledged and active on the station _ DDE OPC Server 4 DDE OPCServer Q 0 DDE OPC Servers amp ia X blue if polling stopped on data server red if alarm not acknowledged in data server blue if alarms acknowledged active in data server red if link failure with at least one tag of data server SDN DDD Groups X blue if polling stopped on the station red if at least one alarm not acknowledged on the station blue if alarms acknowledged and active on the station Group amp bl
169. f Browse Foot height from the bottom of the page 50 More Foot model file ATF Height unit OAD ev letsor Bi D ebugsF axF oot rtf Browse z Ce mm Inch Body model file RTE ne DAD ev leks5r Bin Debug axBody rth Browse The displayed dialog box allows the configuration of the following parameters e The Automatic call acknowledgment option when checked avoids having to call back Alert to confirm the fax reception e The Send all alarms in one report option allows when checked the transmission of all the alarms on the same fax When this option is not checked a fax is transmitted for each alarm e The fax identifier maximum 20 characters This identifier is used by the protocol to identify the calling fax on the display of the receiving fax and for the statistical reports of this last For compatibility with some fax it is better to only use numeric characters generally the phone number of the calling fax e The header to write on the top of each page for the first page and the following pages 8 22 Appendix The fax header is formatted following the specified model file and size The model file is created in RTF format and contains references to variables that will be dynamically replaced during the fax transmission These references are amp TO amp Report receiver amp SUBJECT amp Report subject amp STATION amp Emitting station name amp DATE amp Current date at the fax
170. f a new tag preset with the parameters of the selected tag see 5 10 Selection of an external tag and 5 11 Tag properties Copy the properties of the selected tags to the clipboard XML format for later paste in groups Creation of a new tag using a DDE reference that was prior copied in the clipboard LINK format from a DDE server application see 5 11 Tag properties Deletion of the selected tags After confirmation the tags are definitively deleted Edition of the tag properties see 5 11 Tag properties gt This command is available only for the tags in alarm 6 This command is available only when the option Database export is validated see 7 1 General options ALERT User Guide 4 17 User Interface 4 6 1 5 Data servers The Tag branch displays in its sub tree the list of data servers DDE and OPC referred to in the tag list Each data server is represented in a sub branch of the Tag branch by a customizable icon and the name of the data server with its network path if the server is located on another computer The associated view displays all the tags attached to the server under the same format than in the Tag branch New tags can be easily added to a data server by selecting the Add a Tag command in the contextual menu of the branch or view A first dialog box is displayed to enter the tag reference or to browse it in an external application see 5 10 Sel
171. f the alarm to acknowledge code displayed in the title bar of the configuration dialog box of the alarm in question 7 30 Options 7 8 Toolbar customization The tool bar supporting the command buttons can be customized by the addition or removal of buttons To access to the configuration of the toolbar select the Toolbar command of the Configuration menu Toolbar Configuration Toolbar contents ey gt Operation Send message Operation Calls in progress Commands is Default Cancel Close The list Toolbar contents shows the buttons displayed in the current toolbar with the associated menu command eg File Logout Logout command from the File menu The Separator lines correspond to a half button space on the tool bar 1 To remove a button Select the desired button in the list Toolbar contents then click on the Remove button 2 To modify a button Select the desired buttons in the list Toolbar contents then choose the new button from the list Buttons it can be the same one and the command associated with it from the list Commands Click on the Modify button 3 To insert a new button Select in the list Toolbar contents the button before which one wants to insert the new button Then choose the new button from the list Buttons and the command to be associated with it from the list Commands Click on the Insert button The Default button restores the standard configurat
172. f the characteristic sound message of the concerned on call group when an alarm is detected If several groups are attached to an alarm the played file will be the file of the first group defined in the list of the attached groups Note This option is validated for all the defined alarms attached to an on call group having a sound file configured It is also possible to play a sound file for a specific alarm by defining a Play Tone action for this alarm e Play vocal message This option validates the local emission of the audio message attached to an alarm when an alarm is detected This emission will follow the emission of the group sound message if this emission is validated If the Repeated box is checked the message will be played in a continuous loop until the alarm acknowledgment Note This option is validated for all the defined alarms in the polling list It is also possible to play the alarm message on the local station for a specific alarm by defining a Play vocal message action for this alarm Default format of alarm messages This group defines the default format to use for the alarm messages and reset or acknowledgment messages that do not have specific format associated with The message format defines a composite message that will be created at the event time of the concerned alarm reset or acknowledgment It can contain some invariant parts reproduced as they are and some variable parts that make reference to al
173. f the group in the supervision tree small and large icon Click on the Modify button to select another icon Associated vocal message This field defines the name of an audio file containing the voice message associated with the group If the typed text is not ended by WAV the text will be automatically synthesized if the Text To Speech option is active in order to produce the voice message associated with the group The sound file can be selected among the existing files by clicking on the Browse button or directly recorded by clicking on the Record button Click on the Listen button to listen to the selected vocal message Note The vocal message associated with the group is used to designate the basic group of an alarm in the vocal alarm messages It is played before the vocal message associated with the tag in alarm If there is no vocal message associated with the tag the identification message of the group is played alone ALERT User Guide 5 55 Configuration 5 15 Definition of actions 5 15 1 Call group Action definition Call Group Cancel Help Group to call M amtenance r Call enabled Yes C No C Call delayed SEC The Call group action causes the call of the group selected in the Group to call dropdown list with option of inhibition or delay Note this action implicitly authorizes the users of the designated group to have access to the tag consultation acknowledgment It is the onl
174. f the group to which the team is attached group selected Group Operators User list of the group to which the team is attached To add a user to the current team you can gt select his name in the list then click on the button Add gt click on his name in the list then drag it into the list of the team operators by keeping the mouse button pressed release the button on the destination A click on the Info button or a double click in the list displays the form of the user selected in the list Team Name of the selected team Click on the arrow of the drop down list to select another team in the list of the teams attached to the current group Team Operators List of the operators belonging to the current team The marked in brackets operators are the relief operators To change an operator to relief or the opposite you can gt either select his name in the list then click on the button Relief 5 18 Configuration gt or double click on this operator in the list To modify the team s order order of call you can gt either select an operator in the list then click on one of the buttons a or B gt or click on an operator in the list then drag it to the wanted position To remove an operator from this list you can gt either select his name in the list then click on the Remove button gt or click on his name in the list then drag him to the exit icon by keeping the mouse button pressed release the
175. f the whole system it is possible to use two computers in redundancy PC s network To perform a full redundancy the Alert software and the supervision software or the communication server with the PLC network must be installed on each of the two computers with the same configuration The two computers supervises a unique database the PLC network can be doubled and are interconnected by a computer network Each of the Alert application supervises its own environment As the PLC data base is the same each computer detects the same alarms In redundant mode only the active computer transmits calls Acknowledgements performed on a computer are automatically transmitted to the other one The determination of the active computer is automatic The two computers supervise themselves reciprocally through the computer network A computer considers itself in active state if there is no fault detected Communication with the supervisor OK and at least a communication system in service If the two computers are active at the same time the computer not declared as main station changes to the inactive state The secondary Station becomes active only when the main station becomes inactive or if it can not supervise this one normally main station or network out of order It is possible to define some supervision tags as specific to one station declared as no redundant tags This allows the definition of events as specific to an environment
176. f variables to supervise Configure communication parameters Display a contextual help de 1 amp amp wis This toolbar can be customized see 7 8 Toolbar customization ALERT User Guide 4 7 User Interface 4 5 Status bars The application displays two status bars An alarm status bar Located at the top of the screen under the toolbar including 3 or 4 textual indicators and LED s indicating the status of the connection with the supervised application and of each of the communication ports gt ALARM indicator at least on alarm is active in the alarm table gt ACQUIT indicator at least a non acknowledged alarm in the alarm table gt FAULT indicator LINK MODEM DEROG ENREG Link failure with the supervised application At least one communication port failed At least one on cal group in derogation state The vocal server is preset to record vocal messages by telephone gt Number of connected clients server station only gt Supervision LED indicates the status of the link with the supervised application gray yellow e green e red connection is not established connection is in progress connection is established and is working normally connection is failed gt Alert LED indicates the working status of the station calls transmitted or not green e red the station is active alarms are processed normally the station is inactive redundant mode an
177. fields set to NULL and at the end of the call e REPORTLOG report log The report log is updated after each report edition creation or modification e REPORTTOPIC list of report topics TopicTexte Topic label Appendix The following tables contain the list of crossed references between the alarms and the consecutive group calls ALRMTOCALLGROUP between the group calls and the associated user calls CALLTOCALLGROUP and the alarms and the associated reports ALARMTOREPORT e ALARMTOCALLGROUP links alarms group calls AlarmToCallGroupld NumAuto Identifier Alarmld Identifier of the alarm event cf ALARMLOG CallGroupld Numeric Identifier of the group call cf CALLGROUPLOG e CALLTOCALLGROUP links user calls group calls e ALARMTOREPORT links alarms reports Alarmld Identifier of the alarm event cf ALARMLOG Reportld Numeric Identifier of the report cf REPORTLOG ALERT User Guide 8 11 Appendix 8 3 3 Database schemas The relations between the different tables of the databases AlarmLog and AlarmDef are described by the following schemas Stationid Stationtane Groupld Groupid m Callsroupid Grouphlane Message Priority Cakroupid Grouphame StationId Teamid TeamMame Call roupld Lkerld UserName UserIndex UserFirstiame Relief Stationld UserMumericId Numberld Profileid Profileld Userid Profileame Languageld Entry Number
178. files on the target station For a transfer by email the files are attached files Changes of name and path are ignored For a transfer made by a synchronization driver Alert Modem Alert Socket Alert Direct the files will be copied in the download directory of the target station This directory is defined on the target station in the parameters of the corresponding synchronization driver Select the files to send by clicking on the Add Files button This action displays a dialog box to browse and select the files to add to the file list To remove files from the list select them in the file list the click on the Remove Files button Validation Transmission Select the transfer direction Send the files are sent to the remote station upload Receive the files are received from the remote station download Clicking on the Send gt gt button exits the dialog box with immediate transfer of the chosen files to the users selected as addressees Clicking on the OK button exits the dialog box with recording of the list of files to transfer with their destination directory for a later transmission ALERT User Guide 6 27 Operation 6 11 Station synchronization To synchronize the configuration of one or several remote stations select the Send a message command from the Operation menu or just click on the button Et the select the tab Stations Call sending Send message File Transfer Stations Station Abin SS
179. fined on the Alarms page of the general options forces the execution of the sound file associated to the on call group attached to the alarm or to first of the attached groups for all the defined alarms regardless of the Play Tone actions possibly defined Sound file This dropdown list designates the sound file to play Click on the Browse button to search and select a sound file or directly type the name of the wanted file with its full path The sound file already selected in actions or associated with the on call groups attached to the tag groups to be called can be directly selected by clicking on the arrow of the dropdown list Button Jest The selected sound file can be played for test by clicking on this button The Play Tone action plays the sound file attached to the called group or designated in the Sound file dropdown list 5 15 8 Play Vocal Message Action definition Action Play Vocal Message Help Sound file or message to synthesize Emergency shutdown Browse alarm message it empty Record Repeated message The Play Vocal Message action plays the vocal message attached to the alarm or designated in the Sound file or message to synthesize dropdown list Note The option Play vocal message defined on the Alarms page of the general options forces the alarm vocal message to be played on the local station for all the defined alarms regardless of the Play vocal message actions possibly defined
180. fines the format to use to display the value of the tag in the tables and views of the main screen and in the transmitted messages Variable value Display format Processing of invalid value MW Invalid value displayed as ERR Display format This format type Excel can contain any alphanumeric character with the following specific treatments display only significant digits non significant zeros are not displayed 0 zero display non significant zeros if a number has less of digits than there is zeros in the format Examples HHH 1234 56 displayed under the form 1 234 6 000 8 9 displayed under the form 8 900 O 631 displayed under the form 0 6 0 12 displayed under the form 12 0 1234 568 displayed under the form 1234 57 0 C 25 displayed under the form 25 0 C 25 678 displayed under the form 25 7 C This format can be entered or selected in the dropdown list among the existing formats already defined Invalid value treatment Check the Invalid value displayed as option to display a specific label for the tags whose value is invalid or uncertain disconnected tag or defect sensor The label to display is defined in the field below This label can be entered or selected in the dropdown list among the existing labels already defined 5 42 Configuration 5 11 2 Event schedule This dialog box called during the configuration of an event see above defines time areas for ev
181. following column can be added Code Numerical code associated with the alarm tag Reference Reference of the alarm tag On call Group Name of the on call group associated with the alarm Intervention statistics The list presents the whole of operators concerned by the selection every line representing an operator on 4 columns Operator Name of the operator Interventions Number of time that the operator intervened during the selected period Mean reaction time Average reaction time of the operator in seconds The reaction time is the time measured between the alarm activation and its acknowledgment Mean intervention time Average intervention time of the operator in seconds The intervention time is the time measured between the alarm acknowledgement and its return to normal state 6 3 4 Global statistics The low part of the screen contains some global statistics concerning the done selection Alarm statistics Fail number Total number of failures alarms on the selected period and for the done selection On the alarm history screen all alarms are counted that the alarm is reset or no On the alarm or intervention statistic screen only reset alarms are counted ALERT User Guide 6 13 Operation Total failure time Addition of all failure times time during which an alarm was active on the selected period and for the done selection in seconds The calculation takes in account only alarms that are reset Mean failure t
182. for team changeover state with a timeout initialized to the default value configured as Maximum delay for team changeover for the group If the scheduled team if it is defined has not clocked before the end of this timeout the ChangeoverStatus variable of the concerned group changes to the state 3 Timeout for team changeover expired with possibility of trigging an alarm List of groups This list displays the groups for which the identified operator designated in the title bar can perform a team changeover begin or end of on call period according to the selection Team changeover End on call e Team changeover The list displays all the candidate groups for which the user designated in the title bar can clock in with the proposed team in brackets The proposed team is either the scheduled on call team if it is not yet active or the next scheduled on call team if the active team is this one that was planned Only the groups having a team to propose and for which the user belongs to the proposed team are displayed e End on call The list displays all the candidate groups for which the user designated in the title bar can clock out with the concerned team in brackets Only the groups for which the user belongs to the active team are displayed Click on the All button to select all the groups proposed for the team changeover Click on the None button to unselect all the groups proposed for the team changeover ALERT
183. g the Display command The comment can also be directly displayed in the Comment column not visible by default 6 3 6 Editing a report about an alarm Note this function is only available when the database export option is validated by the software license Select an alarm in the list or select an alarm subset by using the selections Station On Call Group User and Alarm then click on the Create button Select the wished option creation of report for the selected alarm or for all the alarms of the displayed list Finally type the report text in the report edition dialog box A topic can be selected or defined A voice report can be recorded One or several files can be attached to the report Operation The report attached to an alarm can be read and possibly modified by clicking on the Edit button If several reports are attached to the alarm use the buttons gt and of the report dialog box to browse the different reports The reports about an alarm can be read later from the alarm history or the logbook In the logbook the alarm reports are indicated by a red in the header bar of the report When a report exists for an alarm it is indicated by an asterisk displayed in the R column This column is not visible by default It can be added by clicking in the list with the right button of the mouse then selecting the Display command 6 3 7 Printing To print the displayed list alarm history alar
184. g this interface is updated When the choice none is performed no voice engine is used Button About This button opens a dialog box giving information about the TTS engine attached to the selected voice This button is grayed when there is no interface selected or if the engine attached to the selected voice does not provide this service 7 28 Options Welcome Message The welcome message can be synthesized at every vocal communication from the text entered in this field This text can include sound files that will be directly played and values of tags of the supervision list To insert a sound file click on the button amp sound file select the wanted file then validate The name of the file is inserted in the edit field to the current position of the cursor under the form amp name of file To insert a tag value click on the button amp n variable value select the wanted tag then validate The numeric identifier of the tag is inserted in the edit field to the current position of the cursor under the form amp variable id To listen to the text typed in the field with interpretation of the fields file and variable click on the Listen button Options e Message presynthesization When this option is validated all the messages likely to be synthesized following an alarm alarm messages timestamp number of alarms are presynthesized at launching time e Customized user welcome after ident
185. ge The message to send can be entered under 3 formats e Numeric format message from O to 32 characters destined to operators having a numerical pager The number of entered characters is displayed on the right of the edit field The character set is free The characters not allowed by a type of pager will be filtered out at the time of transmission e Alphanumeric format message from 0 to 512 characters destined to operators having an alphanumeric pager or a printer The number of entered characters is displayed on the right of the edit field The character set is free The characters not allowed by a type of pager will be filtered out at the time of transmission e Audio format vocal message destined to operators who will be reached by telephone The alphanumeric message can contain variable fields To incorporate in the message the value of a tag of the supervision list click on the button El In the displayed dialog box select the wished tag then validate The numerical identifier of the tag is inserted in the edit field at the current cursor position under the form amp tag id To define an audio message click on the Browse button to browse files for a sound file containing a pre recorded audio message or click on the Record button to directly record the audio message The audio file is automatically created with the format name MCxxxx WAV xxxx being a numerical code between 0000 and 9999 The file is record
186. ge processor is activated ALERT User Guide 4 5 User Interface Help menu 7 DDE server Quick start User guide Contextual help Drivers help Technical Support About ALERT 4 6 H 2 DDE Server List of available item for the DDE clients Quick start Display of the quick start guide User guide Display of the application user guide Contextual Help Display of the contextual help screen 1 Drivers help Display of the user guide of drivers Technical Support Display a HTML page which contains information telephone numbers hyperlinks about Technical Support About ALERT Display miscellaneous information version copyright User Interface 4 4 Toolbar The toolbar can contain the following buttons subject to the validation of the corresponding menu commands in the profile of the current user Button Action gt or ix User login logout Consultation of the record of logged user Send a service message to one or several operators ae Consultation and acknowledgment of calls in progress Display group schedules consultation and updating Display alarm tables consultation and acknowledgment SHER ee Display alarm history and statistics Display the event log journal Display the logbook consultation and report edition Team changeover Begin End of on call period Set Reset schedule derogation Mask Unmask alarms Configure on call management users groups teams Configure list o
187. groups belonging to the first level of its sub tree or the list of the whole tags attached to the group and all the groups belonging to its sub tree The choice of the displayed list is done by clicking on the button Er of the browsing bar The synoptic view associated with a group displays the status and the value of the variables assigned to the group see above The Tags selection displays the status and the value of the tags under the same form as in the Tags branch see above This view can be used as staring base for the assignment of the tags to the others defined groups by drag and drop or copy paste operations The order of the tags in the list can be modified To move a tag click on its line with the mouse left button drag it keeping the mouse button pressed over the tag line AFTER which the dragged tag is wished to be moved then release the mouse button ALERT User Guide 4 21 User Interface Tree menu Fa Groups 1 SUING 1 Acknowledgment J Mask i Adda tag On Call Add a group f Use pacte 2 Gra Delete 7 F Rename Properties Add a group Paste Delete Rename Properties Group view menu HE Buildings 2 Om Building Busildinn Open Acknowledgment Mask Delete Rename Properties Delete Rename 4 22 Acknowledgement Acknowledgment of all alarms attached to the selected group and to the groups of its sub tree Mask Maski
188. gt lt LF gt for codes between OOh and 1Fh and by their hexadecimal code between lt gt for codes between 80h and FFhs 7 32 Options When transmitting audio data blocks vocal communication or fax data blocks fax communication data of each transmitted block are symbolized by the label lt DATA gt This option is useful only for diagnostic if a problem appears with the use of a particular communication driver In normal situations it should not be activated ALERT User Guide 7 33 Options 7 34 Appendix 8 APPENDIX 8 1 Vocal server When a vocal telephonic communication is established following an incoming or outgoing call Alert first transmits a welcome message This message can be used to identify the site for the correspondent and to invite him to identify himself It can be cyclically repeated until the identification of the correspondent If there is no welcome message defined a welcome beep is transmitted The welcome message can be recorded in local or by telephone or if the voice synthesis option is installed synthesized from a text If that case the text can include some pre recorded vocal messages and tags of the supervision list see 7 7 2 Vocal Server messages In standard working Alert waits for the 3 or 4 digits operator s code or for the command to switch in terminal mode key The operator code is the one that is displayed in the ID field of the property dialog box
189. gt Alarm ALARM ACK Alarm acknowledgment 18 NORMAL Alarm reset CALL ACK Call acknowledgment 19 EVENT Simple event CALL RECEIVED ncoming call Group call succeeded UNWARNED GROUP Group call failed DEROGATION Schedule derogation20 END DEROGATION lt on call group gt End of schedule derogation System date modified REMOTE LOGIN Login from a remote terminal CONNECT Connection established on a port DISCONNECT End of communication on a port PORT FAILURE Port failure modem LINK FAILURE Link failure NFO Information message OFF DUTY Operator set off duty SUBSTITUTION Operator substituted ALARM MASKED Set of alarm mask ALARM UNMASKED Reset of alarm mask DISACTIVATION Alert management deactivation EE ACTIVATION P Alert management reactivation 4 REMOTE LOGOUT End of remote session ERROR Error ON DUTY Operator set on duty CALL DENIED lt operator gt lt operator gt Call denied negative call acknowledg 2 M CHANGEO Group lt G gt team changeover Team changeover team A to team B lt A gt gt lt B gt lt operator gt in group G 22 max delay lt n gt minutes CHANGEOVER FAILED Group lt G gt team changeover Team changeover failed team A to lt A gt gt lt B gt team B in group G timeout expired gt END ON CALL Group lt G gt team lt E gt End on call time group G team E lt operator gt WARNED GROUP TIME CHANGED TEA VER List of journal events 18 If the acknowledgement is issued from a
190. guration menu or click on the button El On the displayed dialog box select the Programmed Transfers tab On Call Management Ed Users Prograrn Frogrammed Calls Synchro Stations LAGARDE Hans 4 Monday 06 00 Remove Program f 3 Cyclic Call Call cycle f 4 Periodic Call Every Monday at 06 00 Add Files Remove Files f Send C Receive Fie path on remote machine MMT alertstaglst xml CMM alert taglist xml The list on the left top of the dialog box displays the programmed file transfers for the user selected in the Users dropdown list If the selection is all this list displays all the programmed file transfers In this case it is not possible to create a new programmed file transfer Add button is grayed The users proposed are those who have been configured with a number associated with a driver allowing the file transfer Email Alert Modem Alert Socket Alert Direct A programmed file transfer is defined by a line containing gt the name of the user to call gt the call type 3 for cyclic call 4 for periodic call gt the period of the cyclic call or the day and time of the periodic call The files to upload are designated in the transfer list at the bottom of the dialog box The right column describes the full path of the files on the local station The left column gives the name and the path that will have the files on the target station For a transfer by email th
191. h unadvised user ALERT User Guide 5 19 Configuration Team Name The name of the team can be explicitly defined by a name from 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters By default when the option First operator name is checked the name of the team is the name of the operator placed at the head of the list of the operators of the team Color Displays the color selected for the team This color allows the team to be visually identified in the schedules When clicking on the Choose button a color palette is displayed to select a new color for the team Call cycle e Selection of the team management mode gt Call one user for each alarm different for every alarm operator turnover gt Call all active users of the team call broadcasting with management of relief operators according to options below e Definition of the call conditions for relief operators only for call broadcasting gt Call relief if not one of user is advised a relief operator is called when none of the main operators of the team has been successfully reached assures that at less one operator is warned gt Call relief for each unadvised user A relief operator is called every time a team s operator cannot be reached assures that a constant number of operators are warned Button Default This button reinitializes the team management options from the default options defined at the group level 5 20 Configuration 5 5 On call program To c
192. he calling or called operator is attached This code is only needed on main stations which have set a non null length for the station identifier in the vocal server dialog box see 7 7 1 Vocal Server options In the opposite case this field is grayed Call disabled When this option is checked alarm calls issued from the station are disabled ca call performed This state is signalled by a red crossbar on the station icon x Main station Type of the station A main station receives the configurations of the remote stations During the synchronizations the exchanged data are the data attached to the remote Stations This option is displayed only when the Alert stations option is checked in the general options see 7 1 General options and only for the local station first station of the tree in the main screen Display Display options for the remote station in the tree of the main screen gt The Display supervision option validates the display of the Supervision branch in the sub tree attached to the station ALERT User Guide 5 53 Configuration gt The Display on call option validates the display of the On call Management branch in the sub tree attached to the station This choice is only possible on the station of type Alert station Icon Representation of the station in the supervision tree Click on the Modify button to select another representation small and large icon 5 13 D
193. he alarm importance It can be set between O the lowest priority by default and 9999 The priority order can be reversed The priority level is used to transmit alarm messages by order of decreasing importance what allows the most important alarm to be transmitted when only one message can be transmitted by call It also allows the calls concerning the most important alarms to be handled first when several alarms are simultaneously detected It finally allows alarms to be discriminated in 2 categories the important alarms requiring to be handled quickly whatever the time and the less important alarms that will not require an immediate call during periods defined as reduce duty the night for example according to an option the no important alarms can be preserved in order to be treated at the end of the period of reduce duty e An option to mask alarm by another alarm An alarm can be masked by another one in order to avoid an avalanche of alarms in certain circumstances power failure for example A masked alarm will be treated like a simple event without triggering of call e An associated text file option This text file can contain instructions for the alarm treatment or contextual information acquired automatically at the alarm time It can be consulted either locally in the alarm table or at a distance from a remote terminal It can also be transmitted by fax e An acknowledgment condition option An acknowledgment condition
194. he associated subject and sender will be e Alarm message the sender contains the title of the Alert windows ALERT by default the subject can be formatted with fields which are dynamically replaced by their value e Service message the sender is the name of the logged operator the subject contains a configurable text In the case of an email destined to a pager or mobile phone the receiver address specified in the number field associated with the Email driver in the form of the concerned user must contain as header one of the following strings e if the information that designates the end receiver is contained in the email address e lt mobile number gt if the end receiver has to be designated in the email subject with lt mobile number gt designating the mobile address or pager address such as it has to be specified in the email subject In this case only the alarm or service message is transmitted no text file In the number field associated with the Email driver in the form of the concerned user it is possible to precise email CC recipients The format is the following main_recipient copy_recipient1 copy_recipientz2 The email driver can be configured with several Providers Each connection that can be used on the system can be managed by a sub driver of the email driver To configure the parameters of the Email driver select in the Communication dialog box on Drivers tab the line Generic Email o
195. he bottom of the page then validate by OK When the message processor is activated an entry in the Configuration menu give access to its configuration Command Message processor Message Processor Setup Interface l Translations Prototype WESER k Version 3 6 0 0 Interface Parameters Integer ResponseT ime Integer Precision Integer Link Fault String Liaison vesta TestNumber Integer AlarmCreation Bool Script Synchro coed Heo The dialog box for configuration of the message processor allows the definition of prototypes to activate and the configuration of each of these prototypes ALERT User Guide 8 49 Appendix To edit add import or remove a prototype click on the button gt on the right of the drop down list Prototype then in the displayed contextual menu select the corresponding command respectively Edit Add Import or Remove The importation of a prototype consists in selection of the initialization file of the wanted prototype lt prototype gt ini If this file is not located in the current application directory it is automatically recopied with all associated files lt prototype gt prg and lt prototype gt csv During the creation of a prototype the following parameters have to be defined e an identifier short name used as radical for the configuration files initialization script and application data e aname explicit name for designation of the
196. he list see 5 16 2 Command definition Button Edit To modify the parameters of the selected command click on this button see 5 16 2 Command definition Button Delete Click on this button to delete the selected command Button Jest Click on this button to test the selected command Value default The value defined in this field is the value which will be transmitted in all the requests of writing which make the command and for which no value is not explicitly defined This option makes it possible to use generic commands for definition of outputs to control and to parameterize the transmitted value at the time of the action The forced value can contain variable fields that will be updated at the time of event activation or reset or acknowledgment following the selected tab Click on the button El to integrate the value of a supervised tag in the default value transmitted by the command In the displayed dialog box select the wished tag then validate The numerical identifier of the tag is inserted in the edit field at the current cursor position under the form amp tag id 5 15 5 Stop command Action definition Action Stop Command Cancel Help Command to stop Command 1 The Stop command action stops the execution of the command selected in the Command to stop dropdown list Command to stop This dropdown list designates the command to stop Select this command in the list of defined
197. he message Through the software interface the messages and labels are defined in the selected language of the user interface The definition of messages and labels in supplementary languages must be performed by editing the corresponding text file MessList csv for the alarm messages LabelList csv for the labels These files can be edited by Excel CSV format Each line defines the message identified by the numerical code of the first column Each following column contains the message in the language identified by the language code written in the first line of the corresponding column see the table below To create a new language add a new column with the convenient language code on the first line and then translate the messages in every following line 8 14 Appendix 1078 Afrikaans 1081 Hindi 7169 Arabic Tunisia 1041 Japanese Hebrew Language coding table ALERT User Guide 8 15 Appendix 8 5 Remote Control To avoid having to use 2 different modems for the remote surveillance and maintenance of a supervision station Alert gives the possibility to share a communication port with remote control software pcAnyWhere32 versions 7 5 and subsequent Carbon Copy The port shared with the remote control software must be declared in Alert see 7 1 General options This port will be automatically transferred to the remote control software either at the software launching if the remote control software is already
198. he most recent configuration when this option is validated the dates of modification of the synchronized data between the redundant stations are compared to determine the values to keep for the synchronization That option is especially useful during the automatic synchronization at launching when the configuration of each station has been modified on the both stations Alarm synchronization alarms detected on a station are automatically reported to the other station ALERT User Guide 7 21 Options When the supervised application is redundant this option is not necessary insofar as alarms are signaled on each station by their respective instance of the redundant application However that option can increase the efficiency of the redundancy insofar as it gives the possibility to continue to call for alarms from the other station in case of simultaneous failure of links on a station and communication ports on the other station e Acknowledgment synchronization the call and alarm acknowledgments performed on a station are automatically transmitted to the other station When this option is checked the alarm masking and unmasking are also synchronized e Call synchronization the call progression status on the active station is automatically transmitted to the other station e Schedule synchronization any modification of the schedule table of a group is automatically transmitted to the other station e On call management synchronization a
199. he script is a Basic type program which is executed by the message processor and which is designed to extract significant information from the messages and to trig the consequent Alert treatments The script functioning can take in account external setup data lists and translations that are specific to the installation and saved in a text file lt prototype gt csv These external configuration data define the associations to perform between information extracted from 8 48 Appendix the received messages and the parameters of alarms to trig group to call message to send priority If information contained in the messages are rich enough the script can dynamically create the alarms from reported information and defined translations then set or reset them In this case it will not be necessary to declare alarms in Alert excepted if complementary information is needed recorded voice message or text file If information that is contained in messages is not sufficient transmission of just an event identifier for example alarms to treat will have to be prior declared in Alert The script just will have to set and reset the declared alarms following received messages 8 14 2 Configuration By default the message processor is not activated To activate message processor open the Options dialog box menu Configuration command Options then on the General page select the check box Message processor activation on t
200. he topic designated in the field Topic OPC Server Enter the name of the OPC tag or click on the button El on the right of the field to browse the server designated in the filed Server and running on the computer designated in the field Computerthen select a tag Driver Select in the dropdown list one of the tags proposed by the driver designated in the field Driver for the subset designated in the field Topic Other Enter the name of the tag as it will be referred to by the external application or the mediator in the alarm commands ALERT User Guide 5 33 Configuration 5 11 Tag properties This dialog box defines the main properties of the supervised tags It can be called from the configuration of supervision list by clicking on the Add button or the Modify button in the dialog box displaying the variable list see 5 9 List of tags to supervise It also can be called from the contextual menu associated with the branch Variables in the screen of the main screen see 4 6 1 4 Tags Tag parameters Excel feuil ILIC OID 25 Type C Variable Event Acknowledg Not redundant Station Value Cancel Group Buildings Building E El Help Event CCE OPC Polling Condition NOTEGUAL 0 DE Perodic Request 6 Transitom Reactivable Schedule E Link Link failure if tag value is not valid es f No f Default Alarm Ack Mask i Alarm enabled Alarm ma
201. ialog box called during the configuration of an event see above defines the conditions of the acknowledgment of an alarm by DDE or OPC It also defines the auto acknowledgment properties of the alarm Alarm Acknowledgment Reference of alarm item Excell Test xle 4larns L101 Acknowledgment condition NOT EQUAL 0 OF Lok Cancel Sa Help Reference of acknowlegment item Excell T est xls AlarmslL2C2 EI Options Alarm acknowledgment on alarm reset Ces C No Default Alarm acknowledgment on group waned C Yes No Default Reference of alarm item This field displays the reference of the event which one wishes to define acknowledgment conditions Acknowledgment condition The acknowledgment condition is the state which indicates that the alarm is acknowledged in the external application This condition can be logical logical state represented by a name mask of a logical state of the tag or analogical Comparison with a value in equality threshold condition 5 44 Configuration To define an acknowledgment condition in reference to a X value the following operators can be used NONE oOo No acknowledgement condition is defined by default NOT EQUAL Acknowledgement if value is not equal to X EQUAL Acknowledgement if value is equal to X Acknowledgement if value is higher than X The state of a bit is defined by the corresponding bit in the value X converted in hexadecimal Example
202. ic Background Blocked Updates Intelligen Drivers Distributed Transaction Running Processes p E F P t fa Event viewer Local COM Event ComEvents ComEvents Command line CustReg Class ey Services Local System Trigger Co Defrag FAT Defrag NTFS Event Object Event Object engine engine Change Change 2 Click with the mouse right button on the Alert icon the select the Property command in the contextual menu On the displayed dialog box select the Identity tab ALERT User Guide 8 17 Appendix Alert Properties General Location Security Endpoints Identity Which user account do pou want to use to run this application C The interactive user f The launching user f This user User MPC Administrator Browse Password CRE EEE Er TETE Confirm password Enter the name and password of the Alert executing user In the previous example it is the Administrator CAUTION The choice of the user restricts the OPC server use As a matter of fact in normal mode not as service the Alert OPC server can only be used by the Alert running user In such a case you can always use the OPC client if the OPC server is deactivated See 7 2 Supervision options button OPC setup uncheck the box OPC server activated When running as service the OPC server is fully operating Before starting service Alert configuration When Alert is st
203. icking on the Registration button A new dialog box then is displayed asking for an installation code This code is dedicated to the software and depends on the PC s environment on which it is installed The operator must note the environment code of its PC then call its supplier to get the corresponding installation code After the installation of the software with the adequate installation code the next application launching won t generate anymore the message box concerning the dongle and the About dialog box This is true only if the PC s environment is not modified change of motherboard change of disk Windows reinstallation Note AlertClient software can be freely installed on any station of the network It does not need any software or hardware key ALERT User Guide 3 3 Installation 3 4 User Interface 4 USER INTERFACE 4 1 Login 4 1 1 Standard or Server Station To have access to services provided by the application the operator has to log on to Alert To do so at the starting of the application or when the application has been freed by a previous operator you only have to select the Login command from the File menu or simply to click on the button A dialog box requires the operator to identify himself by his name and his access code This one must enter his name always forced in capitals followed by his first name that can be shorted The access code of the operator must be supplied if it ex
204. ification When this option is validated the operator is welcomed verbally after having identified Hello Peter Henry e Alarm number notification When this option is validated the total number of alarms concerning the called or calling operator is vocalized before playing the alarm messages after the connection or on operator request by the key 0 e Vocal time stamping of alarm message When this option is validated the alarm message is synthesized with the hour of alarm detection vocalized before At 8h30 Voice synthesis parameters The Voice dropdown list selects the voice to use The list of available voices depends on the selected TTS interface When the voice is modified the voice synthesis engine is immediately reset with the new voice The cursors can be used to adjust the voice synthesis gt Rate defines the elocution speed of the synthesis gt Pitch defines the tonality of the voice generated low high value or high low value gt Volume defines the sound level of the message generated The Advanced button gives access to the configuration of the advanced parameters of the TTS engine attached to the selected voice This button is grayed when there is no interface selected or if the engine attached to the selected voice does not provide this service ALERT User Guide 7 29 Options 7 7 4 Usage of the vocal server The Usage page of the Vocal Server dialog box defines the keys telephonic ke
205. ignal that the team that was scheduled begins it on call period After declaration of the operator who clock in the team becomes active icon S e End of on call period only for the scheduled active team meaning that the team as ended its on call time After identification of the operator who clock out the team becomes inactive icon e Forcing of the active team corresponding to a derogation of the group with redirection of the calls to the forced team without time limitation see 6 14 Schedule derogation Call locking The forced team becomes active icon 5 the possible old active team being automatically deactivated The same command on a forced team command On call forced checked in the contextual menu ends the forcing Tree menu BE Maintenance Call Call of the active not relief operators of Se GONTRAN Klaus the team see 6 9 Sending a message PTE On call forced Begin End of the redirection of calls amp A On call forced derogation to the forced team see 6 14 dE End on call Schedule derogation Call locking E Fire Team changeover Start of on call time clock in The name of fpa dau the operator performing the team 85 L changeover is asked for confirmation see AP P Delete 6 13 Team changeover This command AFH Rename is only proposed for the teams that are aes scheduled on the next period ropertes End on call End of the on call period only for active t
206. ime Average of all failure times time during which an alarm was active on the selected period and for the done selection in seconds The calculation takes in account only alarms that are reset Intervention statistics Intervention number Number of interventions done by selected operators on the selected period and for alarms corresponding to the done selection Mean reaction time Average reaction time of selected operators on the selected period and for alarms corresponding to the done selection in seconds The reaction time is the time measured between the alarm activation and its acknowledgment Mean intervention time Average intervention time of selected operators on the selected period and for alarms corresponding to the done selection in seconds The intervention time is the time measured between the alarm acknowledgement and its return to normal state 6 3 5 Editing a comment about an alarm Note this function is only available when the database export option is validated by the software license Select an alarm in the list then click on the Comment button In the displayed dialog box type the text of the wanted comment The same command allows an alarm comment to be read and possibly modified When a comment exists for an alarm it is indicated by an asterisk displayed in the C column This column is not visible by default It can be added by clicking in the list with the right button of the mouse then selectin
207. in the edit field Syntax The format can contain some invariant parts reproduced as they are and some variable parts that make reference to parameters of the alarm by using the following syntax amp M This field will be replaced by the alohanumeric message of the tag amp R This field will be replaced by the reference of the tag amp O This field will be replaced by the unique numeric identifier of the tag Oid amp C This field will be replaced by the numeric code of the tag amp S This field will be replaced by the current value of the station name amp P This field will be replaced by the value of the alarm priority ALERT User Guide 5 49 Configuration amp G This field will be replaced by the name of the alarm group associated with the tag amp A This field will be replaced by the name of the call group associated with the tag amp V This field will be replaced by the value of the tag at the event time amp V This field will be replaced by the current value of the tag amp L This field will be replaced by the current value of the station name only if the Station is not the local station amp U This field will be replaced by the name of the user who acknowledged the alarm amp D This field will be replaced by the date and time of the alarm with the format MM DD YY HH MM SS amp ref This field will be replaced by the value of the tag referenced by ref reference in the supervision list at the event ti
208. ing Installation 3 INSTALLATION 3 1 Required configuration The Alert software requires the Windows 32 bits environment Windows 98 Windows NT Window 2000 or Windows XP The required hardware configuration is the one recommended for the used environment If this software is running with other applications and uses a lot of multimedia functionalities it is worth better to provide with a well dimensioned hardware configuration e Screen and Super VGA board 800x600 higher resolution advisable 1024x768 or more e 64 MB of memory available for Alert e Hard disk with 500 MB minimum storage of audio files boards 2 GB with Text To Speech e A sound card with loudspeaker and microphone not necessary but recommended To call operators it is necessary to add the appropriate hardware in accordance with the used media s e For the call directed to a local in site paging system a simple serial link is sufficient e For the call directed to paging servers Hayes modems mode are needed e For the vocal communications it is necessary to use vocal modems The Alert software can also work on a network and communicate with applications located on other stations In this case a network card has to be plugged ALERT User Guide 3 1 Installation 3 2 Software installation 3 2 1 Standard or Server Station To install the Alert software execute the INSTALL EXE program which is located on the installation CDROM then foll
209. ion These parameters define options for the identification of the called or calling operator Identification before playing messages When this option is checked the called or calling operator must identify himself with his identification code ID of the user file to be able to listen to messages which are intended to him This option is validated by default If this option is not checked all the alarm messages unacknowledged or active alarms are transmitted after the welcome message The operator has the choice to identify himself to acknowledge the call If the operator does not enter his ID code the call is considered as failed Correspondent authentication This authentication means the user access code 0 to 4 digits is required during voice communications after user identification Explicit call acknowledgment When this option is checked the call has to be explicitly acknowledged or refused by the called operator or calling operator for received messages to acknowledge Key 3 to accept the call call acknowledgment Key 9 to refuse the call and ask for its reiteration to a relief operator Number of identification attempts 3 by default This number defines the maximum number of attempts authorized for the entry of the identifier code ID code or the password when accessing by telephone When the called or calling user exhausted his number of attempts without having entered a valid code the telephone line is automa
210. ion of the application ALERT User Guide 7 31 Options 7 9 Communication log By clicking on the Monitor button of the Communication dialog box one can control in real time the data exchanged on a specific communication port on a line monitor screen Line Monitor COM1 4 Aun Clear On the monitor line screen the transmitted frames are displayed in red the received frames are displayed in green The frames can be displayed in ASCII or hexadecimal The time between 2 consecutive frames is displayed on the left in milliseconds The Communication log option of the Communication dialog box enables to record ina file the data transmitted and received on a port during a communication The name of the record file has the form PORTx LOG x being the number of the concerned port This file is recorded in the directory of the application and reset for each communication When a call doesn t succeed the record file is saved with a name of the form PORTx_n LOG x being the number of port concerned and n a number of O to 9 automatically incremented for each new file When there are more 10 files of fail recording oldest is replaced by the new The recording format is S xxxxx lt CR gt lt LF gt for the character strings xxxxx transmitted R xxxxx lt CR gt lt LF gt for the character strings xxxxx received The non displayable characters are represented by their mnemonic code between characters lt gt lt CR
211. ion of the calls to a team Tree menu ff On Call Management Program Configuration of the weekly on call i Users programs see 5 5 On call program 2 GEES Add a group Creation of a new on call group see JE Program 5 3 1 On call group properties Add a group Configuration Configuration of the group list see 5 3 a On call groups Configuration Associated view menu Open Open the list of the teams or of the operators of the selected group ong E od Call Call of the active team in every selected Fire group see 6 9 Sending a message Open Call locked Locking Unlocking of the calls of the Call group see 6 14 Schedule derogation Calls locked Call locking abi sg Program Configuration of the weekly on call Rename program of the selected group see 5 5 Delete On call program Properties Rename Change the name of the group Delete Deletion of the selected groups After confirmation the selected groups and their teams are definitively deleted The operators assigned to the deleted group are not deleted 4 26 User Interface Properties Edition of the properties of the selected group see 5 3 1 On call group properties The synoptic view associated with each group branch displays either the list of teams of the group or the list of all the operators assigned to the group The choice of the displayed list is done by clicking on the button lr
212. ion of the tag properties see 5 11 Tag properties 9 This command is available only for the tags in alarm 10 This command is available only when the option Database export is validated see 7 1 General options ALERT User Guide 4 23 User Interface 4 6 1 7 On call Management The On Call Management branch presents in its sub tree all the information relative to the on call management of the parent station with 2 main branches a Users branch which contains the list of all the users attached to the station and a Groups branch which contains the list of the defined on call groups with their teams Tree menu f f On Call Management Configuration Configuration of the on call management Je Configuration see 5 3 On call groups 28 Groups Associated view menu Ri On Call Management Open According to the selected icon open the list of the users or of the on call groups a Configuration According to the selected icon a configuration of the user list see 5 1 Open User list or of the on call groups see Care 8 5 3 On call groups 4 6 1 8 Users The Users branch displays in its associated synoptic view the whole users assigned to the parent station In this view each user is represented by an icon The off duty users are signaled by the overlapped symbol amp The duty status of a user or of a group of users can be switched by using the Off duty command i
213. ionning The definition of stations allows subsets of tags and operators to be treated separately with all associated information on call schedules alarm table alarm history event log According to the architecture of the application one can choose one of the two following modes of management gt Alert stations the definite stations are attached to real remote stations equipped with the Alert software and dealing autonomously with their data and alarm management in synchronization with the main station gt Virtual stations the definite stations are virtually attached to specific entities sites companies but all the treatments data acquisition calls are performed on the same computer e Functional groups The tags can be organized following a hierarchical structure of groups e g countries cities buildings machines functions applications etc each group can itself contain a sub tree structure of groups buildings in cities in countries for example This organization allows the synoptic visualization of subsets of the application as well as treatments by group in the working screens acknowledgment of all alarms of a group Statistics by groups etc A tag can belong to several groups For each tag one can select a basic group who allows specific treatments vocal message of identification of the group in alarms grouping of message etc e Apolling mode DDE or OPC variables only DDE or OPC variable
214. ions 7 2 2 1 Alias definition Alias Definition UK 0 Topic Alias Alias MAMAESTROB321 SIEM Help gt Server Topic Cancel AMALTISKB SLF Nes Defined Topics Attached Topics Ea gt lt lt Option Server Alias Association of an alias name with a DDE server name and definition of a list of attached topics Option Topic Alias Association of an alias name with a DDE topic name Alias This field contains the name of the defined alias Server Topic This field contains the name of the DDE server or DDE topic according to the above selection referenced by the alias name Defined Topics This list displays the topic aliases that have been defined Attached Topics This list displays the topic alias attached to the defined server alias name This list is only valid when the defined alias is a server alias The list of topic alias attached to a server allows the topic list to be predefined when the server alias is selected during the definition of a DDE reference Button This button adds the topic alias defined in the Alias field to the Topic list Button gt gt This button adds the topic selected in the Topic list to the Attached Topic list Button lt lt This button deletes the topic selected in the Attached Topic list ALERT User Guide 7 11 Options 7 3 Display options To configure the display options select the Options command of the Configuration menu then on the display
215. iority groups and to process directly modifications of these variables alarm activation or deactivation acknowledgment from the application or from ALERT It can also allow to realize specific processing capture in a text file of contextual information attached to an event dynamic modification of priority level etc ALERT User Guide 1 1 Introduction Alert is at the same time an alarm manager and an on call server that proposes the following basic services management of users who are called to intervene either locally or at a distance management of groups every group possessing its own schedule detection of alarms and trig of calls to the concerned operators diffusion of alarm or service messages either numerical alphanumeric or vocal management of call and alarm acknowledgments management of alarm history including daily weekly or monthly statistics on failures and interventions management of an event log and a on line printed report management of intervention reports With Alert the client applications don t have to worry of to choose the operators to call and of the means required to alert them They can only give the order of triggering a call cycle explicitly by a control or implicitly by positioning a variable in an alarm state The selection of the operators to call and the alarm messages transmitted will effectively depend on the software configuration Alert can be used according to 3 modes Clie
216. is only accessible for operators of System class Level 2 Definition of User Profile Class Marne Operation OF Acces Level Ce oy Cancel MW Access to all stations i Access to all groups Main Menu Menu entries i On call management SUDErvISIOr Message processor User profiles iv Communication Default Vocal server Screens Authorized functions On call schedule Schedule modification Alarm table Schedule initialization program Alarm history abe Event log Tearn modification Logbook iw Call of On call team Mask of alarms IM Schedule printing Control of call progress Control of links Supervision configuration Cie oll ee bi ee eee e Class Name By default 3 basic classes are defined each associated with an access level gt Operation level 0 the operator has access only to operation of the application no configuration He cannot close the application gt Control level 1 the operator has access to the configuration of exploitation alarms on call schedule but he can t configure the user file nor parameter the basic environment options vocal server ports drivers gt System level 2 maximal level access to all functions of the application The class without user corresponds to the configuration of the application when there is no logged operator It authorizes or not the visualization of certain operating screen
217. ists When the station management mode is defined as Virtual stations see 7 1 General options or in the opposite case Alert stations if the local station fist station is defined as Main Station a dropdown list Station allows the selection of the station to display In the case of Alert stations only the synchronizable stations stations defined with a user having the name of the station and associated with a communication driver of type ALERT are proposed in the list The choice all gives access to the data of all stations If a station is selected the name of the selected station is displayed in the status bar on the bottom of the main window and only the data of this station will be accessible configuration data for on call management and supervision on call schedule alarm table alarm history and event log It is possible to change the selected station later in the display options see 7 3 If the name and the access code are recognized the application is opened for the operator in question and offers to him all services authorized for his user profile Note 1 At the first start of the application and so long as no operator has been configured the operator must identify himself with the temporary name ALERT This access has the higher level system profile and allows the configuration of the user file Note 2 It is possible to authorize a working mode said without login see the login
218. ition Action Ok Execute Script Cancel Help Script to execute Alarm The Execute script action executes the message processor script selected in the Script to execute dropdown list Script to execute This dropdown list designates the treatment of the Message Processor that will be triggered every time the event is set or reset or acknowledged following the selected tab This treatment can be used to parse the event and consecutively activate alarms or to trig actions in response to the event Only the Message Processor prototypes that are defined with the Alarm interface are proposed in the list The associated scripts are started at the software launching time and have to block themselves for waiting the event instruction RECEIVEALARM 5 15 4 Execute command Action definition Execute Command Cancel Help Command to execute Command Edit Value default Add Delete s n Tag alue El ET tab __ Delete The Execute command action executes the command selected in the Command to execute dropdown list with option of forcing the written value Command to execute This dropdown list designates the command to execute Select this command in the list of defined commands by clicking on the arrow of the dropdown list ALERT User Guide 5 59 Configuration Button Add If the wished command does not exist in the list click on this button to create a new command and add it to t
219. k by launching from the client station the AlertClient exe program which is located in the ClientSetup subdirectory of the Alert installation directory on the server station 3 2 Installation The Micromedia group is automatically created and the AlertClient icon is added to this group 3 3 Access key 3 3 1 Hardware key At the first launching of the Alert software if the hardware key dongle associated to the software is plugged on a parallel port of the PC an installation code is required This code which depends on the serial number registered in the key and the ordered software options is written on the registration card After this code has been entered the software is automatically registered with the corresponding options It will not be required later It will be later always possible to modify the installation options by entering a new installation code in the registration dialog box called from the About dialog box 3 3 2 Software key If the hardware key dongle is not plugged at the software launching a dialog box signals that the dongle is not detected If the operator clicks on the button Ignore the About dialog box is displayed It indicates that the software is not registered and that it will only function in demonstration mode for 60 minutes It is possible at that time or later by selecting again the About dialog box to register the software in order to use it without dongle by cl
220. k on the Setup button to select and configure the printer 5 88 Configuration 5 22 Saving Restoring configuration 5 22 1 Saving a configuration The Save As command of the File menu is used to save the whole configuration in a subdirectory of the basic directory KE Configuration Hame Gemenos T Selection Audio and v Instruction fles W Alarm history W Event log W Report log Main path Browse CMMI Sert Configuration name In order to save the current configuration type a name in the edit field above the list 32 characters maximum or select an existing name in the list to replace a saved configuration If the name did not exist a subdirectory is created with this name in the selected basic directory Selection When saving a configuration one can include or exclude some parts of the configuration and recorded operational data gt Audio instruction files Wave files and text files attached to the tags of the supervision list gt Alarm history Save the alarm history gt Eventlog Save the event logs gt Reportlog Save reports recorded in the logbook Main path Name of the basic directory in which the configurations will be saved By default it is the basic directory of the Alert application This directory can be chosen on a computer of the network Click on the Browse button to select another basic directory ALERT User Guide 5 89 Configuration The default b
221. k on this button to remove from the sequence the external reference or timer selected in the list Associated value When an external reference is selected in the list this field defines the value to write in the variable or output designated by the selected external reference This value can be any numerical or alphanumeric string It can include tab chars but they have to be coded under the form amp T If this field is empty the written value will be the default value which is defined when selecting the command in an action of type Execute Command The value to write must be validated by clicking on the Apply button The value to write can contain variable fields that will be updated at the time of the command execution To integrate the content of a supervised tag click on the button E In the displayed dialog box select the desired tag then validate The numerical identifier of the tag is inserted in the edit field at the current cursor position under the form amp tag id 5 66 Configuration 5 17 Communication ports To configure the communication ports select the Communication command in the Configuration menu or click on the button E On the displayed dialog box select the Port tab Communication Ports Dialing Drivers Modem ready LAPIPORT 1 Closed SOCKETT Email Closed SOCKET2 Genenc Alcatel Closed lt Add Properties Monitor Communication log Ok Cancel Help
222. ked default option the selected groups remain indefinitely in derogation state until an explicit command to end the derogation e If the Next duty change option is checked the selected groups remain in derogation state until the next team changeover e If the Limit date amp time option is checked the selected groups remain in derogation State until the date and time defined in the adjacent field When at least a group is in derogation state the DEROG indication is displayed in the fault indicator of the alarm status bar ALERT User Guide 6 33 Operation The changes of derogation state are recorded in the event log 6 15 Masked alarms To mask or unmask alarms or to visualize the list of masked alarms select the Alarm Mask Unmask command of the Operation menu or click on the button ES Note an alarm or a group of alarms also can be masked and unmasked from any of the tag views associated with the branches of the supervision tree in the main screen see 4 6 1 4 Tags M Masked Alarms BuildingsBuilding 6 Start Force condenser TGBT 2 ALERT 07291446 O29 15 00 This dialog box contains the list of alarms that are currently masked List of masked alarms Each line of the list displays a masked alarm on 5 columns by default Group Functional group of the alarm Message Alarm message associated with the event Locked by Name of the operator who masked the alarm indicates a mask command perfor
223. lable to transmit calls Status of the link with supervised application 0 Link not established 1 Connection in progress 2 Link established 3 Link failure Appendix e REDUNDANCYSTATUS Status of redundancy 0 Redundancy not initialized 1 Redundancy test in progress 2 Redundancy OK 3 Redundancy failure e COMi MODEMi CAPIPORTi SOCKETi Status of the communication port i O Port closed Port in failure Initialization in progress Modem ready or communication established direct link Call in progress incoming or outgoing call Connected in data mode Terminal Connected in fax or voice mode Disconnection in progress 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 e WATCHDOGCOUNTER Actual value of the watch dog counter This value is incremented every second and varies between O and the maximum value which is defined in the watch dog parameters see 7 2 Supervision options gt COMMAND Command for execution of procedures by poke See 8 13 Command interface DDE or Command line gt REPORT Report for command interpretation See 8 13 Command interface DDE or Command line gt TRACE Trace of events logins calls acknowledgments under the form Event code lt Tab gt Parameters See table at 7 2 Supervision options for the event coding ALERT User Guide 8 33 Appendix 8 12 3 USER topic The USER topic contains in addition to the DDE protocol items some items concerning operators
224. lar event that requires a human intervention An alarm is recorded in the alarm table and must be acknowledged It is signaled by a red indicator ALARM on the alarm status bar An alarm can trigger the call of concerned operators with procedure of resumption and relief in case of failure An acknowledgment to transmit an acknowledgment request either from the supervised application or from an external system Every variable has the following attributes An identifier This identifier can be a simple name or the reference of the DDE or OPC link with the tag of the supervised application A DDE reference always contains the name of the server application service name the name of the rubric topic name which contains the tag and the designation of the tag item name The DDE link is therefore defined by a triplet service topic item An OPC reference contains the name of the OPC server application and the reference of the tag within the server under the form server variable The name of the DDE server or DDE topic can be replaced by an alias This feature allows different tags to be referenced by using the same name redundant configurations or the link with a tag to be modified without having to change the Alert database A Station The station attribute defines a subset of the application of on call management corresponding to a specific entity geographical site or organizational company trade ALERT User Guide 2 1 Funct
225. larm table and therefore the transmission order of messages the most important alarms being at the head as well as the order of the calls when several alarms are detected simultaneously The priority level also conditions the call processing If the priority level is lower than the minimal level defined in the alarm options see 7 4 Alarm options for reduced duty period and if the attached on call group is in a reduced duty period when the event is detected the call will be delayed until the end of this period unless alarm is acknowledged meanwhile The priority level can be defined between 0 and 9999 By default 0 is the lowest priority However the priority order can be reversed in the general alarm options e The field Alarm masked by defines an alarm tag which will automatically mask the alarm defined in the dialog box when it will be in alarm state alarm option or in normal state normal option When the Alarm option is checked the alarm defined in the dialog box will be automatically masked if the tag referenced in the edit field is in alarm state This avoid alarm avalanche in certain circumstances power failure for example The alarm masked by an active alarm is processed as a simple event only recorded in event log When the Normal option is checked the alarm defined in the dialog box will be activated only when the tag referenced in the edit field is in alarm state alarm masked by normal state
226. larms can be exported in a file or in the clipboard To perform this operation click in the list with the right button of the mouse then select the Export command in the displayed contextual menu In the displayed dialog box choose columns to export the export format header separator and the destination file or clipboard 6 15 1 Masking Unmasking alarms Masking and Unmasking of alarms can be performed by using the command Alarm masked in the contextual menu associated with the tag views of the main screen see 4 6 1 4 Tags The list of masked alarms can be displayed by selecting the Alarm Mask Unmask command of the Operation menu or clicking on the button at See above Alarm masking Lirit date amp time 0K a ok 2907 2004 18 00 Lancel Help Comment Maintenance operation on PLC Limit date amp time Define here the limit date and time of the mask At the end of this time the alarm will be automatically unmasked The choice no limit indicates that the alarm is masked without time limit It will be masked until a user comes to explicitly unmask it Comment Write in this field the comment about the masking action of the alarm or any other information concerning the masking action 6 36 Operation 6 16 Control of DDE and OPC links To control the state of the connections established with the DDE or OPC server applications select the Links command from the File menu
227. launched at that moment and have reserved the port or on an explicit demand of a remote operator If the remote control software is not active it is possible to automatically start a remote control session from a remote station The procedure to apply is the following 1 Call Alert from a telephonic handset After having entered your ID you will have to type 2 times on the key 9 of the telephonic keypad If the command is accepted authorized user an acknowledgment message is emitted If the command is denied a message as command denied is emitted Hang up When the line is available Alert releases the communication port that was used then launches the remote control software This last have before to be setup to run as Host PC on a modem connection using the modem in question 2 Wait some seconds then from the remote control software of the remote PC call Alert at the same dial number The remote control session start normally 3 At the end of the session close the remote control software on the remote Alert automatically detects the end of session closes the remote control software on the host PC then retrieves the communication port If an alarm is detected during a remote control session that requires the usage of the communication port affected to the remote control the remote operator is warned by a screen message If the option Priority to alarms is validated see 7 1 General options the message displays
228. lected in the view then copied in the clipboard using a XML format Copy command of the contextual menu These users can after be pasted in various groups and teams The order of the users in the list can be modified To move a user click with the mouse left button on its icon or on its line in the list drag it Keeping the mouse button pressed over the user line AFTER which the dragged user is wished to be moved then release the mouse button Tree menu ff On Call Management Add a user Creation of a new operator see 5 1 1 ie User properties 8 Adda user Paste Add an operator or a group of operators ee prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the user list of the station or another Configuration station Configuration Configuration of the user list see 5 1 User list Associated view menu Users 14 Call Call of the selected operators see 6 9 Tm Sending a message Off duty Switch the selected operators to Off amp Call duty On duty e Pe Substituted by Switch the selected operators to Off a an ii duty with designation of a substitute see a ee 6 8 Definition of substitutes a Add a user Add a user Creation of a new operator see 5 1 1 A User properties A a C Copy th ties of the selected a Delete opy opy the properties of the selecte operators to the clipboard XML format 5 Properties for later paste in groups and teams
229. lected operators to the clipboard XML format for later paste in groups and teams Assignment to the team of the operators prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the user list a group or another team The assigned operators are automatically added to the parent group User Guide 4 31 User Interface Delete Properties 4 32 Deletion of the selected operators The operators are only removed from the team They remain defined in the user list and assigned to the parent group Edition of the properties of the selected operator see 8 5 1 1 User properties User Interface 4 7 Browsing bar The browsing bar located above the synoptic view of the topographical screen allows the customization of the display and a quick browsing through the various views This bar contains the following buttons Button Action Display Hide the tree window on the left of the screen Display Hide the tabbed application window Return to the previous views go back Return on the return to the previous views go forward FL EI Go to the upper level in the tree Display selection for the synoptic view according to the selected view in the tree For all views BE Large icons Selection of a synoptic view as a map of icons o format 32x32 pixels Small icons Selection of a synoptic view as a map of icons List VIEW format 1 6x1 6 pixels Report view List view Selection of a synoptic view as a list of
230. ledgment on alarm reset When this option is selected choice Yes the alarm will be automatically acknowledged when the alarm condition disappears event reset The choice Default means that the option value is defined by the general option for automatic acknowledgment on event reset defined in alarm options see 7 4 Alarm options Alarm acknowledgment on group warned When this option is selected choice Yes the alarm will be automatically acknowledged when the associated on call group or the first group if several groups are called was informed successfully The choice Default means that the option value is defined by the general option for automatic acknowledgment on group warned defined in alarm options see 7 4 Alarm options 5 46 Configuration 5 11 4 Properties of alarm masking This dialog box called during the configuration of an event see above defines the conditions of the masking of an alarm by DDE or OPC Alarm Masking Reference of alarm item Excell Test xle 4larns L101 Masking condition NOT EQUAL E OK Cancel Help Reference of masking tem Excell T est xls 4larms L2C3 El Reference of alarm item This field displays the reference of the event which one wishes to define masking conditions Masking condition The masking condition is the state which indicates that the alarm is masked in the external application This condition can be logical logical state rep
231. lephone communication without any action of the operator key stroke After this time the communication is automatically aborted The timeout avoids an unlimited communication in case of deficiency of the modem watchdog or if the busy tone cannot be detected The value 0 suppresses all limitation e Maximum record duration This value defines the maximum duration of a telephone recording After this time the recording is automatically stopped The value 0 suppresses all limitation ALERT User Guide 7 25 Options 7 7 2 Vocal Server messages The Message page of the Vocal Server dialog box defines the messages used by the vocal server and the vocal messages associated with tag groups Vocal Server Options Voice synthesis Welcome Message f Sound File C Voice Synthesis Listen Browse Record Automatic play of vocal guide after messages Listen Browse Record Default Alarm Message Listen Browse Record Uther Messages NOALARM Waly Listen Browse Record Alarm Group Messages Vocal Guide Buildings Building gt Fr ced in we Welcome message The welcome message is played at the beginning of a telephone communication to invite the user to identify himself When the voice synthesis option is installed the welcome message can be either recorded or synthesized from a text message Text To Speech following the choused option e Sound File th
232. les for example ALERT User Guide 8 5 Appendix 8 3 External database exportation In order to extend the capabilities of the statistical treatment of alarms and calls the application configuration and the alarm history the call history group and user calls and the report log can be automatically exported to an external database To set this functionality operational the database export option has to be authorized by the software license and the Database export activation option must be checked in the general option dialog box see 7 1 General options The exported data can be dispatched into 2 distinct databases one for the storage of the ALERT configuration and one for the history storage The link with these databases is defined by the data link files AlertDB_AlarmDef udl configuration database and AlertDB_AlarmLog udl history database A unique database can also be used to store the whole configuration and history data To modify a link with a database open the concerned file with the data source editor by double clicking on the file name then modify the wished parameters The tables in the databases are automatically created at the application launching 8 3 1 Configuration database The configuration database contains al the configuration data that are useful for the utilization of history data It is automatically updated after each modification of the corresponding configuration data By default
233. level lower than this value its activation during a reduced duty period for the concerned group will not induce an immediate call This call will be delayed until the end of the reduced duty period except if the alarm has been acknowledged meanwhile e Timeout before restarting a new cycle after fail This parameter defines the waited timeout in minutes at the end of a call cycle when this cycle did not succeed including the call of relief operators to restart the cycle If meanwhile the on call team changed the call will be performed to the new team By default this time is 5 minutes If this time is null there is not resumption of the cycle in case of failure except at the end of the acknowledgment timeout if it is not null Team Management This group defines the default options for the management of the teams e Selection of the team management mode gt Call one user for each alarm different for every alarm operator turnover gt Call all active users of the team call broadcasting with management of relief operators according to options below e Definition of the call conditions for relief operators only for call broadcasting gt Call relief if not one of user is advised a relief operator is called when none of the main operators of the team has been successfully reached assures that at less one operator is warned gt Call relief for each unadvised user a relief operator is called every time a team s operato
234. lf when he locally logs on to Alert or during the telephonic communications The user class or user profile defines the work environment of the operator It can be easily configured and defines the menu and toolbar to display the accessible screens and the authorized commands on each of these screens Three basic classes are defined each class being associated with an access level between 0 and 2 characterized by the following features e Operation level 0 The operator does not have access to the configuration of the application and cannot close the application e Control level 7 The operator has access to the configuration of most parameters alarms schedules except the configuration of user parameters user profiles and user database and environment parameters e System level 2 Maximal level the operator has access to all functions of the application The off duty option allows an operator to be temporarily removed from the calling procedure without having to modify the schedule tables An operator can be set on off duty selectively for each of the on call groups he is belonging to That option can be set or reset from an external application When an operator is set off duty another operator can substitute him in each group he his belonging to The substitute has in charge his duty and those concerning the off duty operator A list of call numbers can be configured Each call number is defined by the type of medi
235. lick on the Listen button to listen to the message associated with the selected group Click on the Browse button to browse files for a sound file containing a prerecorded audio message Click on the Record button to record a new message or edit the message associated with the selected group The recorded sound file is stored in the subdirectory MESSAGE ALERT User Guide 7 27 Options under the form of a wave file whose name is affected automatically with the MGxxxx WAV format xxxx being a numeric code between 0000 and 9999 7 7 3 Voice synthesis The Voice synthesis page of the Vocal Server dialog box defines the parameters of the voice synthesis The tab to select this page is only displayed when the voice synthesis option is installed Vocal Server a Ed Usage Options Messages Interface SAFI Welcome Message ES J amp n tag value Bi ff sound file Options Message presynthesization Customized user welcome after identification Alarm number notification Vocal time stamping of alarm messages Voice synthesis parameters Advanced Voice Jane okHz en gb L amp H Speech RealSpeak Rate 1391 4 Pitch 3403 Volume 10000 ced in toe Interface This dropdown list selects the Text To Speech interface to use When a TTS interface is selected it is immediately initialized and the list of the voices that are available with the voice engines usin
236. lize the configuration of programmed calls and synchronization calls with the remote stations gt Alarm history Erase all the alarm history gt Event log Erase the event logs gt Report log Remove the reports recorded in the logbook gt Parameters Reinitialize the general parameters of the application gt Communication ports Reset the configuration of used communication ports The unselected subsets will remain in the state of the current configuration 5 92 Operation 6 OPERATION 6 1 On call schedule To display and update the on call schedule select the Schedule command in the Operation menu or just click on the button Eal On the main screen to access to the on call schedule select the Schedule tab on the bottom of the screen General Supervision File Operation Configuration ALARM ACK General Supervision El 0 Central Station Supervision H 7 Tags H Buildings 2 Buildin Buildin E a Functions Q Power Wa Mecha EF it On Call Managen He Users A Djibouti El amp Supervision Tags i fen Groups Fl it On Call Managemer x gt Yiz e amp Maintenance 5 Called numbers BOURGEOIS Williams GONTRANM Klaus e Schedule oq Alarms History Journal Jsers B amp ALTMAN Peter 91 Vocal 91 Vocal 91 Vocal F ALERT System ALERT User Guide EER COMI COM3 CAPIPORTI
237. m changeover status of the group designated by lt GROUP gt 0 programmed schedule or forced team 1 team changeover done before the scheduled time 2 waiting for team changeover after the scheduled time or on call ended in the team changeover mandatory mode 3 timeout for team changeover expired 4 on call ended before the scheduled time except in the team changeover mandatory mode This item is read only 8 12 5 ALARM topic The ALARM topic contains in addition to the DDE protocol items some items concerning alarms 8 12 5 1 DDE protocol items gt TOPICITEMLIST List of items supported under the ALARM topic gt CONVCOUNT Current number of DDE conversations established with the ALARM topic gt ADVISECOUNT Current number of advise transactions with items of the ALARM topic 8 12 5 2 Alarm management items gt PORTFAIL Communication port failure modem 0 all ports ok 1 at least one port is failed 2 all ports are failed gt REMOTEPORTFAIL Communication port failure modem on redundant station 0 all ports ok 1 at least one port is failed 2 all ports are failed ALERT User Guide 8 37 Appendix gt DDEFAIL Not zero if the DDE conversation with the supervised application is broken or faulty gt REMOTEDDETFAIL Application link failure DDE or OPC on redundant station gt REDUNDANCYFAIL Redundancy failure 0 redundant station ok 1 link or port failure on redundant sta
238. m statistics or intervention statistics according to the current selection and chosen period click on the Print button The printer which will be used is the printer selected by the Print setup command of the File menu If no setup has been performed it is the default printer To define the printing format of the list click with the right button of the mouse in the list of alarms then select the Printing command in the displayed contextual menu 6 3 8 Exportation The content of the selected screen alarm history alarm statistics or intervention statistics can be exported in a file or in the clipboard to copy it in a spreadsheet for example To perform this operation either click on the Export button or click with the right button of the mouse in the list then select the Export command in the displayed contextual menu In the displayed dialog box choose columns to export the export format header separator and the destination file or clipboard Remark following the choused installation option the alarm history can also be automatically exported in real time to an external database see 8 3 External database ALERT User Guide 6 15 Operation 6 4 Event log To display the journal which contains the event log select the command Event log of the menu Operation or just click on the button i On the main screen to access to the event log select the Journal tab on the bottom of the screen G
239. me amp id This field will be replaced by the value of the tag identified by id identifier in the supervision list at the event time amp id This field will be replaced by the current value of the tag identified by id identifier in the supervision list at the time of the message transmission The buttons El allow the value of a contextual variable to be inserted current value or value at the alarm time more easily than by entering the syntax amp ref or amp id as described above After clicking on this button select in the displayed list the wanted variable then validate The selected variable will be inserted automatically in the text with the syntactic form amp id at the end of the text already entered in the format edit field Note the fields amp V amp V amp id amp id amp ref can be followed up by a display format in square brackets The display format defined here is the same as this defined for the display format of a tag see 5 11 1 Format of a tag value If a display format is defined at the level of the inserted value it is replaced by the format defined here Example amp V 0 The value 12 will be replaced by 12 0 Button Preview Click on this button to have a preview of the message generated with the definite format The displayed parameter values are the current values The item reference is the reference of the variable of which one wishes to define the
240. me must be preceded by the character After the called operator following the activation of the corresponding alarm or event has listened to the associated audio message the number specified in this field is automatically called back followed by the call forward e The Alphanumeric message is used to identify the event in the event log and the alarm table and for all media accepting alohanumeric messages SMS paging systems fax It can contain up to 512 alohanumeric characters the number of characters typed being displayed in bracket on the right of the field title This message can be formatted at the time of the event to include information associated with group code reference priority value or the current value of other variables Click on the Format button to define the format associated with the message see 5 11 5 Definition of message format e A vocal message can be associated with the variable to identify the event during telephonic communications It can also be played locally at the time of the event if the PC is provided with a sound card and if the option play vocal message is validated in alarm options see 7 4 Alarm options Click on the Browse button to browse files for a sound file containing a pre recorded audio message It can be a message recorded by telephone and stored in the MESSAGE subdirectory with a name under form MTxxxx WAV xxx being between 0000 a
241. me of the local station is proposed Resolution Display resolution for the group schedule minimum time slots Associated commands This option group defines the commands that can been transmitted to an external application when the group changes of state e Group to call command to transmit when the group goes to call state at least one not acknowledged alarm e Group advised command to transmit when the group is considered as warned successful call e Group call failed command to transmit when the call of the group is considered as failed e Group acknowledged command to transmit when all the alarms attached to the group have been acknowledged the group is not any more to call Type the command in the edit field or click on the button bel to select an existing command or to define a new command see 8 7 Command driver ALERT User Guide 5 17 Configuration 5 4 On call teams This dialog box shows the list of operators attached to the team selected in the Team drop down list for the group designated in the field Group It is called from the configuration of on call groups see above by clicking on the Teams button Teams a x Group Heat iM aintenance HIGHT Cancel Group Operators Team Operators ALTMAN Peter New Team BOURGEOIS Wiliams GONTRAN Klaus GUARD ROOM ET GUARD ROOM MARTIN Roger MARTIN Roger a Delete team BB Help Remove Relief Group Name o
242. med by the supervised application Date Date and time of the mask command Limit date Limit date and time of the mask indicates an unlimited mask This list can be customized and sorted It is possible to add other columns 24 This list can be entirely customized selection of columns to display order width and title of columns alignment of the title or the column content To perform this customization position the mouse cursor on the column of which one wants to modify the presentation and click on the right button of the mouse Select then the adequate command in the displayed contextual menu The new configuration is automatically saved to be restored for the next sessions The contextual menu also allows to configure the printing format of the list and to export the list to the clipboard or a file with a configurable format 6 34 Operation Station Name of the station attached to the alarm Code Numeric code of the tag Reference Reference of the tag On call group Name of the on call group attached to the alarm C Indicates that a comment exists about the masking action click on the Edit button or double click on the line to read the comment Comment Comment about the masking action Treatment of masked alarms The masked alarms do not trig calls and are not logged in the alarm history If a masked alarm is activated it results in a simple message of type EVENT in the event log The masked alarms n
243. med cyclically When a team is found the call is triggered to this one Following option either the next operator to call turnover option or the list of active operators not in relief is extracted from the team to call Only on duty operators are called Then a call request to these operators is registered in the list of users to call For each operator of the list of operators to call the call procedure is triggered to the first valid number of the list of call numbers of the operator If this call does not succeed and after a configurable number of attempts the call is reiterated to the next valid number in the list of call numbers of the operator and so on When the call succeeds a temporization is triggered to wait for the call acknowledgment At the end of this temporization the operator call is reiterated a configurable number of times The call can be acknowledged either locally by any operator or from a distance by telephone or from a remote terminal by the operator himself or when the called operator is declared as virtual by an operator belonging to the same group If the call number is not declared as final number no call acknowledgment is required and the call cycle automatically continues with the next number of the list The call of an operator is considered as failed when e there is no valid call number for the operator e the call did not succeed for any of his numbers after the configured number of attempts
244. message format Configuration 5 11 6 Edition of instruction file This dialog box allows the edition of the instruction file that will be transmitted on alarm or user message sending manual or programmed call It can be called from the dialog boxes of definition of the tag properties see 5 11 Tag properties of configuration of the programmed calls see 5 6 Programmed Calls or of message transmission see 6 9 Sending a message Message Edition D Dev Alert35r1 Bin_Debug MESSAGE INSTO001 TXT 2 Event EscelllT est xls 4lanns L10C5 E Cancel Hel Contextual File amp n tag value El Hep INSTRUCTIONS To call the fire department ENVIRONMENT Steam boiler pressure Outside temperature Inside temperature Heating set point Event This field displays the reference of the alarm of which one wishes to edit the instruction file If the file is attached to a service message this reference is replaced by Service Message The associated alohanumeric message previously defined for the alarm variable or for the message to send is displayed in the first edit field This message is not modifiable here Contextual File This option indicates that the edited file can include some contextual information prefixed by amp and that these information should be automatically updated at the time of the associated alarm or at call time if the file is associated with a service
245. message or a programmed call File content The multi lines edit field allows the wanted text to be entered This text can include tabulations and carriage returns If the Contextual File option is checked the text can contain fields of type amp ref or amp id ref designating the alphanumeric reference of the tag id its numeric identifier By clicking on the button E then by selecting the wanted tag in the displayed list one can create automatically a field of type amp id ALERT User Guide 5 51 Configuration These fields will be replaced at the alarm time by the current value of the tag designated by its reference ref or its identifier id The referenced tags must have been previously defined in the list of tags to supervise NOTE When the file is intended for transmission to a fax it is possible to incorporate one or several bitmaps in the instruction file by inserting to the wanted line for each bitmap a line with the following format with lt FILE gt lt H gt optional lt P gt optional Example amp FTest BMP amp FTest BMP 20 R amp FC Test2 BMP 0 L amp F lt FILE gt lt H gt lt P gt Name of the bitmap file relative name or full path Height of the bitmap in mm 0 by default to use the originated dimension of the bitmap When the bitmap is resized in height its width is proportionally adapted Position of the bitmap on the line
246. mit date amp time f Nao limit C Nest duty change Limit date time 29 07 2004 14 42 Schedule derogation The list displays the whole of groups with their current derogation state Groups in derogation state are checked When a group is in derogation state all calls that concern it are redirected to the derogation team indicated in brackets on the right of the group name If there is no derogation team designated calls are discarded or suspended according to the call option Discard call if no team to call see 7 5 Call options gt Click on the checkbox of a group to change it in derogation box checked or in normal on call state box not checked gt Click on the All button to change all groups to derogation state gt Click on the None button to change all groups to normal on call state Redirect calls to team When a group is selected in the list one can select the associated derogation team in the list Redirect calls to team This team will be the one to which will be redirected all the calls intended to the group in question when this last is forced in derogation state checked in the group list The dropdown list displays the list of all defined teams for the selected group The choice none means that there is no derogation team for the selected group Limit date amp time This group defines the limit time for the derogation of the selected groups e If the No limit option is chec
247. ms then select the Printing command in the displayed contextual menu 6 4 3 Exportation The displayed event log can be exported in a file or in the clipboard to copy it in a spreadsheet for example To perform this operation click in the list with the right button of the mouse then select the Export command in the displayed contextual menu In the displayed dialog box choose columns to export the export format header separator and the destination file or clipboard Operation 6 5 Logbook To display the logbook to consult or edit user reports select the command Logbook of the menu Operation or just click on the button F7 On the main screen to access to the logbook select the Reports tab on the bottom of the screen The logbook contains the written or oral reports which have been recorded by the operators either locally see 6 6 Editing a report or by telephone see 8 1 Vocal server This logbook is recorded in files one file per day These files are located in the REPORT subdirectory of the application directory The date corresponding to a file is coded in its name under the form RYYMMDD LOG with YY year MM month DD day Each report is represented by a heading line followed by the contents of a written report aA wm ALS EVA ES el 1 Supervision Alert Redundancy have observed a low water pressure on f The report heading line contains
248. n a button gives access to the modem parameters gt For a TCP IP connection a field defines the IP port that will be used by the driver When the Automatic call acknowledgment option is checked it is not necessary to call back Alert to confirm the reception The Trace in Alert option activates the trace of the driver work in the event log When the option Date and time updates enabled is checked a synchronization call can modify the system date and time The station synchronization call can be described in a file called StationName log if the Synchronization log file option is selected ALERT User Guide 8 29 Appendix The value given in Call attempt number is the call attempt number in case of call failure specific to this driver If null the number of attempt is the default one defined in Alert options The Download path field defines the path of the directory in which the files downloaded by Alert will be copied If the user specifies a path in the file transfer dialog box this path will be added to the path defined here Appendix 8 12 DDE server interface 8 12 1 General presentation The DDE server interface gives a standard access to the internal database of Alert using the service name ALERT to control alarm and call processing This interface includes the following DDE topics e The SYSTEM topic contains general information about the DDE protocol and control items of the application e The USER to
249. n it is possible to hide one or the other branch see 8 5 12 Station properties The icon of each station can be customized by using the Properties command of the associated contextual menu The order of the stations in the tree can be customized The local station is always displayed on the top of the tree and cannot be moved To move a station in the tree click on its icon with the mouse left button drag the icon keeping the mouse button pressed over the station icon AFTER which the dragged station is wished to be moved then release the mouse button Tree menu General Supervision i Central Station Acknowledgment Acknowledgement Acknowledgment of all alarms of the w Polling station Synchronize Synchronization of the station with the Rename local main station see 6 11 Station Properties synchronization Polling Stop Restore the DDE OPC connections of the station Copy Copy data of the selected stations to the clipboard for duplication by a later paste on the root of the tree Delete Deletion of the station If data are attached to the station tags tag groups users on call groups a confirmation is required The local station first station cannot be deleted Rename Change the name of the station Properties Edition of the properties of the station see 5 12 Station properties Associated view menu i Central Station Open Opens the supervision or on call phe OR management sub
250. n external application without identification of operator the part operator name is suppressed 19 If the call is acknowledged by the called operator himself the part operator name is suppressed 20 If no team is defined in derogation the part gt team is suppressed 21 In redundant mode 22 f 1st changeover the part lt A gt is suppressed if default delay the part max delay is suppressed ALERT User Guide 6 17 Operation When the event log is displayed the following actions can be performed e Selection of the station to control in the Station list e Selection of the day to visualize by clicking on the wanted date in the Date list e Selection of the type of events to visualize by clicking the corresponding checkboxes To consult past events check the List locked option to disable the automatic scrolling of the list to the arrival of a new event When this option is not checked every new event provokes the automatic display of the event log of the current day in last position to visualize the new event 6 4 2 Printing To print the displayed event log according to the actual date and event type selection click on the Print button The printer which will be used is the printer selected by the Print setup command of the File menu If no setup has been performed it is the default printer To define the printing format of the list click with the right button of the mouse in the list of alar
251. n is grayed The station list displays the list of operators configured with a dial number attached to a driver allowing station synchronization Alert Modem Alert Socket Alert Direct and who have the same name as one of the defined station A programmed synchronization is defined by a line containing gt the name of the station to call gt the call type 3 for cyclic call 4 for periodic call gt the period of the cyclic call or the day and time of the periodic call ALERT User Guide 5 27 Configuration To create a new programmed synchronization 1 Select the concerned station in the dropdown list 2 Select the call type cyclic call or periodic call 3 In case of a cyclic call define the call cycle In case of a periodic call select the day of the call a specific week day or every days in the drop down list Every then define the call time for the selected day 4 Define the synchronization options The synchronization options are gt Date and time The calling station set the date of the called station To be able to set the date and time the called station needs the Alert driver option Date and time updates enabled to be selected gt Configuration synchronization If the local station is the main station the synchronized data are the data associated to the called station If the local station is a remote station the synchronized data are its own data For both case we can send and or receive all the co
252. n the contextual menu One or more users can be set off duty and substituted by using the Substituted by command in the contextual menu to designate a substitute for the selected users in each of their groups In the report view the Called numbers column displays the numbers that will be used when the user will be called in the call order The comment column provides possible additional indications substitute name if the user if off duty The User view can be used for the configuration of the user list by using the Add a user command from the contextual menu attached to the branch or the view A dialog box allows the user parameters to be configured see 5 1 1 User properties This view also can be used as a starting base when assigning users to the on call groups and teams e By drag and drop operation users to assign to a group or a team are selected in the view then dragged with the mouse over the tree branch that corresponds to the wanted group or team This operation does not remove the selected users from the user list even if the CTRL key is pressed when releasing the mouse button cursor always displayed during the dragging operation 1 To select a set of contiguous users keep the SHIFT key pressed during the selection To select disjoined sets of users keep the CTRL key pressed during the selection 4 24 User Interface e By copy paste operation users to assign to a group are se
253. n the drop down list ALERT User Guide 5 23 Configuration 2 Select the programmed call type call at the beginning of on call period call at the end of on call period cyclic call or periodic call 3 In case of a cyclic call define the call cycle In case of a periodic call select in the Every drop down list the day of the call a specific week day or every days then define the call time for the selected day 4 Type the text message to send see below 5 Finally click on the Apply button If one wishes to designate a specific dial number for a programmed call select the call in question in the list of programmed calls click on the Number button then in the displayed dialog box choose the option selected number and select the number to call The default option programmed number will use the active dial number for the user at the time of the call For a given user only one cyclic call can be defined But it is possible to define several periodic calls for the same operator To remove a programmed call Select it in the programmed calls list then click on the Remove button To modify a programmed call Select it in the programmed calls list modify the wanted parameters then click on the Apply button Remark if the call type or the period of a periodic call is changed a new programmed call is created Option Call always This option indicates when checked that the cyclic or periodic calls will be performed
254. nd 9999 Click on the Record button to directly record an audio message The name of the created sound file is automatically generated under the form MAxxxx WAV xxxx being a numeric code between 0000 and 9999 This button can be used also to modify an audio message already recorded silence truncation at end of the message for example Click on the Listen button to play on the sound card of the PC if it exists the audio message associated with the event Remark When the option voice synthesis from the text is validated the vocal message can be synthesized directly from the formatted alphanumeric message This synthesis is performed every time the tag goes to the event state what makes possible to vocally time stamp the event on option and to include dynamic information in the vocal message value of the tag or other tags ALERT User Guide 5 39 Configuration To test the voice synthesis of the typed message with the present formatting parameters click on the Listen button e A text file can be associated with the event when it is defined as an alarm This file allows instructions or contextual information concerning the event to be transmitted with the alarm message It is used to display information instructions in the alarm table and to transmit these information by fax or by email Click on the Edit button to directly enter the text to transmit This text is recorded in the MESSAGE su
255. nfiguration data Option for running as Windows service allowing the software to be automatically launched at the system initialization before all session opening Programming interface API and ActiveX interface These interfaces allow any application to interact with the software throw many functions creation deletion of objects alarms users groups read write of parameters set reset acknowledgment of alarms call of group or user 1 3 News of the version 3 5 revision 1 The version 3 5 of Alert had introduced a new user interface offering a structured and synoptic view of the whole supervised application and on call management organization The revision 1 of the version 3 5 of the software by developing certain aspects of the organization of the data and by correcting some weakness of the original version still reinforce the possibilities offered by this interface Extension of the station concept allowing the management of virtual stations The organization of the data in stations meets the need to define specific subsets for the management of operators and data attached to companies or sites With the concept of virtual stations this logical organization is now possible independently of the organization of the data acquisition data can be recovered through a single frontal or database and then redistributed between the various stations according to their origin Identification of the DDE and OPC data servers The tags i
256. nfiguration data or only the modified data since the last synchronization The synchronized data are the users the call groups the teams the alarm groups the on call schedule and the tags 5 Finally click on the Add button located below the station list For a given station only one programmed synchronization can be defined But it is possible to define several periodic programmed synchronizations for the same station To delete a programmed synchronization Select it in the programmed synchronizations list then click on the Remove button To modify a programmed synchronization Select it in the programmed synchronizations list modify the wanted parameters then click on the Add button Remark if the call type or the period of a periodic call is changed a new programmed synchronization is created 5 28 Configuration 5 9 List of tags to supervise To define the list of variables to supervise select the Supervision command in the Configuration menu or click on the button el This dialog box also can be called from the contextual menu associated with the branch Supervision in the tree of the main screen see 4 6 1 3 Supervision E List of tags to supervise Reference DDE f OPC Other Ok sever fed a ance Group Test xls Alarms Add z j elp ltem L1C1 Delete Network Excell T est xls 4larms L101 OFC Import m Filter Station fall On call all G
257. ng address sec 3 End address DTMF code 0 3 4 D H Message Transmission Time before sending message sec 3 Message header 0 9 4 0 4 1 End message DTMF code 0 98 0 4 51 Message Validation Time for validation sec 3 Validation DTMF code 0 9 4 0 The displayed dialog box allows the working parameters of the selected driver to be configured The dial number is only used when the beep system requires the call of a particular service dial number of the vocal server or prefix of the built in beep service of the PABX If there is not a specific number for the beep service this field must be empty all the necessary information being in the call number of the concerned operator When the Remote pick up detection option is validated the remote pick up is waited after dialing to continue the beep call procedure This option has to be validated only when the remote pick up really exists and if the used modem is able to detect this remote pick up voice modem When this option is not validated and however the remote pickup has to be waited the time to wait for pick up which is indicated in seconds is waited before continuing the beep call procedure The No message or message header only option message must be validated only to call simple beepers beepers incapable to receive a numeric message or to transmit always the same message entered in the Message header field independent of the call reason al
258. ng of all alarms attached to the selected group and to the groups of its sub tree Unmask Unmasking of all alarms attached to the selected group and to the groups of its sub tree Add a tag Creation of a new tag attached to the selected group see 5 10 Selection of an external tag and 5 11 Tag properties Creation of a new group in the selected group see 5 14 Tag group properties Creation in the group of a new tag using a DDE reference that was prior copied in the clipboard LINK format from a DDE server application or assignment to the group of a list of tags prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the tag view a data server or another group Deletion of the selected group After confirmation a message proposes to delete the tags contained in the group Change the name of the group Edition of the group properties see 5 14 Tag group properties choice Tags w Groups Open Open the selected group under the form of a list of groups if child groups are defined or a list of tags in the opposite case Acknowledgment Acknowledgment of all alarms attached to the selected group and to the groups of its sub tree Mask Masking of all alarms attached to the selected group and to the groups of its sub tree Unmask Unmasking of all alarms attached to the selected group and to the groups of its sub tree Deletion of the selected group After confirmation a message pr
259. ng parameters can be configured PIN Number Personal Identification Number that authorizes access to the functions of the connected GSM modem SMS format Select here the format to use in the commands to transmit or read short messages SMS The Auto selection allows the actual format configured in the modem to be used Incoming call identification When this option is validated the incoming calls on the GSM modems are identified Processing of received messages When this option is validated the messages received by the GSM modem can be processed as gt a call acknowledgment following the message defined in the field Call acknowledgment gt ateam changeover command begin or end of on call period following the messages defined in the field Team changeover gt alarm or acknowledgment messages that will be treated by the message processor according with the treatment selected in the Message processor list 5 78 Configuration Received messages can be automatically transmitted by the GSM modem However some modems only transmit received messages on request For these modems it will be necessary to define a polling period in the field cycle The value O disables the polling cycle of the modem Call acknowledgment Short message text that will be interpreted as an acknowledgment of the calls that was destined to the operator who has transmitted the short message Team changeover Short message text that will
260. nowledgment on event reset or group warned On option automatic synchronization of acknowledgments with the supervised application e Possibility of masking and unmasking of alarms with date and operator s name recording An alarm masking can be temporized limit date and time A comment can be attached to the masking operation Possibility of automatic masking of an alarm by another one in order to limit the avalanche effect following upon certain failures e g power down e Possibility to dispatch service messages to the on call team or to any operator Messages transmitted to an operator are recorded in its mail box It is also possible to trigger file transfers to one or several stations as well as station synchronizations e Possibility to program calls of operators at beginning or end of their on call period as well as cyclic calls or periodic calls at a given time of a week day with optionally an attached text file Possibility of embedded dynamic values in the transmitted message or attached text file Possibility to program cyclical or periodical files transfers or station synchronizations e Active surveillance of the supervised application by controlling the links with this last and possibility to perform a periodic request about specifics tags in order to detect a no response e g application crash Possibility to set an alarm on link failure or no answer to a request e Active surveillance of calling systems modems Po
261. nt mode The user application runs according to its own logic on an independent way Its only constraint is to deliver information that can be interpreted as events when they are transmitted or indicate a determined change of state This transmission can be performed through a DDE or OPC server integrated in the supervised application a file a serial link printer output a data base and many other mechanisms In this mode Alert directly assumes the polling of the events declared in the application server It also can take in charge acknowledgments done either from Alert or from the supervised application Alert is also able to directly supervise a Programmable Logic Controller by the way of a DDE or OPC communication server Server mode The user application integrates the Alert software in its working logic In this mode Alert can be considered like an evolved call transmitter that allows a supervision application to be discharged from all aspects of the call management constitution of groups and teams schedule management communication with operators In this mode Alert answers to explicit solicitations of the client application alarm triggering messages transmission These commands can be transmitted either through its programming interface API of DLL type through its DDE server interface or through its command line Integrated mode Alert uses a mediator module that is especially developed for an application or
262. number of declared operators The name of the station if it is not the local station with which the operator is associated is displayed in brackets If the operator belongs to a class for which the configuration of operators is allowed only the class System by default he will be able to perform the following operations ALERT User Guide 5 1 Configuration e Create a new operator by clicking on the New button This choice lead to the edition of a new user record see below e Modify the record of an existing operator by selecting the operator in the list then by clicking on the Edit button or directly by double clicking the operator in the list This choice leads to the edition of the operator s record selected see below e Remove an operator of the list by selecting it in the list then clicking on the Delete button A message box asks for a confirmation of the command 5 1 1 User properties The User record dialog box defines the properties of an operator This dialog box is called from the dialog box of operator configuration It also can be called from the contextual menu associated with the branch Users in the tree of the main screen see 4 6 1 8 Users User record a Ed Identification OK Hame First Name _ Kt HENRY Peter Cancel Language Class Help Fran ais France Operation T Wirtual user ID 006 Code Advanced DH duty substituted by
263. ny modification of the on call organization operators groups teams derogation is automatically transmitted to the other station e Supervision synchronization every modification of the tag list to supervise is automatically transmitted to the other station The tags declared as no redundant are not transmitted e Programmed call synchronization any modification of the programmed calls and calls for synchronization with the remote stations is automatically transmitted to the other station e Parameter synchronization any modification of working parameters is automatically transmitted to the other station alarm parameters call parameters working of the vocal server messages and parameters e Report synchronization any modification of the logbook is automatically transmitted to the other station Manual synchronization The following synchronizations are only performed on request from the local station by clicking on the Synchronize button e Icon synchronization selection of the synchronization of icons defined in the tree of the main screen e Script synchronization selection of the synchronization of scripts and parameters of the message processor 7 22 Options 7 7 Vocal server configuration To configure the working of the built in vocal server of Alert for telephonic vocal communications select the Vocal Server command of the Configuration menu The displayed dialog box contains 4 tabs e Options config
264. o the ces Relief Active status in the group Add a user Creation of a new operator assigned to the Delete group see 5 1 1 User properties Properties Copy Copy the properties of the selected operators to the clipboard XML format for later paste in groups and teams Paste Assignment to the group of a list of operators prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the user list another group or a team Delete Deletion of the selected operators The operators are only removed from the group They remain defined in the user list Properties Edition of the properties of the selected operator see 5 1 1 User properties 4 6 1 10 Teams Each team branch displays in its associated view the ordered list of the users of team The team represented with the icon is the active team of the parent group team called in case of alarm concerning the group The teams represented with the overlapped symbol amp are those that are not reachable all operators off duty or no valid dial numbers defined The order of the teams in a group can be customized in the tree To move a team click on its icon with the mouse left button drag the icon keeping the mouse button pressed over the icon of the team AFTER which the team is wished to be moved and then release the mouse button To move a team to the first position in the group drag its icon over the icon of its parent group To assign users to a team vario
265. o the selected entities see 4 6 Main screen Menus depend on the profile of the logged user and on the configuration of this profile The menus marked 1 below are accessible only to an operator declared with a control or system profile in standard configuration those marked 2 are accessible only to an operator having a system profile in standard configuration File menu LAS Operation Configura Logout Operator leaves the application without Logout closing it Links 1 Links Control of DDE and OPC links closure or E restoration of links with the supervised i application NE 2 New Erase the current configuration 2 Open Open a saved or remote configuration Print 2 Save As Save the current configuration oe 1 Print Printing of configuration tables se 1 Printer setup Selection and configuration of the printer penne D 1 Line printer Selection and configuration of the line Trace printer trace Exit 1 Line printer setup Selection of event types to trace on the line y printer 1 Trace Configuration of options for debug trace 1 Exit Closure of the application 4 4 User Interface Operation menu Configuration User record Send message Calls in progress w Schedule Alarms History Event Log Logbook Team changeover Schedule Derogation Alarm Mask Unmask Net Sentinel Team changeover Schedule derogation Alarm Mask Unmask
266. o unlock the calls for a given group select the same command in the contextual menu displayed when clicking with the mouse right button on the icon of the group command checked to signal locked status of the group If a team is planned in the schedule it automatically becomes on call and the icon of the group signals that the group can be called again To redirect the calls addressed to a group to a team of the group select the On call forced command in the contextual menu displayed when clicking with the mouse right button on the icon of the team in the on call management tree see 4 6 1 10 Teams Ta The icon of the forced team signals that the team is active 5 To end the redirection of the calls to a team select the same command in the contextual menu displayed when clicking with the mouse right button on the icon of the team command checked to signal forced status of the team The team which is planned in the schedule then automatically becomes active To force one or more groups in derogation state or consult the list of groups in derogation state select the Schedule Derogation command in the Operation menu or click on the button K This command displays the following dialog box 23 Following the call option Discard call if no team to call when alarm is activated 6 32 Operation schedule Derogation Schedule derogation for groups Fire gt LAGARDE Hans Redirect calls to team Li
267. of the operator In case of error press on the key of the telephonic keyboard to cancel the entry and then enter the code again As soon as a key is pressed Alert stops the emission of the welcome message what authorizes an experienced operator to immediately identify himself without having to wait for the complete transmission of the message When the code is entered and recognized a 3 tones acknowledgment beep is transmitted Otherwise a message invalid code invites the operator to enter his code again If the authentication option is validated Alert waits then for the access code of the operator 4 digits Procedures of canceling and acknowledgment are the same At the end of the identification phase 2 with possible authentication and if there are messages pending for the operator or alarms not acknowledged or active concerning him the corresponding messages are transmitted Otherwise a message informs the operator that there are no alarms If there are more 10 pending alarms for the connected operator only the 10 first messages by decreasing priority order then reverse chronological order are played The maximum number of announced alarms 10 by default is defined by the maxalarm parameter in the vocal section of Alert ini file 31 The waited operator identifier can be shorted to 1 or 2 digits It can even be suppressed null length in which case Alert doesn t manage any more identification procedure voc
268. of the other alarm This allows an alarm to be activated only when two alarms are simultaneously active AND of two alarms To define a masking tag click on the button El on the right of the field and choose the wanted tag in the displayed list The mask tag must have been beforehand defined 5 38 Configuration e The Ack button gives access to the configuration of the acknowledgment conditions of the alarm by DDE or OPC and to the definition of the auto acknowledgment properties of the alarm See 5 11 3 Properties of alarm acknowledgment e The Mask button gives access to the configuration of the masking conditions of the alarm by DDE or OPC See 5 11 4 Properties of alarm masking Associated information With each change of state of the event activation return to the normal state alarm acknowledgment numerical alohanumeric and vocal messages can be associated e The numerical code is used to identify the alarm in the messages which can only be transmitted under numerical form beeper This code is automatically assigned at the time of the creation of the tag It can be modified 1 to 32 characters no numerical characters being accepted however being careful that these characters are allowed by the transmission system used for the numerical messages Call forward the numerical code also can be used to define a telephone number or an operator name to call back In this case the code or operator na
269. ol the pressure of the gas boiler i Beeper call enabled Code for numeric pagers 0 Vocal message Test file to send with Cancel Apply Help Addressees To select the addressee operators use one of the 2 following methods e either select the name of the user from the user list then click on the Add button e or click on the name of a user in the user list then drag him to the receiver list keeping the mouse button pressed release the button over the destination A double click in the user list displays the properties of the selected user In case of error to delete an operator from the addressee list one can e either select his name from the addressee list then click on the Remove button 6 24 Operation e or click on his name in the addressee list then drag it to the exit icon keeping the mouse button pressed release the button over the destination The dial number to use to reach a user can be specifically designated This number will be called regardless of the current dial number schedule of the called user To designate a specific dial number for the user selected in the receiver list click on the Number button In the displayed dialog box choose the option selected number then select the number to call When a dial number is specified its identifier in the dial number directory of the user is written after the user name in the receiver list under the form lt ld gt Messa
270. ole RestoreLinks ShowWindow PlayText User Guide console Reinitialize the DDE connections nnn nnn nn nnn nn nn nn nn ree ree nee ene ee ee eT ee ee 99 Synthesizes and plays a message on the local station 8 39 Appendix 8 13 1 1 DDE command If the command is denied the POKE or EXECUTE command returns an error The error cause can be read in the REPORT item of the SYSTEM topic The REPORT item can be read by a simple request REQUEST or by a demand for advise ADVISE It returns the report value of the last executed command ALERT ERRNOEROR 00 Comme ALERTER INVAUIDALARNE 06 ivaidalarmidenciien ALERT ERRINVAUIDUSER 08 ivalidusername ALERTER NOCONSOUE 08 Noconsoledefned The report for execution of a command that needs a delay to be completed call command should be interpreted by analysis of the events sent back in the TRACE item of the SYSTEM topic see 8 12 2 The commands are transmitted under the form of character strings upper or lower case including a command label followed by a parameter list each parameter being separated from the previous by a tab character 8 13 1 2 Command by command line The commands are transmitted under the form of character strings upper or lower case including the name of the ALERT application with full path a command label followed by a parameter list each parameter being separated from the previous by a tab or a space character
271. oming call management This drop down list selects the treatment to perform on reception of an incoming call gt Noresponse no answer to the call gt Voice response voice answer utilization of the voice driver validated only when the modem driver accepts voice commands gt Telematic server answer to a remote terminal by using the Visual Access application terminal server 5 72 Configuration When the message processor is active the treatments that have been defined for a serial link can also be selected Option Incoming call only When this option is checked the modem is exclusively reserved for incoming calls and cannot be used for outgoing calls Prefix to dial Prefix to dial to have access to the public telephone network on the line connected to the modem The prefix indicates that the line is exclusively reserved for internal calls no access to the public telephone network Voice modem When this option is checked the modem can be used for vocal communications A button is then displayed on the right to give access to the configuration of specific parameters of the voice modem see 8 5 17 3 2 Configuration of vocal modem parameters Fax modem When this option is checked the modem can be used to transmit faxes GSM PCS modem Check this option when the connected modem is a GSM or PCS modem A button is then displayed on the right to give access to the configuration of specific parame
272. on 5 15 2 Message to user Action definition Action Ok Cancel Help User to call ALTMAN Peter f Programmed number Designated number vocat 2 The Call User action provokes the call of the user selected in the User to call dropdown list with option of forcing the called number Note so that the user can consult the tag or acknowledge the alarm the tag has to be attached to one of the on call groups which the user belongs by defining an a call group action for the group in question If the operator does not belong to any the groups to be called he will not have access to the tag User to call This dropdown list designates the user to call Select this user in the list of the defined users by clicking on the arrow of the dropdown list On event activation or reset or acknowledgment following the selected tab the designated user will receive a call of type service message with the formatted message which corresponds to the selected tab Programmed number When this option is checked the call of the user is processed by using the number that is active at the call time with possible call of the relief number in case of failure Designated number When this option is checked the call of the user is processed by using the number which is explicitly designated in the list below In case of failure there is no possible call of the relief number 5 58 Configuration 5 15 3 Execute script Action defin
273. on El on the right of the Alarm field and choose the wanted alarm in the displayed list To suppress the selected alarm perform the same operation but in displayed dialog box click on the line selected in the list for unselect it then validate by OK Restriction of the statistic display choice All No null When the statistic display alarms or interventions is selected the content of the list can be restricted to the items alarms or operators that have been counted at least one time by selecting the No null option ALERT User Guide 6 11 Operation 6 3 3 History and statistics presentation The list displayed in the median part of the screen depends on the type of selected history or Statistics Alarm history The list presents the whole of alarms that occurred on the selected period in the chronological order of their appearance and in accordance with the filter done by the selection Every line represents an alarm on 9 columns Date Alarm time Station Station attached to the alarm Group Tag group of the alarm Alarm Formatted message defined for the alarm P Priority level ofthe alarm Acknowledged by Name ofthe operator who has acknowledged the alarm if the alarm is acknowledged Fail duration Time during which the alarm was active ifthe alarm is returned to the normal state in seconds Reaction Time between the alarm activation and its acknowledgment if the alarm is acknowledged in seconds In
274. one of the selected alarms 2 Alarm masked Masking Unmasking of selected alarm tags see 6 15 1 Masking Unmasking alarms Add a tag Creation of a new tag attached to the selected data server and preset with the parameters of the selected tag see 5 10 Selection of an external tag and 5 11 Tag properties Copy the properties of the selected tags to the clipboard XML format for later paste in groups Deletion of the selected tags After confirmation the tags are definitively deleted Edition of the external reference of the tag see 5 10 Selection of an external tag Edition of the tag properties see 5 11 Tag properties 7 This command is available only for the tags in alarm 8 This command is available only when the option Database export is validated see 7 1 General options ALERT User Guide 4 19 User Interface 4 6 1 6 Tag groups The Groups branch displays a functional topographical description of the organization of the supervised variables This description is made by the definition of a hierarchical structure of groups e g countries cities buildings devices functions applications etc A group can contain a sub tree of groups e g buildings in cities in countries Each group branch displays in its associated view a set of the tags attached to the group in black or to one of the groups of its sub tree in yellow green This organization all
275. onfigure the weekly on call program of each defined group select the On call management command in the Configuration menu or click on the button E On the displayed dialog box select the Program tab This dialog box also can be directly called from the contextual menu displayed when clicking with the mouse right button on the icon of an on call group in the tree of the main screen then selecting the command Program see 4 6 1 9 On call groups On Call Management Frogrammed Calls Programmed Transfers Synchro Stations Users Groupe Program Group OO GONTRAN Klaus Maintenance MB MARTIN Roger BI NIGHT D ALTMAN Peter BOURGEOIS williams Reduced duty bottom line Resolution 60 Use the right button of the mouse to erase an areal Of 4 2 3 4 5 6 ejahan 19 20 21 22 29 Monday fF PTT Tuesday Wedhesday Thursday P Cris F Sauce P Sindy P gt Holiday ced in toe This dialog box displays the weekly on call program defined for the group selected in the Group drop down list Group Select in this drop down list the on call group which one wants to visualize and configure The selection of a group validates the modifications which were possibly made on the group selected beforehand Teams List of teams attached to the group selected in the drop down list Group Each team is represented by its color and its name To assign a team to the on call program of the
276. ons Station On Call and Group then click on the Create button Select the wished option creation of report for the selected alarm or for all the following alarms in the displayed list Finally type the report text in the report edition dialog box A topic can be selected or defined A voice report can be recorded One or several files can be attached to the report The report attached to an alarm can be read and possibly modified by clicking on the Edit button If several reports are attached to the alarm use the buttons gt and of the report dialog box to browse the different reports 6 8 Operation The reports about an alarm can be read later from the alarm history or the logbook In the logbook the alarm reports are indicated by a red in the header bar of the report When a report exists for an alarm it is indicated by an asterisk displayed in the R column This column is not visible by default It can be added by clicking in the list with the right button of the mouse then selecting the Display command 6 2 6 Printing To print the displayed alarm list according to the current selection click on the Print button The printer which will be used is the printer selected by the Print setup command of the File menu If no setup has been performed it is the default printer To define the printing format of the list click with the right button of the mouse in the list of alarms then select the P
277. oposes to delete the tags contained in the group Change the name of the group User Interface Properties Edition of the group properties see 5 14 Tag group properties Tag viewmenu choice Ej w Tags Groups Building 0 Acknowledgment Acknowledgment of selected alarms 9 Comment Add acomment about the selected alarms 10 ay Comment Report Edit a report about the selected alarms E Report Consultation of the report when a report Alarm masked already exists for only one of the selected Mila tag alarms 2 Alarm masked Masking Unmasking of selected alarm Copy tags see 6 15 1 Masking Unmasking alarms n Add a tag Creation of a new tag attached to the Definition selected group see 5 10 Selection ofan Properties external tag and 5 11 Tag properties Copy Copy the properties of the selected tags to the clipboard XML format for later paste in other groups Paste Creation in the group of a new tag using a DDE reference that was prior copied in the clipboard LINK format from a DDE server application or assignment to the group of a list of tags prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the tag view a data server or another group Delete Deletion of the selected tags A message proposes the deletion of the tags from the tag list Definition Edition of the external reference of the tag see 5 10 Selection of an external tag Properties Edit
278. options 7 1 General options which allows some limited operations to be enabled without having to be logged call or alarm acknowledgment alarm masking unmasking edition of an alarm comment or report call transmission In this mode every command that requires the designation of the responsible user for the performed action acknowledgment masking provokes the display of a dialog box to ALERT User Guide 4 1 User Interface get the name of the user and his her password The command will be only accepted if the profile of the designated user authorizes it 4 1 2 Client Station To have access to services provided by the A ert server application from a client station the operator has to identify and authenticate himself in the same way as on the server station But during this operation he will have to designate the server computer onto he wants to connect either with the station name or directly with its IP address The server station can be browsed among the network stations button E on the login dialog box If the IP port number has been modified on the server station 2495 by default can be modified in the redundancy options the new port number will also have to be entered When the connection is successfully completed all the server connection parameters are saved On the next connections one only have to select the wanted server station in the dropdown list of the login dialog box If the Auto connect option i
279. or click on the button E On the displayed dialog box select the Driver tab Communication Forts Dialing Drivers Alert Modem Ascom Bip Alcatel Frosimus Aldiscan Belgium Natel Switzerland D1 AlphaSernvice Germany ltiners 1800 GSM France Orange United Kingdom Remove OF Cancel Help The displayed list defines the list of communication drivers that will be proposed when defining a dial number The possible actions on this dialog box are Button Add Click on this button to add one or several new driver s to the list of used drivers Button Properties Click on this button to configure the communication driver selected in the list Button Remove Click on this button to remove the driver s selected in the list These drivers will no more be proposed when defining a dial number This dialog box displays the list of installed communication drivers ALERT User Guide 5 85 Configuration 5 19 1 Adding a driver This dialog box allows the selection of one or several communication drivers to add them to the list of used drivers Add drivers a Ed Vocal Beep CIF Fardd Tele printer Cancel Genenc Beep Generic Tap Genenc Ermes UCF Generic GSM SMS Help Winpopup Genenc Email Driver Wanadoo mail Country all Fr iw with GSM modern Olan Glesakel The list displays the drivers that have been installed but that are not used Select in this list the driver s th
280. ormally do not appear in the alarm table To display in the alarm table the masked alarms that are active or not acknowledged uncheck the Unmasked filter in the status bar of this table A limit date and time can be defined when masking an alarm In this case the alarm is automatically unmasked at the end of the defined time Masking an alarm or a group of alarms To mask an alarm or a group of alarms click on the Mask button This action displays the list of no masked alarms To mask an alarm or a group of alarms select the desired alarm or the whole subset defined by the filter options Station to select a station On Call to select an on call group or Group to select a tag group check the Selected list option then validate by the OK button After the selection of an alarm or a group of alarms a dialog box is displayed to define the limit date and time of the mask and possibly type a comment see 6 15 1 Masking Unmasking alarms below The mask command will be taken in account only when exiting of the Masked Alarms dialog box by clicking on OK Unmasking an alarm To unmask an alarm first select it in the list by clicking on the corresponding line then click on the Unmask button This button is validated only when an alarm is selected in the list Lookup edition of the comment modification of the limit time To consult the masking comment of an alarm or modify it or to change the limit time of an alarm m
281. other team is planned one of the users of the on call team has to clock out Failing which the team will remain on call beyond the planned period 11 A relief operator is called on alarm only when no one of main operators has been joined or in option at least one of the main operators has not been joined ALERT User Guide 5 13 Configuration e Maximum delay for team changeover This option defines the default value of the maximum accepted delay to clock in from the planned beginning time of the on call period This option predefines the default delay for each new created group It does not modify the default delay for the existing groups except when clicking on the Apply button When clocking in this delay is proposed by default for waiting the next team changeover The proposed time can be modified e Button Apply Click on this button to reinitialize the team changeover options team changeover mandatory and maximum authorized delay for all the existing groups with the values defined in this dialog box A message is displayed for confirmation Option Create a team for each user added to a group This option validates the automatic creation of a new team every time an operator is added to a group At beginning the created team contains only one operator the operator added to the group and is designated by the name of this operator This option avoids the team configuration when the on call organization does not require seve
282. oup warned This option enables the automatic acknowledgment of an alarm when the concerned group is warned This option can be redefined at the level of each alarm e Anonymous acknowledgments dedicated to local user This option allows anonymous acknowledgments transmitted by a SCADA for example to be identified by attributing them to the user who is locally logged Options e Timeout before restarting the call cycle when an alarm is not acknowledged This parameter defines the maximum time to acknowledge an alarm This number can be between O and 999 minutes the value O canceling all delay no obligation to acknowledge the alarm When this time expired if the alarm has not been acknowledged meanwhile the call cycle is restarted towards the team which is on duty at that moment Priority This group defines the priority management e Reverse priority order This option defines the priority order When this option is not checked the 0 priority is the lower priority When this option is checked the 0 priority is the higher priority Alarm Table This group defines the options associated with the alarm table e Automatic deletion of inactive and acknowledged alarms When this option is checked alarms are automatically removed from the alarm table when they are both acknowledged and not active Local Alarm This group defines the local sound treatment of the alarms e Play group tone This option validates the local emission o
283. ously necessary to set the software in record mode by selecting the Record messages by telephone entry in the Configuration menu the RECORD indication is displayed in the fault indicator of the alarm status bar After having recorded messages the same command must be selected again to come back in normal operating mode To record a message or a report by telephone once the telephonic connection established after identification and listen to eventual messages e Press the key 1 and wait for the beep that signals that the application is ready to record Enunciate the message avoiding dead times The record stops automatically as soon as a silence longer than the time defined in the configuration of the vocal driver 2 seconds by default is detected A new beep signals that the record is completed This beep can be transmitted beyond operator s control if the record is aborted receipt overflow e Press the key 2 to listen to the recorded message If the quality of the message does not agree restart the recording by pressing again the key 1 e Press the key 3 to validate the recorded message The message is saved then under the MTxxxx WAV name in the MESSAGE subdirectory of the application xxxx being a sequence number automatically incremented to each new message In the case of recording of a report the storage is done automatically in the REPORT subdirectory at the end of the telephonic communication It is not ne
284. over the icon of the same level group AFTER which the group is wished to be moved then release the mouse button To move a group to the first position drag its icon over the icon of its parent group e To attach a group and its whole sub tree to a group of different level but not belonging to its own sub tree click with the mouse left button on the icon of the group to move drag the icon keeping the mouse button pressed over the icon of the group in which the group is wished to be incorporated then release the mouse button e To attach a group to a group of same level first move it immediately after the group to which it is wished to be attached see above then drag it over this same group the moved group and its whole sub tree is positioned on the top of the list of groups attached to the targeted group e To extract a group from its parent group move it to the top of the list of same level group see above then drag it over its parent group the moved group and its whole sub tree is positioned at the level of its parent group immediately after To assign tags to a group various methods can be used e Directly create a new tag in the group by selection of the Add a tag command in the contextual menu associated with the branch or the view A first dialog box is displayed 4 20 User Interface to enter the tag reference or to browse it in an external application see 5 10 Selection of an external tag When the r
285. ow the displayed instructions A Micromedia group is automatically created and the Alert icon is added to this group The communication drivers that have been selected during the installation are loaded at the application launching from the driver list described in the drivers entry of the ALERT INI file for example drivers Fax 15 Fax DLL 0O 3 Printer 4 Printer DEL U7 Beep 2 Beep DLL 0 7 Tap 29 lap DLL 0 7 Ermes UCP 60 Ermes DLL O 7 GSM 1200 GSM DLL 0 7 Vicdeotex 30 Sm DL 0 3 Semaphone 16 Semaphon DLL 0 7 Vodapage 38 Vodapage DLL 0 7 Winpopup 50 Wpopup DLL 0 6 Ascon LS ASCOM DLLO Nira 13 Nira DLL 0 7 This entry contains the list of drivers that can be used by the application This list contains for each available driver e the driver name e an identifier numerical code gt 0 e the name of the file containing the DLL module e acode defining the mode to use for the driver e a management code for the driver 0 not in any menu 1 in help menu 2 in configuration menu 3 in help and configuration menus Bit 3 indicates that the driver is unused Drivers are automatically loaded at application starting 3 2 2 Client Station To install an Alert client station one can execute the installation program which is located on the installation CDROM and follow the program instructions by selecting the application AlertClient It is also possible to install a client station through the networ
286. ows the synoptic visualization of application subsets as well as treatments by group in the application screens acknowledgment of the whole alarms of a group statistics by group etc A tag can belong to several groups For each tag a basic group can be selected which offers the following specificities e Itis possible to incorporate the name of the basic group in the alarm message of the tag by inserting the string amp G in the associated message format e It is possible to define a vocal message for each basic group This message when defined will be played before the audio message associated with the event It even can replace it if this last is not defined e It is possible to perform only one call for all the alarms of the basic group when this option is validated at the level of the used communication driver e All the alarms of a basic group can be simultaneously acknowledged by a communication driver vocal The basic group of a tag is designated in the Group field of the tag properties dialog box see 5 11 Tag properties The icon of each group can be customized by using the Properties command of the associated contextual menu The order of the groups in the tree and their overlapping can be customized e To modify the order of groups of same level belonging to the same parent group click with the mouse left button on the icon of the grouping to move drag the icon keeping the mouse button pressed
287. p Boiler room message transmitted Acknowledgment of Boiler room alarms by Peter HENRY B Call on event reset If the call on reset is validated for an event only users of the selected on call group having their call on reset option validated will be effectively called The reset of the event triggers the call of the main users not relief users of the active team of the designated group for transmission of the information associated with the event reset numeric alphanumeric or vocal message text file under the form of a service message no call of relief users if failed no call acknowledgment If the variable is defined as alarm the call on reset is done only if at least one call has been triggered after the alarm detection C Call on alarm acknowledgment If the call on acknowledgment is validated for an event only users of the selected on call group having their call on acknowledgment option validated will be effectively called The acknowledgment of the alarm triggers the call of the main users not relief users of the active team of the designated group for transmission of the information associated with the alarm acknowledgment numeric alohanumeric or vocal message text file under the form of a service message no call of relief users if failed no call acknowledgment The call on acknowledgment is done only if at least one call has been triggered after the alarm detection ALERT User Guide 5 57 Configurati
288. p driver to call a telephone number with automatic call forward The Beep driver can be used to call a telephonic number with automatic call forward after pick up to a given number call an operator to establish a voice communication with the central station for example The recommended configuration of the Beep driver is the following Remote pick up detection validated End address DTMF code Time before sending message 2 seconds Message header number to call back central station ALERT User Guide 8 21 Appendix 8 9 Fax driver This driver is used to drive the modem during a fax transmission and to format the transmitted message To configure the parameters of this driver select the line Fax in the Communication dialog box on Drivers tab then click on the Properties button Fax Driver Parameters Version 3 5 7 4 W Send all alarms in one report Cancel Fas Identifier 4 6 04 11 00 Help Page Header Header height from the top of the page 1 46 Header model tile ATF DAD ey WlekS5r1 Bin_Debug F asHeader rtf Browse Fax parameters lw Class 2 Foot height from the bottom of the page 50 a Resolution Foot model file RTF Fine 196 dpi OAD ev leks5r Bin_Debug F axF oot rtf Browse Me Poe C 2400 bites Hest pages C 4800 bitss s Header height from the top of the page 50 S600 bites Header model file RTF C 14400 bits s Dev Alet35r1 Ein _Debug F asHeader rt
289. peration has to be performed by one of the users of the new on call team at the time scheduled for the team changeover within a configurable deadline If the team changeover has not been performed when the deadline is reached a team changeover fault is signaled with possibility of alarm trigging Similarly at the end of the on call period if no other team is planned one of the users of the on call team has to clock out Failing which the team will remain on call beyond the planned period 6 30 Operation Team changeover GONTRAN Klaus gt lt iw Maintenance GON TRAN Klaus lt 19 00 ei Help Ok Select All __4 None Maximum delay for nest team changeover default C U minutes Team changeover The Team changeover selection designates a clock in operation the operator clocks in to begin its on call period After validation the user and its team will be on call for all the selected groups End on call The End on call selection designates a clock out operation The operator clocks out to signal that he leaves with its team and its on call time is over After validation nobody is on call for the selected groups Note The End on call operation is not required when a team replaces an other The changeover of a team A to a team B ends the on call time of the team A If the Team changeover mandatory mode is selected The End on call operation provokes the transition to the Waiting
290. pic contains information about operators e The GROUP topic contains information about the on call management e The ALARM topic contains information about alarms To reach the server DDE of Alert through a network from a remote computer it will be necessary to use the DDE share names that are recorded automatically by the server application gt ALERT_SYSTEMS for SYSTEM topic gt ALERT USERS for USER topic gt ALERT GROUPS for GROUP topic gt ALERT _ALARMS for ALARM topic The items belonging to each of these topics can be read by a simple request REQUEST transaction or by a request for advise ADVISE transaction Some topics can also be written POKE transaction The most usual format is the TEXT format When an item contains a list of values the values are separated by tabulations Alert can also process transactions using specific block formats XLTABLE INTOUCH BLOCKED DDE V2 The DDE interface of the ALERT server also accepts EXECUTE transaction on the SYSTEM topic See 8 13 Command interface DDE or Command line for the syntax of these commands Note the list of topics and items processed by the DDE interface of Alert is presented in the dialog box displayed by selecting the DDE server command of the menu ALERT User Guide 8 31 Appendix 8 12 2 SYSTEM topic The SYSTEM topic contains general items concerning the DDE protocol and items to control the Alert application 8 12 2 1 DDE p
291. ply ror HE ee ae eet Team changeover mandatory added to 4 group a Cancel Help This dialog box displays the list of operators attached to the group selected in the Group drop down list Group Name of the selected group If the group is attached to a station different from the local Station the name of this station is displayed in brackets Click on the arrow of the drop down list to select another group in the list of the existing groups User List List of all the definite operators user file To add an operator to the current group you can gt either select its name in the list then click the Add button 5 12 Configuration gt orclick on its name in the list then drag it into the list of the operators of the group by keeping the mouse button pressed release the button on the destination A click on the button Information or a double click in this list causes the form of the operator selected in the list to be displayed Group Operators List of operators belonging to the selected group The operators in brackets are the relief operators 11 of the group To set an operator as relief operator or set him back as main operator you can gt either select his name in the list then click on the Relief button gt or double click on this operator in the list To remove an operator of this list you can gt either select its name in the list then to click the Remove button gt or click on his n
292. provider have to be defined in the fields Login and Password e The SMTP server address field provides the network address of the mail server machine name such as mail compuserve com or a dotted number such as 128 56 22 8 e The field Your email address must contain the e mail address of the sender used for receipt acknowledgment and reports e The POP3 server address field provides the network address of the pop3 server used to get the received mails To be able to receive mails sent to the address Your email address for reports or receipt notifications the option Receive incoming mail must be checked the Mail user name and Mail password must be entered and the polling period of the pop3 server must be defined in minutes The Report subject field is a filter for selecting the emails which will create Alert reports these mails can contain attached files ALERT User Guide 8 27 Appendix All the e mails received with the subject given in Alarm subject will set reset or acknowledge an alarm in Alert The mail body should describe the alarm To do this the sender can use the following syntax The defined types are IDENT STATE PRIORITY ALPHAMESSAGE ALPHAMESSAGERST ALPHAMESSAGEACK NUMMESSAGE NUMMESSAGERST NUMMESSAGEACK CALLGROUP CALLGROUPRST CALLGROUPACK ALARMGROUP Type1 Value1 Type2 Value2 alarm identifier alarm state 0 reset 1 set 2 acknowledgement alarm priority 0 to 999 alphanumeric ala
293. r consultation and acknowledgment of alarms visualization and modification of schedules call numbers visualization and downloading of files remote supervision of the supervised application through synoptic screens and menus Alert is a complete and secured tool for alarm treatment e Alert is not only able to record and transmit the detected alarms but it can display some complementary information instructions contextual report established automatically at the time of the alarm dynamic values e Alert guarantees traceability of operations alarms detected and actions performed to handle them through the event log and the alarm table that includes for every alarm a memo displaying all the operations relative to the alarm and the alarm history that records all alarms and the associated treatment date duration acknowledgment integrating some statistical functions about failures and interventions On option the alarm and call history can be automatically exported in real time to an external database e Alert is able to perform an active supervision of its environment in order to detect an abnormal working of the supervised application or a dysfunction of the calling system modems This watchdog function can trigger calls like for events detected in the supervised application e Alert can guarantee a very high level of security while running in redundant mode double installation In this mode stations supervise each other onl
294. r Guide 5 37 Configuration gt Supervision of a watchdog variable Condition SUPVAR fi A If the variable does not change at least 1 unit during 3 seconds the event is activated e The Transitory option indicates the transitory or pulsed state of an event A transitory event passage of door is only logged when changing to event state not when returning to the normal state this last being implicit e The Reactivable option indicates that the event can be reactivated without passing by a return to the normal state A reactivable event is consigned to each change of state corresponding to an event condition This option is necessary for example when the tag receives messages and must start a treatment each time it receives a message e The Schedule button opens a dialog box to define time areas for event invalidation alarm masking or call inhibition See 5 11 2 Event schedule Link When the option is activated a link failure is set on tags with invalid values despite a successful link For example a bad quality in OPC If default is selected the option is set by the data server property Alarm e The Alarm enabled option indicates that the event will be processed as an alarm recording in the alarm table and alarm history acknowledgment required possibility of masking e The Priority parameter defines the priority level of the alarm The priority level determines the order of alarms in the a
295. r application is located on another station it is necessary to use the syntax of the NetDDE driver in service For the standard driver of Windows the service name must be under the form lt computer name gt NDDES The Network button allows the target computer to be browsed and the convenient name to be automatically generated The service name and the topic concerned must be then implicitly designated in the Group field by a DDE share name before registered on the computer in question Note 2 OPC server the available OPC servers can be browsed by clicking on the button OPC e Group Topic name or alias name of the DDE server application This name can be gt either selected in the topic list of the server application if it is able to supply this list by clicking on the arrow of the dropdown list gt or directly entered in the edit field if the name is not found in the list Note if the selected server application is located on another computer the name which must be entered here is the DDE share name of the concerned couple service topic e Item Reference of the tag to supervise This name can be gt either selected in the item list of the selected topic if the variable is DDE type and the server application is able to supply this list by clicking on the arrow of the dropdown list gt or directly entered in the edit field If the defined tag is Other type the name entered here is considered as a simple
296. r cannot be reached assures that a constant number of operators are warned 7 18 Options Call Management This group defines the default treatment options for call failures e Attempt number if call fails maximum number of call attempts to the number when the call failed no answer busy This number can be between 1 and 9 The time waited to try a new call depends on the type of failure In case of no answer or busy failure this time is that indicated by the parameter below timeout before new attempt It is reduced to 1 second if the modem does not detect the dial tone e Timeout before new attempt time delay waited after a call failure no answer or busy to try anew attempt in seconds By default this time is 60 seconds e Attempt number if call not acknowledged maximum number of calls of a number when the call succeeded but the operator did not acknowledge the call within the defined delay This number can be between 1 and 9 The call can be acknowledged locally or remote by telephone by SMS or from a client station e Timeout for call acknowledgment time delay waited for call acknowledgment when the called operator has been reached but without certainty SMS beeper pager This delay can be between 0 and 99 minutes the value 0 canceling any delay the call then always is considered as acknowledged ALERT User Guide 7 19 Options 7 6 Redundancy options To configure the redundancy options select the
297. r directly choose the sub driver of the wished connection then click on the Properties button In the case of the generic driver Generic email it is possible to add a new sub driver or to delete a defined sub driver To create a new driver click on the Add button To delete a sub driver select it in the installed drivers list then click on the Remove button After having created a new sub driver define its properties then validate by clicking on the OK button In the case of sub drivers it is only possible to modify the parameters of the selected driver 8 24 Appendix Generic Email Driver Driver Parameters Version 2 1 9 2 EC Installed drivers Add Generic Email Driver Global Full name Short name Generic Email Driver Generic Call attempt number 0 default Alert value Alarm Reset Acknowledgement Message to user The dialog box allows the configuration of the following parameters e The Full Name field gives the name of the sub driver that will appear in the driver list e The Short Name field gives the name of the driver in the configuration file after creation it can t be modified e The Trace option allows the recording in the event log of the messages sent to the email server e The Automatic call acknowledgment option when checked avoids having to call back Alert to confirm the email reception If this option is not checked the mail is sent with a request for a receip
298. r for each alarm turnover f Call all users of the team with f Call relief if not one of users ig advised f Call relief for each unadvised user Call Management Attempt number if call Fails 3 Timeout before new attempt seconds 60 Attempt number if call not acknowledged 2 Timeout for call acknowledgment mirn 5 ced in toe e Discard call if no team to call when alarm is activated This option defines the behavior of the Alert manager when an alarm is triggered during a period where there is no team to call no active team in the schedule or group in derogation state without derogation team If this option is validated the alarm is recorded in the alarm table but the call is discarded To the next valid on call time period or when exiting derogation state there will be no call for alarms already registered that they are acknowledged or no If this option is not validated the alarm is recorded in the alarm table with the corresponding call request To the next valid on call time period or when exiting ALERT User Guide Options derogation state the call will be automatically triggered except if the alarm in question were acknowledged meanwhile e New call if unacknowledged alarm is reactivated This option allows a new call to be retriggered when an unacknowledged alarm is reactivated If this option is not selected an unacknowledged alarm will not provoke a new call if it is reactivated after a r
299. r on reception of an incoming call It is possible to define several numbers by designating for each number the required response mode vocal modem or data To add a number to the list type the number in the edit field select the wanted response mode then click on the Add button To modify the response mode that is associated with a number select it in the dropdown list define the wanted response mode then click on the Add button To remove a number from the list select it in the dropdown list then click on the Remove button ALERT User Guide 5 81 Configuration 5 17 4 1 Advanced properties of an ISDN port This dialog box defines the Compatibility Information Profile CIP for vocal and fax ISDN communications and the parameters for detections of DTMF tones The selected profile predefines some standard parameters bearer capability low layer compatibility high layer compatibility The profile to select depends on the used ISDN connection Vocal communications Advanced ISDN setup vocal Protocal DT MEF detection Duration me i O C Vocal __ Cancel 40 Su 34 Wk Sais Help e Telephony default profile CIP code 16 coding CCITT speech transfer mode circuit mode 64kbits s G 711 protocol high layer compatibility CCITT with identification of type telephony e Vocal CIP code 1 coding CCITT speech transfer mode circuit mode 64kbits s G 711 protocol e Audio 3 1 kHz CIP code 4 coding C
300. ral operators to be called at a time This option validated by default is general and concerns all groups 5 14 Configuration 5 3 1 On call group properties This dialog box defines the properties of an on call group It can be called by clicking on the New button or on the Modify button of the dialog box of on call group configuration see above It also can be calledfrom the main screen by selecting the Properties or Add a group entry in the contextual menu associated with the displayed list group list or with the branch selected in the On Call Management sub tree of the main screen see 4 6 1 9 On call groups Group parameters f Eg Group Hame Fire Relief group Cancel none Ok Help Advanced Alarm Tone Sound File Call cycle teams of the group Default C Call one user for each alarm with turnover Call all active users of the team with Call relief if not ane of users is advised C Call relief for each unadvised user Team changeover management Team changeover mandatory The following properties can be configured Group name The group name must be defined 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters Relief group A group can be designated as relief group The group selected as relief group will be only called when there is no planned team to call in the schedule of the main group or when the call cycle of the main group failed If the choice none is select
301. ray Alarm inactive and acknowledged Blue Alarm masked 16 This list can be entirely customized selection of columns to display order width and title of columns alignment of the title or the column content To perform this customization position the mouse cursor on the column of which one wants to modify the presentation and click on the right button of the mouse Select then the adequate command in the displayed contextual menu The new configuration is automatically saved to be restored for the next sessions The contextual menu also allows to configure the printing format of the list and to export the list to the clipboard or a file with a configurable format The width of each column can be visually adjusted by positioning the mouse cursor on the concerned size bar of the title line then clicking and dragging the bar to get the wanted size This list can also be sorted according to the increasing or decreasing order of each of its columns To do this click on the title of the wanted column an arrow will indicate the increasing sense of the sorting Click again on the title of the column to reverse the sort order reversed arrow To perform a fast research for a value in the list select the research column by clicking on its title then scroll the list with the scroll bar a bubble displays the content of the selected column for the 1st line of the list corresponding to the scroll bar position 6 6 Operation When an alarm h
302. refix will be automatically added at head of the dial numbers having a length greater than the size defined here Character to suppress the dialing prefix The character defined here can be added at head of a dial number to notify that this number is an internal dial number and the dial prefix defined for the used line have not to be added This character will be never dialed Character to force the dialing prefix The character defined here can be added at head of a dial number to notify that this number is an external dial number and the dial prefix defined for the used line have to be added This character will be never dialed International prefix The international prefix of the country where is installed the software can be defined in this field It authorizes the definition of the telephonic numbers used by the application with the following format lt international prefix gt lt telephone provider prefix gt lt number gt ALERT User Guide 5 83 Configuration That numbers can be exchanged between stations located in different countries The international prefix of the station that dials the number is compared with the number international prefix to determine the format of the number that is really dialed For example if the number to dial is defined by 33 0 476041100 the dialed number will be 0476041100 if the defined international prefix is 33 or 33476041100 if the defined international prefix is not 33 Automatic s
303. resented by a name mask of a logical state of the tag or analogical comparison with a value in equality threshold condition To define a masking condition in reference to a X value the following operators can be used NONE oOo No masking condition is defined by default NOT EQUAL Masked if value is not equal to X EQUAL Masked if value is equal to X Masked if value is higher than X HIGHER SAME Masked valve is higher than orequaltoX AND Masked fa bit defined as 1 into xis 1intothevae The state of a bit is defined by the corresponding bit in the value X converted in hexadecimal Example for the bit mask 00010000 translate in hexadecimal 10h then type the value converted in decimal 16 The reference value X can be numeric positive or negative integer or float or alphanumeric A value is defined as numeric if it begins by one of the following characters 1 1 0 1 7 2 3 4 D 6 T 8 Q or 15 The state of a bit is defined by the corresponding bit in the value X converted in hexadecimal Example for the bit mask 00010000 translate in hexadecimal 10h then type the value converted in decimal 16 ALERT User Guide 5 47 Configuration If the reference value is alohanumeric only the operators NOT EQUAL and EQUAL are available the other operators being accepted but treated as EQUAL HIGHER OR SAME LOWER OR SAME or NOT EQUAL all the others The tested variable is that defin
304. restarting the application The Lock ALT and CTL ESC option validates the locking of the Windows commands to switch the tasks ALT TAB CTRL ESC This option forbids any user to switch to another Windows application Schedule Selection of the resolution used in the on call schedule When the resolution is decreased 1 4h gt 1 2 h gt 1 hour a confirmation message is displayed to warn the operator that the schedule is likely to be modified extension of time periods not aligned for the new resolution Colors Customization of colors representing the types of events in the event log and the state of alarms in the alarm table Select an alarm state from the Alarm log list or a type of event from the Event log list then click on the Choose button Select the desired color in the displayed palette The Default button restores the default configuration of the colors associated to alarm states and events Displayed station configuration filter Selection of the station to view This selection is only enabled when the local station first station is defined as a Centralization station Only the ALERT stations stations defined with a user having the station name and associated with an ALERT communication driver are proposed in the list The choice all gives access to the data of all stations If a station is selected the name of the selected station will be displayed in the status bar on the bottom of the main window
305. ric message The interface with the beep manager system is a DTMF interface with or without vocal server that interprets DTMF codes sent by the telephonic keyboard to identify the recipient operator operator address and to get the numeric message to transmit The Beep driver simulates this behavior by using a modem to call the Beep service if necessary and to transmit him the call beep request operator address numeric message using DTMF dialing The modem to use can be a simple dialer modem capable of transmitting DTMF codes without connection treatment of the character at number end to come back in command mode after dialing However if the beep system requires the call of a vocal server and therefore the remote pick up detection it is preferable to use a voice modem Otherwise if remote pick up can t be recognized one will suppose that the vocal server answers in a given time temporization To configure a driver based on the generic Beep driver select the driver in question in the Communication dialog box Drivers tab then click on the Properties button ALERT User Guide 8 19 Appendix Generic Beep Driver Parameters Version 1 3 32 bits Dial Humber Cancel W Remote pick up detection _ Cancel or time to wait for pick up ec Hel Mo message or message header only Hep W One call by message Address size mas 1 U Message size mas 1 0 Address Transmission Time before sendi
306. riggered as soon as the operator has released the line Listen to no acknowledged alarms that concern the operator one by one in the decreasing order of priorities and reverse chronological order Each time 7 is keyed the following alarm is transmitted A message signals the end of list The next 7 command returns in beginning of list Acknowledgement of the last alarm that was transmitted following a 7 command The acknowledgement is signaled by a message If there was no alarm to acknowledge or if the acknowledgment of alarms by telephone option was not validated see 7 7 1 Vocal Server options or if the callback option was forced and the actual communication is an incoming call a message is transmitted indicating that the acknowledgment has been denied A second pressure on this key provokes the acknowledgment of all alarms of the group of the selected alarm by the preceding 7 command On option the alarm acknowledgment can be directly commanded by pressing the key 8 then typing the identifier code of the alarm to acknowledge see 7 7 4 Usage of the vocal server Command to release the line no obligatory hang up being automatically detected but more slowly When the option explicit call acknowledgment is checked see 7 7 1 Vocal Server options the call is refused and a new call is immediately reiterated to a relief operator If the 9 key is pressed consecutively
307. rinting command in the displayed contextual menu 6 2 7 Exportation The current alarm table can be exported in a file or in the clipboard for copy it in a spreadsheet for example To perform this operation click in the list with the right button of the mouse then select the Export command in the displayed contextual menu In the displayed dialog box choose columns to export the export format header separator and the destination file or clipboard ALERT User Guide 6 9 Operation 6 3 Alarm history To display the alarm history or consult the statistics about alarms or interventions select the command History of the menu Operation or just click on the button El On the main screen to access to the alarm history select the History tab on the bottom of the screen General Supervision File Operation Configuration MODEM rene ETS Tags 9 By aes CS Toate ET Comment Start ventilation transfo 1 5 Fire 0 Call ended lal Start Force condenser TGBT 1 3 Fire lt Period i On Call al Station Central Station o a a o Print Report User Tall Group all Thu 072904 Export Alarm m pa FER HISTORY 9 07 QE DE TE NET uilding A at ventilation ee 1 5 ALT MAN Peter a m at i O4 35 O0 a2 7 29 07 08 35 29 Buildings Building Start ventilation transfo 1 p ALTMAN Peter 00 07 00 00 00 19 00 00 41 29 07 08 36 37 BuildingsBuilding Start ventilation transfo 1 B ALTMAN Pe
308. rm message alphanumeric message for alarm reset alphanumeric message for alarm acknowledgment numeric alarm message numeric message for alarm reset numeric message for alarm acknowledgment alarm call group created if not exist reset call group created if not exist acknowledgment call group created if not exist alarm alarm group created if not exist Only the IDENT field is mandatory The driver can manage only one alarm per mail Appendix 8 11 Alert driver This driver is used for the centralized management of alarms It allows the synchronization of remote Alert stations with one or several central Alert stations Driver configuration Alert Modem Version 1 2 7 0 Connection Lancel Link type Modem connection Help MW Automatic call acknowledgment M Traces in Alert MW Date and time updates enabled i Synchronization log file Call attempt number 5 0 default Alert value Download Path E AMAT ler D ownoads Browse The Connection group defines the parameters of the connection taken in charge by the driver e The Link type field defines the type of the link The content of this field cannot be edited and depends on the selected driver gt Alert Direct direct connection gt Alert Modem modem connection gt Alert Socket TCP IP connection e The extra parameters depend on the type of connection gt Inthe case of a direct link there are no extra parameters gt For a modem connectio
309. rms Time before hang up 60 ZEC Archive duration in days Alarm History 100 Logbook 100 Event Lag 100 Vocal messages 7 Automatic configuration backup Each at 0 00 Web Server Web Server activation Setup Login Logout Enable user commands without login Automatic logout timeout E min mea we ALERT User Guide 7 1 Options Starting Click on this button to define the working mode of the software at launching time see 7 1 1Starting parameters Title Bar This field defines the content of the title bar of the application maximum 40 characters The default title is ALERT Stations Mode of management of the stations gt The Alert stations option indicates that the stations defined in the application are real stations equipped with the Alert software for the alarm centralization and capable of managing a local on call organization in synchronization with the centralization station gt The Virtual stations option indicates that the stations defined in the application are virtual stations created to segment the data and or the on call management in meaning entities representation of remote sites companies trades Database export This group allows the real time export to an external database see 8 3 External database to be configured and activated or deactivated The commands of this group are only enabled when the database export option is validated b
310. rogress or in the list of pending calls When a call is acknowledged by an operator the reference of the call disappears from the list of calls in progress or pending calls If the call was in progress it is aborted Button Cancel Call Click on this button to abort the call without acknowledgment for the user who is selected either in the list of calls in progress or in the list of pending calls 6 13 Team changeover To declare the beginning or the end of his on call period clock in or out an operator can select the Team changeover command in the Operation menu or simply click on the button All Remark A team changeover also can be directly ordered from the contextual menu displayed when clicking with the mouse right button on the icon of the team to change in the tree of the main then selecting the command Team changeover or End on call see 4 6 1 10 Teams According to the selected management mode of the team changeover see 5 3 1 On call group properties this operation can be required or not e f the Team changeover mandatory option is not checked default mode the team changeover is performed automatically according to the planned on call schedule A team changeover operation can be forced but only in the case of a changeover made in advance before the end of the planned period or an early end of the on call period e Ifthe Team changeover mandatory option is checked the team changeover o
311. rotocol items gt TOPICS gt SYSITEMS gt STATUS gt FORMAT gt CONVCOUNT gt ADVISECOUNT List of topics supported by the DDE server List of items supported under the SYSTEM topic Current status of the application INIT processing initialization READY in normal operational mode DEMO in demonstration mode List of supported formats Current number of DDE conversations established with the SYSTEM topic Current number of advise transactions with items of the SYSTEM topic 8 12 2 2 Application control items gt SHOW gt CLOSE gt ALERTLOCK gt VALPORT gt LINKSTATUS Command to display the Alert window O Hide the Alert window Display of the Alert window with normal size Display of the Alert window as icon Display of the Alert window as maximized full screen Alert window always visible topmost window O 1 2 3 g Command to close the Alert application 1 Close if no other DDE conversation is established 2 Unconditional closure Working status of the station calls transmitted or not o The station is active Alert led is green calls are normally transmitted 1 The station is inactive Alert led is red only calls concerning no redundant events are processed This status can be controlled by a client application to force the working status of the station redundancy controlled by a supervisor for example Number of valid communication ports configured and avai
312. roup all Excell T est xls 4larms IL1C2 Central Stat BuildingsB Fire Start Force condenser TGBT Excell est slalla LIC Central Stat Fire Start ventilation transfo 2 EscellT estslaj larme LI C4 Central Stat Fire Start Force condenser TGBT EscelllT est xls 4larms IL1C5 Central Stat Buildings B Fire Start Bat 510 backup Excell T est xls 4larmns L1C6 Central Stat Fire Start Force condenser TGBT Excell T estxls 4lanms LICY Central Stat Buildings B Maintenanc Ventilation transto room 1 AB HetSentinel OPCServer 1 SERYER OnLine Central Stat Maintenanc Server is down Reference This group defines the reference of the tag to add the list of tags to supervise This reference can be of the following type e DDE tag issued from a DDE server application e OPC tag issued from an OPC server application e Other other tag updated by an external application or by a specific mediator According to its type a reference is defined by the following parameters e Server Name or alias name of the DDE or OPC server application containing the tag This name can be gt either selected in the list of the actives applications offering DDE services if the tag is DDE type by clicking on the arrow of the dropdown list gt or automatically set by clicking on the Network button see the remark below gt or directly entered in the edit field DDE or OPC server ALERT User Guide 5 29 Configuration Note 1 DDE server if the DDE serve
313. roups the on call schedule and the tags Validation Transmission To begin the synchronization click on the Send gt gt button Clicking on the OK button exits the dialog box with recording of the list of synchronization options for a later transmission 6 12 List of calls in progress To examine the current calls state or to locally acknowledge a call select the Calls in progress command of the Operation menu or just click on the button s a Current Calls F1 X Groups to Call Help Fire Users to Call Active Calls Peter HENRY LOM 1 Orange Pending Calls Peter ALTMAN Wait available port This dialog box is modeless this means that the user can continue to use the others functions of the application and is updated in real time Groups to Call List of all the on call groups for which at least a call was required Ist column name of the group ALERT User Guide 6 29 Operation 2nd column number of alarm call requests followed by the priority level of the most important active alarm Active Calles List of the calls in progress Ist column name of the called user 2nd column port driver name used for the call Pending Calls List of the suspended or waiting calls Ist column name of the user to call 2nd column cause of suspension or waiting Button Ca Acknowledgment Click on this button to acknowledge the call for the user who is selected either in the list of calls in p
314. s Properties Paste Add one or more station s first copied General options with the name copy lt n gt of lt name of the copied station gt Properties Edition of the properties of the root icon change General options Edition of the general options of the applications see 7 1 General options Associated view menu General Supervision Open Opens the station in the tree see below oe Acknowledgement Acknowledgment of all the alarms ofthe Central Station Diibou selected stations Open Synchronize Synchronization of the selected stations Acknowledgment with the local main station see 6 11 Co Station synchronization PY FRS Copy Copy data of the selected stations to the clipboard for duplication by a later paste dass on the root of the tree Delete Deletion of the selected stations If data are attached to the Stations tags tag groups users on call groups a confirmation is required The local station first station cannot be deleted Rename Change the name of the station Properties Edition of the properties of the station see 5 12 Station properties User Interface 4 6 1 2 Station Each station branch displays in its sub tree the whole information relative to the corresponding station from 2 main branches a supervision branch for the data owned by the station and an on call management branch for the on call management specific to the station For each statio
315. s One or several files can be attached to the report The Attached files dropdown list contains the list of files attached to the report Click on the Add button to add a file to the list of attached files Click on the Remove button to remove the selected file from the list of attached files Click on the Open button to open the file selected in the list of attached files The Open action is defined by the association that has been done for the type of the selected file following the file extension ALERT User Guide 6 21 Operation 6 7 Consultation of operator s properties At any moment an operator can consult his own operator record and modify some parameters To access to his file the operator must select the command User record of the Operation menu He can do it easily by clicking on the button Fal User record Identification Hame First Hame HENRY Peter Cancel Language Class Fran ais France xl 2 DH duty substituted by Dial numbers Number amp ddress Calls Ack Orange 0756342595 3 E0 s Vocal 0756342595 3 60 s Auto 405 3 60 z Auto Schedule This dialog box displays the properties of the operator who is logged on the application The basic properties of the operator name first name language class station creation and call options cannot be modified at this level See 5 1 1 User properties 6 22 Operation 6 8 Definition of substi
316. s In this configuration no command is authorized nor can be authorized e Access Level The access level associated with a user profile allows to assure compatibility with the old versions by associating automatically with the defined level the corresponding basic class It also allows to keep a permanent link between an operator and a basic class in the case where the defined class for the operator would be deleted It can finally be used by the ALERT User Guide 5 9 Configuration external applications to globally determine the rights of an operator terminal server for example The access level of a class is not modifiable for the 3 basic classes e Option Access to all stations When this option is checked state by default the user attached to the defined class has access to the data of all stations schedule alarm table alarm history When this option is not checked the user has only access to its station excepted if he is declared as attached to all stations see advanced parameters of the user properties e Option Access to al groups When this option is checked state by default the user attached to the defined class has access to all the on call groups even those to which he does not belong schedule alarm table alarm history If this option is not checked the user has only access to the on call groups to which he does belong e Main Menu Selection of authorized commands of the main menu that will b
317. s rt Options Activate Masimize window CA Close on Exit W Minimize window icon Reactivate on closure Alwanes visible List of defined applications The list on the top left of the dialog box displays the list of external applications associated with ALERT Click on the Add button to add an application to the list by browsing files for the wanted application Click on the Delete button to remove an application from the list Option Menu Text This option validates the insertion of the selected application in the Operation menu The text that is displayed in the menu is the one entered in the associated edit field When this option is validated the selection of the corresponding menu command will activate the application or place it to the foreground if it was already active Command Line This is the command line that will be used to launch the application This line must contain the full path of the application if its directory is not in the default path Initial Directory The initial directory is that to use by the selected application ALERT User Guide 5 87 Configuration Arguments The arguments are optional it could be the name of a document Excel sheet to be opened by the application Option Launch at Start Up This option causes the automatic activation of the selected application at ALERT start up Option Close on Exit This option causes the automatic closure of the selected application
318. s can be supervised either through a permanent connection or a periodic reading DDE variables can be punctually read on detection of an alarm in the group The periodic reading of a variable allows an active surveillance of the application and the detection of any problem at the level of the connection or of the application itself A tag defined as event or alarm has in addition the following attributes e An event condition The tag is declared as event when its associated event condition is TRUE This condition can be the change into a determined state the threshold overtake high or low or a mask on a logical state of the tag event bit An event can be defined as transitory pulsed event In that case the return to normal state is implicit and not handled A weekly schedule allows the definition of periods for event invalidation alarm masking or call inhibition e A multi format message An event can be associated to a numerical alohanumeric and vocal message The numerical message is only used for alarms in order to identify the alarm when calling operators provided with a numeric pager The alphanumeric message is used to identify the event in the event log It is also used for variables declared as alarms to identify them in the alarm table and to inform the operator provided with an alphanumeric pager a fax a printer or a remote terminal This alohanumeric message can be formatted in order to include some complementary Sta
319. s checked the client station will automatically try to connect again to the selected server in case of failure at the connection time or in case of unwanted disconnection If several servers have been connected with the Auto connect option the client station will automatically search for the first active server 4 2 User Interface 4 2 User interface Once identified see 4 1 Login the operator is in front of the following screen some menus or buttons can be masked according to the user profile and the configuration of this one General SU Perv Shor Tj mili xs amx sels Superson Abi amp 4 A Building A 5 Central station Mle e ea e A Le Se por A OT Start ventilation transie 1 Fire 1 Cal in progress i Tags Start Force condenser TGBT 1 Fre ff Exod Testas Arms Start ventilation transfo 7 Fire 0 Cal ended oF netsentinelopeserver 1 Start Force condenser TGET 2 rs Groups Start Rat 510 backup Buildings Fs Cusilctinve A ag i h Gn ie cp 4 Mo ER ES I ES Mainienance E High power Active haar Low power ALTMAN Pee Mechanical IET On Call Management anale ER nn y RE T 8 Users 8 Groups amp Maintenance JM Tu E BATMAN Petes ay GONTEAN Kaus a r JL 1 1 ft LOL OL _U it it it BECLRGEDES Willan e GUARD ROOM W ALTMAN Peter Es MARTIN Roger dr BOURGEOIS Willams 2 F Fire amp ALTMAN Peter
320. sceccsteccsactessssccsectessccteccedcesssess 2 10 3 INSTALLATION eiscecccssuccescscscscscesssucesievesccsssseesessssscessec D 3 1 REQUIRED CONFIGURATION ccccsccsccsccccccccccccccccccccccccccccecee 3 1 3 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccess 3 2 B21 sSlaNGahe OP SerVEl Sa OM edre e eeann eaaa EEn ea En e aAA 3 2 322 dient Sioe a a A A 3 2 3 3 ACCESSKEY cescassisvocaccosscccatsncccacsesescstavsvecsuscecssseessecsosesesseess 3 3 De ATOM A RON a EEEE bre 3 3 3 3 2 SOftWAre KEY nn nn nn nn 3 3 A USER INTERFACE sssesssssscrsscscvesecscsssedencsssteacsipuascasssceas 4 AN OG Nicssswcvecesssttesccssevecessasestcoewsvecsscaucencsscusetessssesteuswseusesssses 4 1 AN Standardor Server tatios sere aa Na tee chcceess 4 1 A k2 ClI NES ATOME a A NS E 4 2 AZ USERINTERFACE vcsesiessccssccevececsdeccctestescccdectetescccdessenectwesscsses 4 3 MS INIENUS E E E E 4 4 MA TOOLBAR wssesenevsctoscsecesscceversssavscccseceudeccessecscsecersdecscssaieveseuss 4 7 AS STATUS BARS siciscevsccevacsssausscsncsesstecsscsstvveassecucscsvecevecesasesssece 4 8 ALERTALERT User Guide User Guide i Summary AG MAINSCREEN ssccscacsccsscacessccnsdesscctavsctessacsswcacedccesevedesseseavessne 4 O 4 6 1 Topographical representation ss 4 10 4 6 1 1 NOOO Uae cig cs rast sees c ee NN ed ee 4 12 4 6 1 2 SAVO aa ecsntanets vines tebske deena sees eee eee eee 4 13 4 6 1 3 SUDEV STO LS aie di ide 4 14 4 6 1 4 JEES S E RE RU
321. screen is made up of threes windows and a browsing bar The left window of the main screen displays a topographical representation of the whole application under the form of a tree of stations with for each station the corresponding sub tree for the representation of the supervised data Supervision and the organization of the staff in charge of the surveillance on call management Graphical symbols allow the system state to be showed at one sight alarms link failures unreachable on call groups active teams The right window located on the top part of the screen displays a synoptic view of the entity selected in the tree station list of supervised tags tag groups operators on call group team According to the views graphical symbols allow an immediate identification of the active or unacknowledged alarms off duty or relief users active or unreachable teams etc The graphical representation of each view can be modified list small or large icons For each view represented under a list form it is possible to select the columns to display by clicking with the mouse right button on the header line of the list The size and the order of the columns can be modified by respectively dragging column separators or column headers The right window located on the bottom part of the screen displays various application screens that can be selected by tabs or by the display commands of the main menu or buttons of the toolbar
322. se the Modem icon of the Windows Control Panel Note for a better control of the modem especially in vocal mode it is often more advisable to not use the TAPI interface and rather to configure the physical COM port it is connected to with the type modem list Physical Ports Physical ports COM This list contains the list of physical ports of the PC If the check box display only available COM ports is not checked this list contains the ports COM1 to COM64 except those that are already used by the application If the check box display only available COM ports is checked this list only contains the available ports hardware detected and not in use Option Display only available COM ports When this box is checked the physical Port list only contains the available ports hardware detected on the PC and not used by another application The polling of available ports being capable to disturb communications already established by other applications using drivers no compatible Windows this choice must be done on good grounds ISDN Ports CAPIPORT This list displays the ISDN controllers installed on the PC and compatible with the CAPI 2 interface ALERT User Guide 5 69 Configuration 5 17 2 Configuration of a modem TAPI This dialog box defines the working parameters of the selected TAPI modem Line Properties Ling Conexant D480 MOC Y 9x Modem On incoming call 3 Cancel Mo response ae
323. selected type of period 6 3 2 Choosing scope of analysis History and statistics can concern subsets of alarms or operators according to a combination of possible selection Selection of a station If a station is selected the alarm history and statistics will only concern alarms attached to this station For intervention statistics only interventions concerning alarms attached to this station will be taken in account Selection of a tag group If a group is selected the alarm history and statistics will only concern alarms belonging to this group For intervention statistics only interventions concerning alarms of this group will be taken in account Selection of an on call group If an on call group is selected only the alarms concerning this group will be taken in account in the alarm history and statistics Concerning intervention statistics only interventions of operators belonging to this group will be taken in account Selection of an operator If an operator is selected only alarms acknowledged by this operator will be taken in account in the alarm history and statistics Concerning intervention statistics only interventions of the operator in question will be taken in account Selection of an alarm If an alarm is selected the alarm history and statistics will only concern this alarm For intervention statistics only interventions concerning this alarm will be taken in account To select an alarm click on the butt
324. sessesesseoseseeseeseoseoseseeseeseesesseseess 5 68 5 17 2 Configuration of a modem TAPI ns 5 70 5 17 3 Configuration of a physical port COM nr 5 71 5 17 3 1 Configuration of modem parameters rss 5 74 5 17 3 2 Configuration of vocal modem parameters ss 5 76 5 17 3 3 Configuration of GSM PCS modem parameters 5 78 5 174 Configuration of ISDN controller CAPI ns 5 80 5 17 4 1 Advanced properties of an ISDN port nes 5 82 5 18 DIALING PARAMETERG ccccccsccccsccscccccccsccsccsccccscsscssccsescsses 83 5 1 9 COMMUNICATION DRIVERS 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000006 5 85 3 19 Aadma drive RAR TR NM ON RER tones 5 86 5 20 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS cccccccccscccccccccscccccccsccccsccssccssces D 8 7 5 21 PRINTING CONFIGURATION cccccsccsccscccccccsccsccccsccscssccsescsses J OO 5 22 SAVING RESTORING CONFIGURATION cccccsccsccscescescescesees DOO 5 22 1 SAVING A CONMGULATION sans asin nan ani 5 89 5222 Restoring a CONTOUlALION essaient 5 90 5 223 ANEW COhIQU ATOME RON nn nain 5 92 6 OPERA LION sicsscasscccsascncctcescnscesciscacksaccoescsuneescersatesvecs Om 6 1 ON CALL SCHEDULE 06000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000006 6 1 a fal ees OA V4 ET F122 LOTO ennenen de IO TEE ECR 6 2 6 2 ACIVve cr ee eo a OP ile 6 2 ALERTALERT User Guide User Guide iii Summary ORS DEFIMIEION lt OF holiday days sereen 6 2 6kA Copy OF n On callDrOOrAME Lanta 6 3 6 1 5 IMOCITICATIOMION TINS schedule
325. sic directory Selection The restoration can be partial by selecting some of the following subsets 5 90 Configuration gt Parameters Parameters of the application The environment parameters and the configuration files ini of the selected mediator and used communication drivers are restored only when the option load environment parameters is selected gt Supervision Configuration files of the supervision taglist xml taggrouplist xml and the text and audio messages associated with gt Groups amp Teams Configuration file of the on call management userlist xml grouplist xml teamlist xml holiday xml group schedules groupschedxxx xml Option forced with the Supervision option gt Programmed calls Configuration file of programmed calls and synchronization calls with the remote stations progcalllist xml gt Telematic server Configuration file of the server application Alertpro ini gt Alarm history Restore all the alarm history gt Eventlog Restore the event logs gt Reportlog Reports recorded in the logbook gt Icons Icons defined in the tree of the main screen Load environment parameters This option allows the restoration of the application parameters to be limited to the parameters independent of the environment When this option is not checked the following parameters are not restored gt selection and configuration of communication ports gt communication drivers gt
326. sked by Priority E Alam C Normal Alarm Processing Reset Processing Acknowledgment Processing Actions Acton Notice Call Group I El Message 271 tart force condenser TOET 2 Numeric Code 257 Format Associated Text File instructions Erwe Type The type of tag defines the usage of the tag in the application 5 34 Configuration Variable Simple tag only declared to be able to get its value and that can be referenced in an alarm message see Message format or a contextual instruction file to display its current value Event Variable associated with an event condition for recording of the changes of state of the event in the event log A list of actions to execute calls of groups or operators commands can be associated with each change of state of the event set reset An event is processed like an alarm if the alarm enabled option is checked Acknowledg Variable associated to an event condition but used to bring up an acknowledgment request for the associated alarm group from a supervised device acknowledgment hard button or through a communication driver If there is no alarm group designated for the variable the field message must contain a valid operator name This name will be used to search for and to acknowledge the oldest group in alarm for which a call has been transmitted to the operator in question See note on the bottom of the page Option Not redundant A
327. ssee 6 10 File transfer To transmit files to one or more operators select the Send a message command from the Operation menu or just click on the button then select the tab File Transfer m Call sending 7x Send message File Transfer Stations Addressees User List Addressee s LAGARDE Hans Remove gt gt f Send SS i gt Add Files Remove Files Receive File path on remate machine Files to trangter larndef mdb CAMMI Alerts B ages Slarmdet mdb Alarmnlog Idb CMM alert ases 4larmlog Idb Ok Cancel Help Addressees The list on the left top of the dialog box displays the users configured with a number associated with driver allowing the file transfer Email Alert Modem Alert Socket Alert Direct To select a user to reach you can e either select his name in the list then click on the Add button e or click on his name in the list then drag it over the list of addressees 6 26 Operation A double click in this list displays the properties of the selected user In case of error to remove a user from the list you can e either select his name in the list then click on the Remove button e orclick on his name in the list then drag and drop it over the exit icon File selection The files to upload are designated in the transfer list The right column describes the full path of the files on the local station The left column gives the name and the path that will have the
328. ssibility to set an alarm in case of dysfunction of one of these systems e Management of an alarm table containing a time stamped list of actual and past alarms with their acknowledgment state Every alarm recorded in the table is associated to a memo containing the alarm description parameters and current state instructions and contextual information generated at event time as well as the history of the different operations performed to alert operators warned operators call failures acknowledgments event reset Comments and reports can be edited about the alarms present in the alarm table e Management of an alarm history containing the recording of all past alarms and their treatment date and hour of detection failure duration name of the operator who has acknowledged it its reaction and intervention time Possibility of consultation or edition of comment or reports about the recorded alarms The alarm history integrates some daily weekly and monthly statistical functions on alarms by group or for a particular alarm number of failures total failure duration mean failure duration It also integrates some daily weekly and monthly statistical functions on operator interventions number of interventions mean time of reaction mean time of intervention e Management of an event log containing a time stamped trace of all the events user logins alarms calls acknowledgments etc This event log can be printed ALERT User Guide 1
329. ssion parameters gt The Class 2 option forces the fax modem in class 2 without prior test in class 1 gt The vertical resolution to use The high resolution choice corresponds to a vertical resolution of 196 points per inch if this option is not selected the normal resolution is used 98 points per inch gt The selection of the bit rate used by the modem This bit rate depends on the modulation supported by the fax modem used 2400 bits s V27 ter 4800 bits s V27 ter 9600 bits s V29 or V17 14400 bits s V33 or V17 The More button gives access to the configuration of communication parameters baud rate format parity that will be used to call a fax For more information consult the online help of the corresponding dialog box ALERT User Guide 8 23 Appendix 8 10 Email driver This driver can be used either to send common emails or to transmit messages to pagers or mobile phones smart messages via an email server It can also be used to create Alert reports The email report sender must be one of the Alert operators with his email address as his active call number In the case of a common email the receiver address is specified in the number field associated with the Email driver in the form of the concerned user The message body that will be transmitted will contain the alarm or service message followed by the contents of the text file eventually attached Depending on the message type alarm or service t
330. ssued from the same data server local or distant are gathered in a branch of the tree structure allowing to visually identify a problem of connection with a server and to perform specific operations on a server start stop polling acknowledgment For each data server it is possible to define a list of redundant servers able to ensure the data supply in the event of failure of the main server or of the previous redundant server in the list Redefinition of the organization of the functional groups a group can now contain at the same time groups old grouping and tags This organization makes it possible to define tags in all the levels of a tree structure of groups Extension of the client OPC interface for a full integration of specificities of the OPC interfaces Data Access V2 and Alarm amp Event New mediator OPC allows the static importation of the data to be supervised while profiting from the possibilities offered by the OPC Data Access V2 specification of properties attached to a variable to retrieve automatically all information associated with an alarm message priority This new mediator allows also the dynamic importation of alarms by the automatic creation of alarms at the time of their activation according to preconfigured filters Improvement of the management of the operator call numbers unlimited list of call numbers customizable recovery options on the level of each number graphical weekly schedule of the numb
331. t mask 00010000 translate in hexadecimal 10h then type the value converted in decimal 16 ALERT User Guide 5 45 Configuration defined as acknowledgment condition That supposes that the supervised application is able to interpret the write of value in the item in question like an acknowledgment command gt If the definite value is not numeric the acknowledgement is required for acknowledgment conditions EQUAL HIGHER SAME LOWER SAME by transmission of the associated string and for the other conditions by transmission of an empty string gt If the definite value is numeric the following treatment will be made in function of the acknowledgment condition e EQUAL HIGHER SAME or LOWER SAME Transmission of the associated value e NOT EQUAL or HIGHER Transmission of the value 1 e LOWER Transmission of the value 1 e AND Transmission of the result of LOGICAL OR between the current value of the variable and the mask defined by the associated value e NOT AND Transmission of the result of LOGICAL AND between the current value of the variable and the inverse of mask defined by the associated value Reference of acknowledgment item This group defines the item of the supervised application which contains the acknowledgment information in reading and if the option Send acknowledgments is validated the control of acknowledgments in writing By default the reference of the event tag is proposed Alarm acknow
332. t notification The call is acknowledged when the receipt is received by Alert or if the user call back Alert e The value of the Call attempt number field indicates the number of call attempts for the driver in case of failure If the value is 0 le number of attempt will be the one defined in Alert call options The check boxes concerning the message Format define allow the indication or not of the friendly name of the sender and recipient in their address The tabs allow the selection of the type of message Alarm Reset Acknowledgment or User message to modify the parameters that are specific to each type of message e The Mail subject field contains the subject of the email to use when sending the message according to the selected tab The subject can contain fields that will be dynamically replaced at sending time This fields are the following amp T message type alarm reset or acknowledgement amp D alarm date and time ALERT User Guide 8 25 Appendix amp M alarm message amp R alarm name amp C numeric code amp P alarm priority amp G alarm group amp V alarm value amp S station where the alarm occurred amp A alarm call group amp J list of attached files e The Priority selection defines the priority of the message according to the selected tab e The option Attach a RTF file allows a formatted file for alarm description to be attached to the mail The attached file is formatted following a model file
333. t to use to play or record the voice messages The proposed formats are those that are described in the file modem lst for the selected voice modem Silence Detection Period Maximum elapsed time without receiving any ADPCM data in voice receive mode Silence Sensitivity Tuner Selects the silence sensitivity tuner in voice receive mode DTMF tone detection Validation of detection of DTMF tone gt Transmission during voice message transmission 5 76 Configuration gt Reception during voice message recording gt Command mode in command mode neither transmission neither reception Ringback goes away timer Time between the moment where the ringback cadence stops once detected and the moment where the modem assumes that the remote station has gone off hook By default this time is 7 seconds 70 It is possible to reduce it in order to minimize the time waited for the welcome message when an operator is called but with the risk to detect false line pick ups Ringback never appeared timer Time the modem will spend looking for an initial ringback If ringback is not detected within this interval the modem will assume that the remote station has gone off hook By default this time is 10 seconds 100 It is possible to reduce it in order to minimize the time waited for the welcome message when an operator is called but with the risk to detect false line pick ups Deadman Timer Period of time in seconds which if expire
334. tag can be defined of non redundant type to specify in the case of an installation of 2 stations in redundancy that this tag is specific to the local station and that the automatic procedure of synchronization of the redundant stations should not recopy it on the distant station Moreover for the tag of the event type associated with a call group action the activation of the non redundant event will always trig the call of the group whatever is the activation status of the station Station The station defines a subset of the application corresponding to a specific entity geographical site or organisational company trade The definition of a station makes it possible to separately treat subsets of tags and operators with all associated information on call schedule alarm table alarm history event log By default the tags are attached to the local station first station displayed in the main screen Group The group referred in this dialog box is the basic functional group to which the variable is attached A functional group allows tags concerning a specific entity machine room category to be grouped It makes it possible to organize and visualize alarms by groups alarm table alarm history and to be able to execute certain treatments on the level of the groups acknowledgment masking Statistics Usage of an acknowledgment type tag When the tag is type acknowledgment the change of state of the tag to th
335. ted to the selected position 6 2 1 Selection of displayed alarms The Station dropdown list selects the alarms attached to a specific station The choice selects all alarms The On Call dropdown list selects the alarms which concern a specific on call group The choice selects all alarms The Group dropdown list selects the alarms attached a specific tag group The choice selects all alarms The No Ack Active and Unmasked check boxes select the type of alarms to display in the list The Listen checkbox validates when checked the automatic listening of associated vocal messages alarm message and possible vocal instructions on selection of an alarm in the list ALERT User Guide 6 7 Operation 6 2 2 Alarm acknowledgment Select in the list a no acknowledged alarm and click on the Ack button or directly double click on the representative line of the alarm This button is not validated grayed button when there is no selected alarm or when the selected alarm is already acknowledged If calls are in progress for the alarm in question the call cycle concerning this alarm is aborted An acknowledged alarm change of color and the operator s name having proceeded to the discharge is displayed in the list with the date and the hour of the acknowledgment To acknowledge all alarms of a functional group or of an on call group select the wanted group and then click on the Ack All button If no group is selected Station On
336. ter 00 00 07 297 07 08 38 55 Serer i down 1 ALERT 00 00 37 00 00 38 m Alarms Fail Number 4 Total failure time 00 08 37 Mean failure time 00 02 52 Interventions Intervention Number E Mean reaction time 00 01 50 Mean intervention time 00 01 33 FRA Schedule Alarms History ALERT System Thursday July 29 2004 09 39 This screen presents alternately e The alarm history e The alarm statistics e The intervention statistics Select the wanted presentation in the dropdown list on the top right of the screen Whatever the chosen presentation the history and statistic screen always contains three parts e The high part of the screen displays the different selectors that can be used to select the wanted history or statistic as well as editing comments and reports printing and export commands e The median part of the screen contains the list that displays the history or statistics according to the done selection Operation e The low part of the screen contains global statistical counters concerning the done selection 6 3 1 Choosing period to analyze History and statistics can be done over 3 periods e Daily e Weekly e Monthly Click on the corresponding radio button day week or month to select the wanted period Choose then in the dropdown list below the calendar period to analyze This period is displayed in calendar days in calendar week beginning day end day or in calendar month according to the
337. ters of the GSM PCS modem see 5 17 3 3 Configuration of GSM PCS modem parameters Carrier detect DCD Validation of the processing of the carrier detection signal DCD of the V24 junction to automatically release the line when this signal falls down Button Modem parameters Click on this button to have access to the configuration of specific parameters of the modem see 8 5 17 3 1 Configuration of modem parameters Maximum communication time This time defines the maximum duration of a communication in seconds After this time the modem is automatically disconnected If this time is set to 0 there is no limit for the communication time Connect detect DSR Validation of the processing of the DSR signal of the V24 junction as an active connection indicator of an external messaging system Communication driver Selection of the communication driver used on the connection This drop down list selects the communication driver that will process the data exchanges on the concerned port When the message processor is active the treatments that have been defined for a serial link can also be selected ALERT User Guide 5 73 Configuration 5 17 3 1 Configuration of modem parameters This dialog box defines the specific properties of the connected modem Hayes Modem parameters HE Commands ioe rit string shai Su lie __ Cancel Dial ATDT Hang up AT HU Hep Oniginate connection A
338. tervention Time between the alarm acknowledgment and its return to normal state in seconds If the alarm is reset before its acknowledgment the intervention time is not taken in account and is represented This list can be customized and sorted 7 The following columns can be added Code Numerical code associated with the alarm tag Reference Reference of the alarm tag On call Group Name of the on call group associated with the alarm Value Value of the alarm tag at alarm time C Comment indicator R Report indicator Reset Date and time of the alarm reset 7 This list can be entirely customized selection of columns to display order width and title of columns alignment of the title or the column content To perform this customization position the mouse cursor on the column of which one wants to modify the presentation and click on the right button of the mouse Select then the adequate command in the displayed contextual menu The new configuration is automatically saved to be restored for the next sessions The contextual menu also allows to configure the printing format of the list and to export the list to the clipboard or a file with a configurable format The width of each column can be visually adjusted by positioning the mouse cursor on the concerned size bar of the title line then clicking and dragging the bar to get the wanted size This list can also be sorted according to the increasing or decreasing order of
339. tic information group priority of alarm or dynamic data value of associated tags The vocal message is used to identify the event locally on the PC on option and for tags defined as alarms to identify them by telephone This message can be recorded by microphone or by telephone or synthesized automatically from the formatted alphanumeric message if the vocal synthesis from the text option is available 2 2 Functionning e An action list The activation of an event its reset to normal state or the acknowledgment of an alarm can trig the execution of a predefined list of actions call of one or several on call groups call of designated operators execution of a command sequence execution of a script of the message processor activation of an application vocal message on the local Station For an alarm the call of an on call group results in the trigger of a call cycle to the operators who belong to the group and who are currently on duty according to the group schedule By default this call will require a call acknowledgment in order to suspend the call cycle If the call does not succeed for certain operators it can be resumed to relief operators The call can be delayed in order to filter an event that will be treated as an alarm only if it persists a minimum time a prolonged power failure for example A tag defined as alarm furthermore has the following attributes e A priority level The priority level characterizes t
340. tically hang up If this value is null the number of attempts is unlimited Identifier waited length This value defines the number of digits waited to identify the operator 0 to 4 3 by default If this value is null the identification procedure is suppressed The operator immediately has access to all commands of the vocal server Station identifier waited length This value defines the number of digits waited to identify the station 0 to 4 O by default If this value is null the station identification procedure is suppressed This identification is needed only on the centralization stations The operator must enter the identifier of the station followed by his own identifier Time out for identifier entry This time can be between 10 and 180 seconds When this timeout expires without having received a valid user identifier the telephone line is automatically hang up Time between message repetitions If the option identification before playing messages is validated the welcome message is cyclically repeated with a pause between each transmission that corresponds to the value specified here 7 24 Options If the option identification before playing messages is not validated the alarm messages are cyclically repeated with a pause between each transmission that corresponds to the value specified here The value 0 invalidates the repetition process Other options e Limited access on incoming call force call back
341. tion 2 link failure with redundant station gt ALARMLOCK 0 if no on call group is in derogation state 1 if at least one on call group is in derogation state In writing the value 1 forces all groups in derogation state gt GROUPCOUNT Number of defined functional groups gt GROUPLIST List of functional groups gt ALARMACK Command to acknowledge an alarm under the form AlarmRef lt Tab gt User AlarmRef is the identifier of the alarm to acknowledge User is the name of the operator who acknowledge the alarm The part lt Tab gt User can be omitted in which case the alarm is acknowledgement anonymously gt ALARMCOUNT Number of alarms in the alarm table gt ALARMLIST Alarm table read only This table is represented bar a list of lines having the format defined below for the items ALARM N The ALARM topic also contains an item for each alarm of the alarm table This item is identified by the name ALARM N the value N representing the index of the alarm in the table starting from 0 the maximum value being equal to the value of ALARMCOUNT item minus one For read operations an alarm item is represented by a line of 10 fields separated by tabulations and ended by carriage return CR Field 1 jf inactive alarm if active alarm Field 2 Date Time of alarm format DD MM HH MM SS Field 3 Alarm identifier Field Field 5 Date Time of acknowledgment DD MM HH MM if not acknowledged alarm Field 6 Name
342. tion and the selected filter of alarm status By default the masked alarms are not displayed in the table ALERT User Guide 6 5 Operation This list contains 8 columns by default P Priority level of the alarm Date Alarm time Station Name of the station attached to the alarm Alarm Group Basic tag group of the alarm Alarm Formatted message defined for the alarm Value Current value of the alarm variable updated according to the selected option in alarm options Acknowledged Alarm acknowledgment time if the alarm is not acknowledged By Name of the operator who has acknowledged the alarm indicate when the alarm is acknowledged an acknowledgment performed automatically or from the supervised application This list can be customized and sorted One can notably suppress some columns or add some of others Code Numerical code associated with the alarm tag Reference Reference of the alarm tag On call Group Name of the on call group associated with the alarm C Comment indicator R Report indicator Reset Date of alarm reset come back to normal state Initial value Value of the alarm variable at alarm time Comment Comment about the alarm The current state of an alarm is represented by a configurable specific color see 7 3 Display options Default color Status Red Alarm active and not acknowledged Mauve Alarm inactive and not acknowledged Black Alarm active and acknowledged G
343. tion will be traced in the event log Sequence This list displays the ordered sequence of variables and outputs that will be written during the execution of the command Each variable or output is designated by an external reference under the form server topiclitem DDE reference server item OPC reference or driver block output driver reference The value to write can be set when defining the command Value column That value can also be defined later every time the command is used The defined sequence can include timers Wait with time counted in seconds Use the buttons 4 and rl to modify the execution order of the sequence by moving respectively up and down the external reference or the timer selected in the list Button Write Click on this button to add a new variable or output reference to the sequence see 5 10 Selection of an external tag In the displayed dialog box select the desired type DDE OPC or external and reference Button Wait Click on this button to insert a timer in the sequence Define the value of the wished time to wait in the field Associated value time in seconds then validate the typed value by clicking on the Apply button Button Edit Click on this button to modify the external reference selected in the list This action displays the dialog box of selection of an external variable see 5 10 Selection of an external tag Button Remove Clic
344. transmission amp TIME amp Current time in format HH MM SS amp PAGES amp Number of page in the report These references can be used several times The font and position of the values will be those of their references e The page foot to write on the first page and or the other pages As for the header the foot page is build following a model RTF file and a size of page foot If the size of the formatted file exceeds the size of the foot idem for the header the display is truncated The header and the page foot of the first page can be different of the headers and foot pages of the other pages e The body of the fax The body is also build from a model RTF file but it is never truncated the report stretches over several pages if necessary The references used for the header and foot page are always valid For the body it is possible to define a structure with reference on the alarms This structure is repeated for each alarm The added references are the following amp BODY amp Begin of the structure to repeat for each alarm amp ALDATE amp Date of the alarm amp ALTIME amp Time of the alarm in format HH MM SS amp ALMESS amp Alarm message amp ALINSTRUC amp Instruction file that will be inserted in the fax amp ENDBODY amp End of the structure to repeat for each alarm All the references between amp BODY amp and amp ENDBODY amp will be replaced for each alarm by the corresponding values e The fax transmi
345. tructions attached to the alarm On alarm or event detection or on return to a normal state recording of the event in the event log On alarm setting recording of the alarm in the alarm table with all contextual information associated On event set or reset or on alarm acknowledgment possibility to execute a configurable list of actions call of on call groups call of operators execution of a sequence of commands execution of a message processor script launching of an application playing of a vocal message on the local station Triggering of calls using the available resources and the suitable media For alarm calls management of resumption procedures and call of relief operators in case of failure or no call acknowledgment 1 4 Introduction e Transmission of alphanumeric numerical or vocal messages Possibility of formatting of alphanumeric message with static parameter group priority or contextual and dynamic information current state or value of tags of the supervised application e Call acknowledgment taking into account of the received call by the operator either locally or at a distance by telephone DTMF keys or from a remote terminal e Alarm acknowledgment taking into account of the alarm by the operator either locally or at a distance by telephone DTMF keys or from a remote terminal Possibility to acknowledge alarms either individually by functional group or globally Option of automatic alarm ack
346. tton ALERT User Guide 4 27 User Interface Tree menu ag Groups SRE Maintenance Be Call e Calls locked Gp Program Add a user M Fire Add a team e Faste E Delete Rename 8e Properties Paste Delete Rename Properties Call Call of the active team of the group see 6 9 Sending a message Call locked Locking Unlocking of the calls of the group see 6 14 Schedule derogation Call locking Program Configuration of the weekly on call program of the group see 5 5 On call program Add a user Creation of a new operator assigned to the group see 5 1 1 User properties Add a team Creation of a new team in the group see 5 4 1 Team properties Assignment to the group of a list of operators prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the user list another group or a team Deletion of the group After confirmation the group and its teams are definitively deleted The operators assigned to the group are not deleted Change the name of the group Edition of the properties of the group see 5 3 1 On call group properties Team view menu choice fag Ee Users w Teams amp Maintenance 5 Open Open the list of the operators of the selected team Call Call of the active not relief operators of SST MARTIN Roger the selected teams see 6 9 Sending a Open message Call On call forced Begin End of the redirection of calls
347. tutes This dialog box can be called from the property dialog box of a user see 5 1 1 User properties or directly from the tree of the main screen or associated views by selecting the command Substituted by in the contextual menus attached to the On call management sub tree see 4 6 1 7 On call Management Substituted by Orcal Group Maintenance MARTIN Roger OFF duty This dialog box allows the designation of a substitute for one or several users in each one of their groups of membership It displays the list of all the groups of membership of the user concerned by the substitution except when the group is implicitly indicated when calling the substitution dialog box designation of a substitute in a view lt Group name gt or lt Team name gt If the dialog box was called with several users selected designation o a same substitute for several users the list of all the groups of membership of the user is displayed If the user selected when calling the substitution dialog box was substituted in a group the name of its substitute is displayed on the corresponding line If not its status is indicated Off duty or Active If there were several users selected when calling the substitution dialog box the groups for which the status is not defined in a uniform way for the selected users are marked with an indefinite status For each displayed group select the wished substitute for the group in
348. two times in a short time the remote control procedure will be started see 8 5 Remote Control First command following connection identification of answering machine 4 Following commands listen to the vocal guide Switch to terminal mode If the terminal server Visual Access is not activated this command is denied message terminal server out of order Available commands from the telephonic keypad 33 This number is defined by the maxalarm parameter in the vocal section of Alert ini file 34 If the option management of answering machine is validated in the vocal server options see 7 7 1 Vocal Server options ALERT User Guide 8 3 Appendix 8 2 Terminal WAP server Alert can be used in connection with the terminal server Visual Access To launch and to close automatically this application at the same time as A ert it is necessary to define Visual Access like an external application see 5 20 External applications with positioning options of automatic opening and closing This configuration is done automatically at the installation time when one chosen to install Alert and Visual Access together ALERT COMNEISE On call Managemer MICROMEDIA INTERNATIONAL switch between fields PEAR i ENTER Repeat Visual Access responds to calls of remote terminals PC with terminal emulation videotext terminal through its own communication ports or through ports shared with Alert
349. ue if polling stopped on the station red if alarm not acknowledged in group or sub group blue if alarms acknowledged and active in group or sub group a P if link failure with a tag of group or sub group Group amp blue if polling stopped on the station Group red if alarm not acknowledged in the group js blue if alarms acknowledged and active in the group Group amp red if link failure with a tag of the group Group ff On Call Management Users S2 Groups 1 Active on call group amp red if active team not reachable 8 Team amp red if unreachable team 8 Active team amp red if unreachable team 1 Customizable icon 2 Flashing if call in progress 3 No reachable operator user off duty or without valid dial number ALERT User Guide 4 11 User Interface 4 6 1 1 Root The root of the tree provides a synoptic view of the whole stations controlled by the application Its contextual menu allows the creation of new stations and the configuration of the general options of the application It also allows the root icon to be modified Tree menu Acknowledgment Acknowledgement Acknowledgment of all alarms of the ve application all stations Al stalim Polling Stop Restore the DDE OPC connections Add a station Creation of a new Station see 5 12 Paste 1 e eael Station propertie
350. uration of the general options of the vocal server e Messages definition of messages used by the vocal server and vocal messages attached to the tag groups e Voice synthesis configuration of the voice synthesis this tab is only displayed when the voice synthesis option is installed e Usage selection of the telephonic keys used by the vocal server 7 7 1 Vocal Server options The Options page of the Vocal Server dialog box displays the general options of the vocal server Vocal Server Usage Messages English British Heather Adult Female Identification iM Identification before playing messages Corespondent authentication password Explicit call acknowledgment key 3 ack J reject Maximum number of identification attempts 0 na limit Waited length for identifier 0 to 4 digits Waited length for station identifier 0 to 4 digits Time out for identifier entry 30 SEC Time between message repetition 0 no repeat 3 SEC Other Options Limited access on incoming call force callback iM Acknowledgment of alarms by telephone iw Answering machine mgt kev messages sent after 8 SEC Maxinun communication time without action 600 sec Masinium record duration by telephone 60 SEC ced in oe ALERT User Guide 7 23 Options Voice The dropdown list selects the voice used by the vocal server voice This selection also defines the vocal server language Identificat
351. us methods can be used e Directly create a new operator in the team by selection of the Add a user command in the contextual menu associated with the User view A dialog box allows the parameters of the user to be configured see 5 1 1 User properties ALERT User Guide 4 29 User Interface e Use the Paste command of the contextual menu to insert in the team a list of operators who were prior copied in the clipboard XML format from the user list a group or another team The copied operators are just assigned to the team They are not removed from the user list nor from the origin group or team e Perform a drag and drop operation the operators are first selected in the view associated with the Users branch or any group or team branch then dragged with the mouse over the icon of the target team The operators dragged and dropped are just assigned to the team They are not removed from the user list If they are issued from another group or team they are automatically detached from it except if the CTRL key is keeping pressed at the dropping time cursor displayed to signal a copy operation The operators added to a team are automatically added to the parent group The following actions can be performed on the team selected in the tree e Call of the team resulting in the automatic selection of the active not relief operators of the team for a message transmission e Perform a team changeover to s
352. user optional O to 4 digits This code is used to authenticate the user during a local or remote access Off duty substituted by When a user is off duty he is never called when an alarm concerning one of his groups is going active even though he belongs to a team that is active at this time This option can be used for a user temporarily absent without to have to modify the schedule table When a user is off duty a substitute can be designated for each of his groups by clicking on the button El on the right of the substitute display field See 6 8 Definition of substitutes Every time a user is set off duty with or without substitute it is recorded in the event log Dial numbers List of the available numbers that can be used to reach the operator ALERT User Guide 5 3 Configuration gt Column Id Number identifier associated with a color The check box validates or not the number in the call sequence A stared Id indicates that the number is not a final number and that consequently the call must continue using the following number gt Column Type Type of the media to use Communication driver gt Column Number Number or address of the operator in accordance with the selected media gt Column Calls Number of tries in case of unsuccessful call of the number time between each try in brackets in seconds gt Column Ack Number of tries in case of no call acknowledgement time waited for re
353. uthorizes the users of the group in question to have access to that tag for status consultation and acknowledgment If the tag must be accessible to a group that we do not want to call a call group action with call inhibition must nevertheless be defined 2 The action Call user produces a type service message call but does not attach the tag to the called user If the user does not belong to any of the groups to call he will not have access to the tag status consultation acknowledgment 3 A script can be used to parse the event and consecutively activate alarms or to trig actions in response to the event Only the Message Processor scripts that are defined with the Alarm interface can be executed These scripts are started at the software launching time and have to block themselves for waiting the event instruction RECEIVEALARM Click on the Add button to add an action to the action list Click on the Edit button to modify the action selected in the action list Click on the Delete button to remove the action selected from the action list 5 40 Configuration Use the buttons 4 and Lz in order to respectively move up or down the action selected in the action list The actions are simultaneously executed regardless of the others but the execution order is the list order ALERT User Guide 5 41 Configuration 5 11 1 Format of a tag value This dialog box called during the configuration of an event see above de
354. validated by default indicates that when the call of this number succeeds the call of the operator is validated and that consequently the following numbers of the call sequence will not be called relief numbers If this option is not validated the call of the number is considered as simply informative and does not require a call acknowledgment SMS transmission followed by a vocal call of the operator for example For the vocal calls this option is always validated and is not modifiable grayed option e Automatic call acknowledgment This option indicates when it is validated that the call of the operator will be automatically acknowledged when it succeeds and will thus not require a later call back for acknowledgment 5 6 Configuration If the Default option is checked the option value selected indicated in grayed by the radio buttons Yes and Wo is that which was defined in the general alarm options see 7 4 Alarm options For the vocal calls this option is always validated and is not modifiable grayed option e Attempt number if call not acknowledged Maximum number of calls of the number when the call succeeded but the operator did not acknowledge the call within the defined delay This number can be between 1 and 9 The call can be acknowledged locally or remote by telephone by SMS or from a client Station If the Default option is checked the value selected indicated in grayed in the field is that which was
355. ve messages e For alarms a specific sound is played depending on the associated on call group if the alarm option play group tone is validated and if a sound file is attached to the group e A vocal message identifying the event if the option talk voice message is validated and if a vocal message is attached to the event On option that message can be repeated in a continuous loop until the alarm acknowledgment If the tag was declared as alarm the following operations are done e Updating of the alarm table and alarm history e Updating of indicators ALARM and ACK on the alarm status bar 2 2 User management The list of operators who will be called to intervene either locally or at a distance is defined in the user file Every operator is defined by e His name and first name e His usual language e Areal or virtual type e Anumerical operator identifier ID 1 to 4 digits e Anumerical access code password 0 to 4 digits e His user class e An off duty option with or without substitute e Alist of call numbers e Optionally a weekly program defining the automatic assignment of his call numbers e An option to be called on event reset e An option to be called on alarm acknowledgment The name and first name are used to identify the operator during a local access on the Station login There are also used for recording in the event log events concerning him calls acknowledgments and for int
356. vise in the item field Button OPC Click on this button to browse OPC servers select one and import tags from this one Bouton Add Click on this button to create the selected tag A new dialog box is displayed to define the properties of the tag see 5 11 Tag properties After validation the tag is added to the supervision list Button Modify Click on this button to edit the properties of the tag selected in the supervision list see 5 11 Tag properties A double click in the supervision list produces the same effect Button Delete Click on this button to remove the tag selected in the supervision list Button mport Click on this button to import the list of tags defined in the supervised application with all their attributes alarm messages priority This button is only validated when a ALERT User Guide 5 31 Configuration Mediator module is selected in the Options supplies the import service Supervision dialog box and if this module After validation by clicking on the OK button the defined DDE and OPC connections are automatically established 5 10 Selection of an external tag This dialog box is used to browse and select an external tag to supervise It can be called to define an external reference of tag by selecting the command Add a tag in the contextual menus attached to the Tags tree of the main screen or its associated views It also can
357. wing parameters can be configured Type Type of the connection on the port gt Direct Direct connection with an external call system gt Hayes Modem Connection through a Hayes modem Relief When this option is checked the modem will be only used in relief mode when none of the main communication ports not defined as relief can be used ports in failure This option allows a relief calling device to be used in case of problem with the usual calling systems Baud Default baud rate This value can be automatically changed by the driver using the port during an outgoing call Bits Number of bits by transmitted character This value can be automatically changed by the driver using the port during an outgoing call Stops Number of stop bits transmitted at the end of each character This value can be automatically changed by the driver using the port during an outgoing call Parity Type of parity This value can be automatically changed by the driver using the port during an outgoing call Flow control Type of flow control The Hardware choice corresponds to a flow control by the RTS CTS signals of the V24 junction The Xon Xoff choice corresponds to a software flow control by sending the Xoff code 13h to request the emitter to suspend the data transmission and the Xon code 11h to request for the resumption This value can be automatically changed by the driver using the port during an outgoing call Inc
358. with JJ day of month 01 to 31 MM month 01 to 12 XXXXXX 6 hexadecimal digits representing the daily schedule in the form of a bit field a bit being set if the operator is on call the 1st bit MSB corresponding to Oh Example 03FFF8 corresponds to the daily schedule This item cannot be written poke denied ALERT User Guide 8 35 Appendix The message item is shown for reading by a line of 4 fields separated by tabulations and ended by a carriage return CR Field 1 Index of the message starting from 1 Field 2 Date time of deposit of message format DD MM HH MM SS Field 3 Name first name of user who sent the message Field 4 Message content In writing only the value 0 is allowed which provokes the deletion of all the messages sent to the operator 8 12 4 GROUP topic The GROUP topic contains in addition to the DDE protocol items some items concerning on call groups 8 12 4 1 DDE protocol items gt TOPICITEMLIST List of items supported under the GROUP topic gt CONVCOUNT Current number of DDE conversations established with the GROUP topic gt ADVISECOUNT Current number of advise transactions with items of the GROUP topic 8 12 4 2 Group management items gt GROUPCOUNT Number of defined on call groups gt GROUPLIST List of on call groups The GROUP topic also includes for each group gt a lt GROUP gt STATUS item that indicates the on call status of the group designated by
359. xt sessions The width of each column can be visually adjusted by positioning the mouse cursor on the concerned size bar of the title line then clicking and dragging the bar to get the wanted size This list can also be sorted according to the increasing or decreasing order of each of its columns To do this click on the title of the wanted column an arrow will indicate the increasing sense of the sorting Click again on the title of the column to reverse the sort order reversed arrow To perform a fast research for a value in the list select the research column by clicking on its title then scroll the list with the scroll bar a bubble displays the content of the selected column for the 1st line of the list corresponding to the scroll bar position ALERT User Guide 6 37 Operation Option Display all items When this option is checked the value of all the tags of the supervision list are displayed in the list including those which are not polled no DDE or OPC tags Button Start connections This button allows the establishment or re establishment of the connections of the tags designated as polled tags in the supervision list Note The establishment of the links is automatically performed at start up of the application However if some links couldn t have been started closed application or have been broken since this command gives the possibility of manual restoration Button Close connections Click on this button to
360. y AlarmLog mdb The history database includes the following tables e ALARMLOG history of alarms Field name Type Description Userld No ae DT of the user who acknowledged the alarm cf USERS Time stamp of the alarm acknowledgment AlarmValue Tag value at the alarm time CommentText M mo Comment associated with the alarm The alarm history table is updated in real time for every alarm event activation reset acknowledgment e CALLGROUPLOG history of group calls Status Numeric 0 no call performed 1 call aborted before the end of call cycle 2 call transmitted wait for call acknowledgment 3 unwarned group call cycle failed 4 Warned group calls acknowledgedl The call group table is updated at the beginning of the call cycle EndTime and Status fields set to NULL and at the end of the call cycle ALERT User Guide 8 9 Appendix e CALLLOG history of user calls CallLogld Identifier of the user call Identifier of the called user cf USERS Driverld Numeric Identifier of the used communication driver cf DRIVERS CallNumber Called number Timestamp of the begin of the call Timestamp of the end of the call Status Numeric 0 no call performed 1 call aborted 2 call suspended 3 call transmitted wait for call acknowledgment 4 call failed 5 call acknowledged 6 call not acknowledged failed The call table is updated at the beginning of the call EndTime and Status
361. y of acknowledgment of the basic group of an alarm ordered from a driver vocal If this field is empty the tag is attached to no basic group The button El on the right of the field gives access to the configuration of the properties of the selected group see 5 14 Tag group properties Button Val ue Click on this button to define the display format of the value of the tag See 5 11 1 Format of a tag value DDE OPC Polling If the reference of the tag is a DDE or OPC reference the polling mode of the tag must be defined gt Advise When this option is checked the tag will be put in permanent polling by the means of a DDE or OPC ADVISE request near the concerned server The supervised tag then will be automatically transmitted by the server to each change of its value without any other request being necessary gt Periodic Request When this option is checked the concerned tag will be the subject of explicit and periodic DDE or OPC requests These requests make it possible to control that the supervised application is always active watchdog The polling period and the response timeout can be adjusted in the supervision options see 7 2 Supervision options This option should be validated only for a restricted number of tags insofar as the active polling is consuming resources and as it is not useful to test several variables to check that the supervised application is always active gt
362. y one station is in charge for the calls at a specific time In case of failure of the active station the other Station automatically takes over from the first one without any loss of information The configuration of redundant stations is automatically synchronized e Alert can be entirely customized for user s category and to offer a work environment adapted to each operator displayed menu and toolbar accessible screens authorized commands ALERT User Guide 1 3 Introduction 1 2 Functions Basic functions of Alert are the following Management of modems telephone or GSM ISDN controllers compatible with the CAPI 2 interface or specific call systems via the PC communication ports direct handling of physical ports COM1 to COM64 or throw the TAPI interface of Windows modems installed in the Control Panel Management of a user database which can contain until 999 operators name first name identifier password language user class call numbers on duty off duty status substitute weekly program of call numbers An operator can be declared as virtual in order to define a media used by several operators e g mobile phone or pager Management of on call groups a group defining a list of operators who can be called to intervene on a specific alarm category Fire group for example with facility of relief group Capability of command transmission to an external application to signal starting success failure or acknowle
363. y the software license e Check the option Database export activation to activate the database export functionality Uncheck this option to stop the database export e Click on the Data links button to select the files that define the link with the external database gt AlertDB_AlarmDef udl configuration database gt AlertDB_AlarmLog udl history database By default these files are installed in the application subdirectory Bases The link parameters with the wished database must be prior configured and tested by opening each of these files by double click Remote control This group defines the management parameters of external remote control software see 8 5 Remote Control e The Used port dropdown list designates the communication port to be shared with the remote control software This port will be automatically assigned to the remote control software either at the software launching if the remote control software is running at this time and is using the port or on explicit requirement of a remote user Command 99 of the vocal server e The Waiting call edit field defines the maximum time waited for the remote control callback This time is counted from the line hang up After this delay the remote control software is breakdown and the communication port is retrieved by Alert In order to give time to the remote control application to be launched it is preferable do not enter a value below 30 seconds e
364. y way of associating a tag with a group To authorize a group which should not be called to have access to the tag a call action for the group in question must be defined with invalidation of the call Group to call This dropdown list designates the on call group to call Select this group in the list of the defined groups by clicking on the arrow of the dropdown list If the desired group does not exist type its name in the edit field An empty group is automatically created It will be necessary to return later to the group configuration to assign users and organize the teams Call enabled This option can be used to validate or invalidate the call The Default choice is only enabled for calls on reset or acknowledgment When this choice is done the call option is given by the corresponding option in the general alarm options For the calls on event activation the call invalidation allows a group to be attached to a tag for consultation and acknowledgment by the users of the designated group without having to call the group in question Call delayed This option allows the call to be delayed during the time indicated in the adjacent edit field It is only available for the events defined as alarms If this option is validated the detected alarm will be processed as others event log alarm table but the call will be triggered at the end of the time specified in the adjacent field and only if the alarm is still active at
365. yboard that will be used by the vocal server Vocal Server Options Messages Voice synthesis Listening to present alarme and user service messages Starting record of report or vocal message Listening to recorded report or vocal message Validation of recorded message recording by telephone Call acknowledgment option explicit call acknowledgment Listening to User service messages Deleting service messages Request for callback enabled only on incoming call Callback is performed as soon as the line is released Listening to unacknowledged alarms one by one at press acknowledging the last listened alarm by key AL end press acknowledging group of the last listened alarm Acknowledgment of an alarm by typing its IO code Hang up command Call reject option explicit call acknowledgment Switch to Telematic Terminal mode If Visual Access is hot activated this command i denied beep at press after connection answering machine identification if Validated Following press listening to vocal guide ced in we When the box associated with a key is not checked the key in question is not interpreted by the vocal server The interpretation of this key when the box is checked is defined by the associated text When the option Acknowledgment of an alarm by typing its ID code is checked the alarm acknowledgment by telephone is performed by typing the key 8 followed by the identifier code o
366. zed by using the Properties command of the associated contextual menu To select a set of contiguous tags keep the SHIFT key pressed during the selection To select disjoined sets of tags keep the CTRL key pressed during the selection 4 18 User Interface Tree menu di Supervision a Tags Acknowledgment Gro w Polling Add a tag Delete Properties Import Delete Properties Acknowledgement Acknowledgment of all alarms of the selected data server Polling Stop Restore the connections with the data server Add a tag Creation of a new tag attached to the selected data server see 5 10 Selection of an external tag and 5 11 Tag properties Importation of the supervision list from the OPC mediator with preset of the selected data server This command is only available for OPC data servers Deletion of all tags of the selected data server Edition of the properties of the data server icon change Associated view menu Excell T est xlsJAlarms 7 Label a Acknowledgment a Comment a Report a Alarm masked A Add a tag by Copy Delete Definition Properties Copy Delete Definition Properties Acknowledgement Acknowledgment of selected alarms Start ventilation transfc Comment Add a comment about the selected alarms 8 Report Edit a report about the selected alarms Consultation of the report when a report already exists for only

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

CONTENTS Safety instructions - Wiki Karat  Pioneer CDX-FM677 User's Manual  Digidesign Guida di ADAT Bridge I/O  BenQ DC P500 User`s Manual - Downloaded from ManualsCamera  DX2000A/B Smoke Alarm User`s Manual  Waste King Inline Water Chiller User's Manual  8635  V series manual - Musical Fidelity  FL100 1199 WBH Druck intern.indd - Peterhans  CO5BOLD User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file